10883 lines
473 KiB
TeX
10883 lines
473 KiB
TeX
\documentclass[b5paper]{book}
|
|
\usepackage{hyperref}
|
|
\usepackage{makeidx}
|
|
\usepackage{amssymb}
|
|
\usepackage{color}
|
|
\usepackage{alltt}
|
|
\usepackage{graphicx}
|
|
\usepackage{layout}
|
|
\def\union{\cup}
|
|
\def\intersect{\cap}
|
|
\def\getsrandom{\stackrel{\rm R}{\gets}}
|
|
\def\cross{\times}
|
|
\def\cat{\hspace{0.5em} \| \hspace{0.5em}}
|
|
\def\catn{$\|$}
|
|
\def\divides{\hspace{0.3em} | \hspace{0.3em}}
|
|
\def\nequiv{\not\equiv}
|
|
\def\approx{\raisebox{0.2ex}{\mbox{\small $\sim$}}}
|
|
\def\lcm{{\rm lcm}}
|
|
\def\gcd{{\rm gcd}}
|
|
\def\log{{\rm log}}
|
|
\def\ord{{\rm ord}}
|
|
\def\abs{{\mathit abs}}
|
|
\def\rep{{\mathit rep}}
|
|
\def\mod{{\mathit\ mod\ }}
|
|
\renewcommand{\pmod}[1]{\ ({\rm mod\ }{#1})}
|
|
\newcommand{\floor}[1]{\left\lfloor{#1}\right\rfloor}
|
|
\newcommand{\ceil}[1]{\left\lceil{#1}\right\rceil}
|
|
\def\Or{{\rm\ or\ }}
|
|
\def\And{{\rm\ and\ }}
|
|
\def\iff{\hspace{1em}\Longleftrightarrow\hspace{1em}}
|
|
\def\implies{\Rightarrow}
|
|
\def\undefined{{\rm ``undefined"}}
|
|
\def\Proof{\vspace{1ex}\noindent {\bf Proof:}\hspace{1em}}
|
|
\let\oldphi\phi
|
|
\def\phi{\varphi}
|
|
\def\Pr{{\rm Pr}}
|
|
\newcommand{\str}[1]{{\mathbf{#1}}}
|
|
\def\F{{\mathbb F}}
|
|
\def\N{{\mathbb N}}
|
|
\def\Z{{\mathbb Z}}
|
|
\def\R{{\mathbb R}}
|
|
\def\C{{\mathbb C}}
|
|
\def\Q{{\mathbb Q}}
|
|
\definecolor{DGray}{gray}{0.5}
|
|
\newcommand{\emailaddr}[1]{\mbox{$<${#1}$>$}}
|
|
\def\twiddle{\raisebox{0.3ex}{\mbox{\tiny $\sim$}}}
|
|
\def\gap{\vspace{0.5ex}}
|
|
\makeindex
|
|
\begin{document}
|
|
\frontmatter
|
|
\pagestyle{empty}
|
|
\title{Multi--Precision Math}
|
|
\author{\mbox{
|
|
%\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{c}
|
|
Tom St Denis \\
|
|
Algonquin College \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Mads Rasmussen \\
|
|
Open Communications Security \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Greg Rose \\
|
|
QUALCOMM Australia \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
%\end{small}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
\maketitle
|
|
This text has been placed in the public domain. This text corresponds to the v0.38 release of the
|
|
LibTomMath project.
|
|
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
Tom St Denis
|
|
111 Banning Rd
|
|
Ottawa, Ontario
|
|
K2L 1C3
|
|
Canada
|
|
|
|
Phone: 1-613-836-3160
|
|
Email: tomstdenis@gmail.com
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
|
|
This text is formatted to the international B5 paper size of 176mm wide by 250mm tall using the \LaTeX{}
|
|
{\em book} macro package and the Perl {\em booker} package.
|
|
|
|
\tableofcontents
|
|
\listoffigures
|
|
\chapter*{Prefaces}
|
|
When I tell people about my LibTom projects and that I release them as public domain they are often puzzled.
|
|
They ask why I did it and especially why I continue to work on them for free. The best I can explain it is ``Because I can.''
|
|
Which seems odd and perhaps too terse for adult conversation. I often qualify it with ``I am able, I am willing.'' which
|
|
perhaps explains it better. I am the first to admit there is not anything that special with what I have done. Perhaps
|
|
others can see that too and then we would have a society to be proud of. My LibTom projects are what I am doing to give
|
|
back to society in the form of tools and knowledge that can help others in their endeavours.
|
|
|
|
I started writing this book because it was the most logical task to further my goal of open academia. The LibTomMath source
|
|
code itself was written to be easy to follow and learn from. There are times, however, where pure C source code does not
|
|
explain the algorithms properly. Hence this book. The book literally starts with the foundation of the library and works
|
|
itself outwards to the more complicated algorithms. The use of both pseudo--code and verbatim source code provides a duality
|
|
of ``theory'' and ``practice'' that the computer science students of the world shall appreciate. I never deviate too far
|
|
from relatively straightforward algebra and I hope that this book can be a valuable learning asset.
|
|
|
|
This book and indeed much of the LibTom projects would not exist in their current form if it was not for a plethora
|
|
of kind people donating their time, resources and kind words to help support my work. Writing a text of significant
|
|
length (along with the source code) is a tiresome and lengthy process. Currently the LibTom project is four years old,
|
|
comprises of literally thousands of users and over 100,000 lines of source code, TeX and other material. People like Mads and Greg
|
|
were there at the beginning to encourage me to work well. It is amazing how timely validation from others can boost morale to
|
|
continue the project. Definitely my parents were there for me by providing room and board during the many months of work in 2003.
|
|
|
|
To my many friends whom I have met through the years I thank you for the good times and the words of encouragement. I hope I
|
|
honour your kind gestures with this project.
|
|
|
|
Open Source. Open Academia. Open Minds.
|
|
|
|
\begin{flushright} Tom St Denis \end{flushright}
|
|
|
|
\newpage
|
|
I found the opportunity to work with Tom appealing for several reasons, not only could I broaden my own horizons, but also
|
|
contribute to educate others facing the problem of having to handle big number mathematical calculations.
|
|
|
|
This book is Tom's child and he has been caring and fostering the project ever since the beginning with a clear mind of
|
|
how he wanted the project to turn out. I have helped by proofreading the text and we have had several discussions about
|
|
the layout and language used.
|
|
|
|
I hold a masters degree in cryptography from the University of Southern Denmark and have always been interested in the
|
|
practical aspects of cryptography.
|
|
|
|
Having worked in the security consultancy business for several years in S\~{a}o Paulo, Brazil, I have been in touch with a
|
|
great deal of work in which multiple precision mathematics was needed. Understanding the possibilities for speeding up
|
|
multiple precision calculations is often very important since we deal with outdated machine architecture where modular
|
|
reductions, for example, become painfully slow.
|
|
|
|
This text is for people who stop and wonder when first examining algorithms such as RSA for the first time and asks
|
|
themselves, ``You tell me this is only secure for large numbers, fine; but how do you implement these numbers?''
|
|
|
|
\begin{flushright}
|
|
Mads Rasmussen
|
|
|
|
S\~{a}o Paulo - SP
|
|
|
|
Brazil
|
|
\end{flushright}
|
|
|
|
\newpage
|
|
It's all because I broke my leg. That just happened to be at about the same time that Tom asked for someone to review the section of the book about
|
|
Karatsuba multiplication. I was laid up, alone and immobile, and thought ``Why not?'' I vaguely knew what Karatsuba multiplication was, but not
|
|
really, so I thought I could help, learn, and stop myself from watching daytime cable TV, all at once.
|
|
|
|
At the time of writing this, I've still not met Tom or Mads in meatspace. I've been following Tom's progress since his first splash on the
|
|
sci.crypt Usenet news group. I watched him go from a clueless newbie, to the cryptographic equivalent of a reformed smoker, to a real
|
|
contributor to the field, over a period of about two years. I've been impressed with his obvious intelligence, and astounded by his productivity.
|
|
Of course, he's young enough to be my own child, so he doesn't have my problems with staying awake.
|
|
|
|
When I reviewed that single section of the book, in its very earliest form, I was very pleasantly surprised. So I decided to collaborate more fully,
|
|
and at least review all of it, and perhaps write some bits too. There's still a long way to go with it, and I have watched a number of close
|
|
friends go through the mill of publication, so I think that the way to go is longer than Tom thinks it is. Nevertheless, it's a good effort,
|
|
and I'm pleased to be involved with it.
|
|
|
|
\begin{flushright}
|
|
Greg Rose, Sydney, Australia, June 2003.
|
|
\end{flushright}
|
|
|
|
\mainmatter
|
|
\pagestyle{headings}
|
|
\chapter{Introduction}
|
|
\section{Multiple Precision Arithmetic}
|
|
|
|
\subsection{What is Multiple Precision Arithmetic?}
|
|
When we think of long-hand arithmetic such as addition or multiplication we rarely consider the fact that we instinctively
|
|
raise or lower the precision of the numbers we are dealing with. For example, in decimal we almost immediate can
|
|
reason that $7$ times $6$ is $42$. However, $42$ has two digits of precision as opposed to one digit we started with.
|
|
Further multiplications of say $3$ result in a larger precision result $126$. In these few examples we have multiple
|
|
precisions for the numbers we are working with. Despite the various levels of precision a single subset\footnote{With the occasional optimization.}
|
|
of algorithms can be designed to accomodate them.
|
|
|
|
By way of comparison a fixed or single precision operation would lose precision on various operations. For example, in
|
|
the decimal system with fixed precision $6 \cdot 7 = 2$.
|
|
|
|
Essentially at the heart of computer based multiple precision arithmetic are the same long-hand algorithms taught in
|
|
schools to manually add, subtract, multiply and divide.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{The Need for Multiple Precision Arithmetic}
|
|
The most prevalent need for multiple precision arithmetic, often referred to as ``bignum'' math, is within the implementation
|
|
of public-key cryptography algorithms. Algorithms such as RSA \cite{RSAREF} and Diffie-Hellman \cite{DHREF} require
|
|
integers of significant magnitude to resist known cryptanalytic attacks. For example, at the time of this writing a
|
|
typical RSA modulus would be at least greater than $10^{309}$. However, modern programming languages such as ISO C \cite{ISOC} and
|
|
Java \cite{JAVA} only provide instrinsic support for integers which are relatively small and single precision.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|r|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Data Type} & \textbf{Range} \\
|
|
\hline char & $-128 \ldots 127$ \\
|
|
\hline short & $-32768 \ldots 32767$ \\
|
|
\hline long & $-2147483648 \ldots 2147483647$ \\
|
|
\hline long long & $-9223372036854775808 \ldots 9223372036854775807$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Typical Data Types for the C Programming Language}
|
|
\label{fig:ISOC}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
The largest data type guaranteed to be provided by the ISO C programming
|
|
language\footnote{As per the ISO C standard. However, each compiler vendor is allowed to augment the precision as they
|
|
see fit.} can only represent values up to $10^{19}$ as shown in figure \ref{fig:ISOC}. On its own the C language is
|
|
insufficient to accomodate the magnitude required for the problem at hand. An RSA modulus of magnitude $10^{19}$ could be
|
|
trivially factored\footnote{A Pollard-Rho factoring would take only $2^{16}$ time.} on the average desktop computer,
|
|
rendering any protocol based on the algorithm insecure. Multiple precision algorithms solve this very problem by
|
|
extending the range of representable integers while using single precision data types.
|
|
|
|
Most advancements in fast multiple precision arithmetic stem from the need for faster and more efficient cryptographic
|
|
primitives. Faster modular reduction and exponentiation algorithms such as Barrett's algorithm, which have appeared in
|
|
various cryptographic journals, can render algorithms such as RSA and Diffie-Hellman more efficient. In fact, several
|
|
major companies such as RSA Security, Certicom and Entrust have built entire product lines on the implementation and
|
|
deployment of efficient algorithms.
|
|
|
|
However, cryptography is not the only field of study that can benefit from fast multiple precision integer routines.
|
|
Another auxiliary use of multiple precision integers is high precision floating point data types.
|
|
The basic IEEE \cite{IEEE} standard floating point type is made up of an integer mantissa $q$, an exponent $e$ and a sign bit $s$.
|
|
Numbers are given in the form $n = q \cdot b^e \cdot -1^s$ where $b = 2$ is the most common base for IEEE. Since IEEE
|
|
floating point is meant to be implemented in hardware the precision of the mantissa is often fairly small
|
|
(\textit{23, 48 and 64 bits}). The mantissa is merely an integer and a multiple precision integer could be used to create
|
|
a mantissa of much larger precision than hardware alone can efficiently support. This approach could be useful where
|
|
scientific applications must minimize the total output error over long calculations.
|
|
|
|
Yet another use for large integers is within arithmetic on polynomials of large characteristic (i.e. $GF(p)[x]$ for large $p$).
|
|
In fact the library discussed within this text has already been used to form a polynomial basis library\footnote{See \url{http://poly.libtomcrypt.org} for more details.}.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Benefits of Multiple Precision Arithmetic}
|
|
\index{precision}
|
|
The benefit of multiple precision representations over single or fixed precision representations is that
|
|
no precision is lost while representing the result of an operation which requires excess precision. For example,
|
|
the product of two $n$-bit integers requires at least $2n$ bits of precision to be represented faithfully. A multiple
|
|
precision algorithm would augment the precision of the destination to accomodate the result while a single precision system
|
|
would truncate excess bits to maintain a fixed level of precision.
|
|
|
|
It is possible to implement algorithms which require large integers with fixed precision algorithms. For example, elliptic
|
|
curve cryptography (\textit{ECC}) is often implemented on smartcards by fixing the precision of the integers to the maximum
|
|
size the system will ever need. Such an approach can lead to vastly simpler algorithms which can accomodate the
|
|
integers required even if the host platform cannot natively accomodate them\footnote{For example, the average smartcard
|
|
processor has an 8 bit accumulator.}. However, as efficient as such an approach may be, the resulting source code is not
|
|
normally very flexible. It cannot, at runtime, accomodate inputs of higher magnitude than the designer anticipated.
|
|
|
|
Multiple precision algorithms have the most overhead of any style of arithmetic. For the the most part the
|
|
overhead can be kept to a minimum with careful planning, but overall, it is not well suited for most memory starved
|
|
platforms. However, multiple precision algorithms do offer the most flexibility in terms of the magnitude of the
|
|
inputs. That is, the same algorithms based on multiple precision integers can accomodate any reasonable size input
|
|
without the designer's explicit forethought. This leads to lower cost of ownership for the code as it only has to
|
|
be written and tested once.
|
|
|
|
\section{Purpose of This Text}
|
|
The purpose of this text is to instruct the reader regarding how to implement efficient multiple precision algorithms.
|
|
That is to not only explain a limited subset of the core theory behind the algorithms but also the various ``house keeping''
|
|
elements that are neglected by authors of other texts on the subject. Several well reknowned texts \cite{TAOCPV2,HAC}
|
|
give considerably detailed explanations of the theoretical aspects of algorithms and often very little information
|
|
regarding the practical implementation aspects.
|
|
|
|
In most cases how an algorithm is explained and how it is actually implemented are two very different concepts. For
|
|
example, the Handbook of Applied Cryptography (\textit{HAC}), algorithm 14.7 on page 594, gives a relatively simple
|
|
algorithm for performing multiple precision integer addition. However, the description lacks any discussion concerning
|
|
the fact that the two integer inputs may be of differing magnitudes. As a result the implementation is not as simple
|
|
as the text would lead people to believe. Similarly the division routine (\textit{algorithm 14.20, pp. 598}) does not
|
|
discuss how to handle sign or handle the dividend's decreasing magnitude in the main loop (\textit{step \#3}).
|
|
|
|
Both texts also do not discuss several key optimal algorithms required such as ``Comba'' and Karatsuba multipliers
|
|
and fast modular inversion, which we consider practical oversights. These optimal algorithms are vital to achieve
|
|
any form of useful performance in non-trivial applications.
|
|
|
|
To solve this problem the focus of this text is on the practical aspects of implementing a multiple precision integer
|
|
package. As a case study the ``LibTomMath''\footnote{Available at \url{http://math.libtomcrypt.org}} package is used
|
|
to demonstrate algorithms with real implementations\footnote{In the ISO C programming language.} that have been field
|
|
tested and work very well. The LibTomMath library is freely available on the Internet for all uses and this text
|
|
discusses a very large portion of the inner workings of the library.
|
|
|
|
The algorithms that are presented will always include at least one ``pseudo-code'' description followed
|
|
by the actual C source code that implements the algorithm. The pseudo-code can be used to implement the same
|
|
algorithm in other programming languages as the reader sees fit.
|
|
|
|
This text shall also serve as a walkthrough of the creation of multiple precision algorithms from scratch. Showing
|
|
the reader how the algorithms fit together as well as where to start on various taskings.
|
|
|
|
\section{Discussion and Notation}
|
|
\subsection{Notation}
|
|
A multiple precision integer of $n$-digits shall be denoted as $x = (x_{n-1}, \ldots, x_1, x_0)_{ \beta }$ and represent
|
|
the integer $x \equiv \sum_{i=0}^{n-1} x_i\beta^i$. The elements of the array $x$ are said to be the radix $\beta$ digits
|
|
of the integer. For example, $x = (1,2,3)_{10}$ would represent the integer
|
|
$1\cdot 10^2 + 2\cdot10^1 + 3\cdot10^0 = 123$.
|
|
|
|
\index{mp\_int}
|
|
The term ``mp\_int'' shall refer to a composite structure which contains the digits of the integer it represents, as well
|
|
as auxilary data required to manipulate the data. These additional members are discussed further in section
|
|
\ref{sec:MPINT}. For the purposes of this text a ``multiple precision integer'' and an ``mp\_int'' are assumed to be
|
|
synonymous. When an algorithm is specified to accept an mp\_int variable it is assumed the various auxliary data members
|
|
are present as well. An expression of the type \textit{variablename.item} implies that it should evaluate to the
|
|
member named ``item'' of the variable. For example, a string of characters may have a member ``length'' which would
|
|
evaluate to the number of characters in the string. If the string $a$ equals ``hello'' then it follows that
|
|
$a.length = 5$.
|
|
|
|
For certain discussions more generic algorithms are presented to help the reader understand the final algorithm used
|
|
to solve a given problem. When an algorithm is described as accepting an integer input it is assumed the input is
|
|
a plain integer with no additional multiple-precision members. That is, algorithms that use integers as opposed to
|
|
mp\_ints as inputs do not concern themselves with the housekeeping operations required such as memory management. These
|
|
algorithms will be used to establish the relevant theory which will subsequently be used to describe a multiple
|
|
precision algorithm to solve the same problem.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Precision Notation}
|
|
The variable $\beta$ represents the radix of a single digit of a multiple precision integer and
|
|
must be of the form $q^p$ for $q, p \in \Z^+$. A single precision variable must be able to represent integers in
|
|
the range $0 \le x < q \beta$ while a double precision variable must be able to represent integers in the range
|
|
$0 \le x < q \beta^2$. The extra radix-$q$ factor allows additions and subtractions to proceed without truncation of the
|
|
carry. Since all modern computers are binary, it is assumed that $q$ is two.
|
|
|
|
\index{mp\_digit} \index{mp\_word}
|
|
Within the source code that will be presented for each algorithm, the data type \textbf{mp\_digit} will represent
|
|
a single precision integer type, while, the data type \textbf{mp\_word} will represent a double precision integer type. In
|
|
several algorithms (notably the Comba routines) temporary results will be stored in arrays of double precision mp\_words.
|
|
For the purposes of this text $x_j$ will refer to the $j$'th digit of a single precision array and $\hat x_j$ will refer to
|
|
the $j$'th digit of a double precision array. Whenever an expression is to be assigned to a double precision
|
|
variable it is assumed that all single precision variables are promoted to double precision during the evaluation.
|
|
Expressions that are assigned to a single precision variable are truncated to fit within the precision of a single
|
|
precision data type.
|
|
|
|
For example, if $\beta = 10^2$ a single precision data type may represent a value in the
|
|
range $0 \le x < 10^3$, while a double precision data type may represent a value in the range $0 \le x < 10^5$. Let
|
|
$a = 23$ and $b = 49$ represent two single precision variables. The single precision product shall be written
|
|
as $c \leftarrow a \cdot b$ while the double precision product shall be written as $\hat c \leftarrow a \cdot b$.
|
|
In this particular case, $\hat c = 1127$ and $c = 127$. The most significant digit of the product would not fit
|
|
in a single precision data type and as a result $c \ne \hat c$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Algorithm Inputs and Outputs}
|
|
Within the algorithm descriptions all variables are assumed to be scalars of either single or double precision
|
|
as indicated. The only exception to this rule is when variables have been indicated to be of type mp\_int. This
|
|
distinction is important as scalars are often used as array indicies and various other counters.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Mathematical Expressions}
|
|
The $\lfloor \mbox{ } \rfloor$ brackets imply an expression truncated to an integer not greater than the expression
|
|
itself. For example, $\lfloor 5.7 \rfloor = 5$. Similarly the $\lceil \mbox{ } \rceil$ brackets imply an expression
|
|
rounded to an integer not less than the expression itself. For example, $\lceil 5.1 \rceil = 6$. Typically when
|
|
the $/$ division symbol is used the intention is to perform an integer division with truncation. For example,
|
|
$5/2 = 2$ which will often be written as $\lfloor 5/2 \rfloor = 2$ for clarity. When an expression is written as a
|
|
fraction a real value division is implied, for example ${5 \over 2} = 2.5$.
|
|
|
|
The norm of a multiple precision integer, for example $\vert \vert x \vert \vert$, will be used to represent the number of digits in the representation
|
|
of the integer. For example, $\vert \vert 123 \vert \vert = 3$ and $\vert \vert 79452 \vert \vert = 5$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Work Effort}
|
|
\index{big-Oh}
|
|
To measure the efficiency of the specified algorithms, a modified big-Oh notation is used. In this system all
|
|
single precision operations are considered to have the same cost\footnote{Except where explicitly noted.}.
|
|
That is a single precision addition, multiplication and division are assumed to take the same time to
|
|
complete. While this is generally not true in practice, it will simplify the discussions considerably.
|
|
|
|
Some algorithms have slight advantages over others which is why some constants will not be removed in
|
|
the notation. For example, a normal baseline multiplication (section \ref{sec:basemult}) requires $O(n^2)$ work while a
|
|
baseline squaring (section \ref{sec:basesquare}) requires $O({{n^2 + n}\over 2})$ work. In standard big-Oh notation these
|
|
would both be said to be equivalent to $O(n^2)$. However,
|
|
in the context of the this text this is not the case as the magnitude of the inputs will typically be rather small. As a
|
|
result small constant factors in the work effort will make an observable difference in algorithm efficiency.
|
|
|
|
All of the algorithms presented in this text have a polynomial time work level. That is, of the form
|
|
$O(n^k)$ for $n, k \in \Z^{+}$. This will help make useful comparisons in terms of the speed of the algorithms and how
|
|
various optimizations will help pay off in the long run.
|
|
|
|
\section{Exercises}
|
|
Within the more advanced chapters a section will be set aside to give the reader some challenging exercises related to
|
|
the discussion at hand. These exercises are not designed to be prize winning problems, but instead to be thought
|
|
provoking. Wherever possible the problems are forward minded, stating problems that will be answered in subsequent
|
|
chapters. The reader is encouraged to finish the exercises as they appear to get a better understanding of the
|
|
subject material.
|
|
|
|
That being said, the problems are designed to affirm knowledge of a particular subject matter. Students in particular
|
|
are encouraged to verify they can answer the problems correctly before moving on.
|
|
|
|
Similar to the exercises of \cite[pp. ix]{TAOCPV2} these exercises are given a scoring system based on the difficulty of
|
|
the problem. However, unlike \cite{TAOCPV2} the problems do not get nearly as hard. The scoring of these
|
|
exercises ranges from one (the easiest) to five (the hardest). The following table sumarizes the
|
|
scoring system used.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|l|}
|
|
\hline $\left [ 1 \right ]$ & An easy problem that should only take the reader a manner of \\
|
|
& minutes to solve. Usually does not involve much computer time \\
|
|
& to solve. \\
|
|
\hline $\left [ 2 \right ]$ & An easy problem that involves a marginal amount of computer \\
|
|
& time usage. Usually requires a program to be written to \\
|
|
& solve the problem. \\
|
|
\hline $\left [ 3 \right ]$ & A moderately hard problem that requires a non-trivial amount \\
|
|
& of work. Usually involves trivial research and development of \\
|
|
& new theory from the perspective of a student. \\
|
|
\hline $\left [ 4 \right ]$ & A moderately hard problem that involves a non-trivial amount \\
|
|
& of work and research, the solution to which will demonstrate \\
|
|
& a higher mastery of the subject matter. \\
|
|
\hline $\left [ 5 \right ]$ & A hard problem that involves concepts that are difficult for a \\
|
|
& novice to solve. Solutions to these problems will demonstrate a \\
|
|
& complete mastery of the given subject. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Exercise Scoring System}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Problems at the first level are meant to be simple questions that the reader can answer quickly without programming a solution or
|
|
devising new theory. These problems are quick tests to see if the material is understood. Problems at the second level
|
|
are also designed to be easy but will require a program or algorithm to be implemented to arrive at the answer. These
|
|
two levels are essentially entry level questions.
|
|
|
|
Problems at the third level are meant to be a bit more difficult than the first two levels. The answer is often
|
|
fairly obvious but arriving at an exacting solution requires some thought and skill. These problems will almost always
|
|
involve devising a new algorithm or implementing a variation of another algorithm previously presented. Readers who can
|
|
answer these questions will feel comfortable with the concepts behind the topic at hand.
|
|
|
|
Problems at the fourth level are meant to be similar to those of the level three questions except they will require
|
|
additional research to be completed. The reader will most likely not know the answer right away, nor will the text provide
|
|
the exact details of the answer until a subsequent chapter.
|
|
|
|
Problems at the fifth level are meant to be the hardest
|
|
problems relative to all the other problems in the chapter. People who can correctly answer fifth level problems have a
|
|
mastery of the subject matter at hand.
|
|
|
|
Often problems will be tied together. The purpose of this is to start a chain of thought that will be discussed in future chapters. The reader
|
|
is encouraged to answer the follow-up problems and try to draw the relevance of problems.
|
|
|
|
\section{Introduction to LibTomMath}
|
|
|
|
\subsection{What is LibTomMath?}
|
|
LibTomMath is a free and open source multiple precision integer library written entirely in portable ISO C. By portable it
|
|
is meant that the library does not contain any code that is computer platform dependent or otherwise problematic to use on
|
|
any given platform.
|
|
|
|
The library has been successfully tested under numerous operating systems including Unix\footnote{All of these
|
|
trademarks belong to their respective rightful owners.}, MacOS, Windows, Linux, PalmOS and on standalone hardware such
|
|
as the Gameboy Advance. The library is designed to contain enough functionality to be able to develop applications such
|
|
as public key cryptosystems and still maintain a relatively small footprint.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Goals of LibTomMath}
|
|
|
|
Libraries which obtain the most efficiency are rarely written in a high level programming language such as C. However,
|
|
even though this library is written entirely in ISO C, considerable care has been taken to optimize the algorithm implementations within the
|
|
library. Specifically the code has been written to work well with the GNU C Compiler (\textit{GCC}) on both x86 and ARM
|
|
processors. Wherever possible, highly efficient algorithms, such as Karatsuba multiplication, sliding window
|
|
exponentiation and Montgomery reduction have been provided to make the library more efficient.
|
|
|
|
Even with the nearly optimal and specialized algorithms that have been included the Application Programing Interface
|
|
(\textit{API}) has been kept as simple as possible. Often generic place holder routines will make use of specialized
|
|
algorithms automatically without the developer's specific attention. One such example is the generic multiplication
|
|
algorithm \textbf{mp\_mul()} which will automatically use Toom--Cook, Karatsuba, Comba or baseline multiplication
|
|
based on the magnitude of the inputs and the configuration of the library.
|
|
|
|
Making LibTomMath as efficient as possible is not the only goal of the LibTomMath project. Ideally the library should
|
|
be source compatible with another popular library which makes it more attractive for developers to use. In this case the
|
|
MPI library was used as a API template for all the basic functions. MPI was chosen because it is another library that fits
|
|
in the same niche as LibTomMath. Even though LibTomMath uses MPI as the template for the function names and argument
|
|
passing conventions, it has been written from scratch by Tom St Denis.
|
|
|
|
The project is also meant to act as a learning tool for students, the logic being that no easy-to-follow ``bignum''
|
|
library exists which can be used to teach computer science students how to perform fast and reliable multiple precision
|
|
integer arithmetic. To this end the source code has been given quite a few comments and algorithm discussion points.
|
|
|
|
\section{Choice of LibTomMath}
|
|
LibTomMath was chosen as the case study of this text not only because the author of both projects is one and the same but
|
|
for more worthy reasons. Other libraries such as GMP \cite{GMP}, MPI \cite{MPI}, LIP \cite{LIP} and OpenSSL
|
|
\cite{OPENSSL} have multiple precision integer arithmetic routines but would not be ideal for this text for
|
|
reasons that will be explained in the following sub-sections.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Code Base}
|
|
The LibTomMath code base is all portable ISO C source code. This means that there are no platform dependent conditional
|
|
segments of code littered throughout the source. This clean and uncluttered approach to the library means that a
|
|
developer can more readily discern the true intent of a given section of source code without trying to keep track of
|
|
what conditional code will be used.
|
|
|
|
The code base of LibTomMath is well organized. Each function is in its own separate source code file
|
|
which allows the reader to find a given function very quickly. On average there are $76$ lines of code per source
|
|
file which makes the source very easily to follow. By comparison MPI and LIP are single file projects making code tracing
|
|
very hard. GMP has many conditional code segments which also hinder tracing.
|
|
|
|
When compiled with GCC for the x86 processor and optimized for speed the entire library is approximately $100$KiB\footnote{The notation ``KiB'' means $2^{10}$ octets, similarly ``MiB'' means $2^{20}$ octets.}
|
|
which is fairly small compared to GMP (over $250$KiB). LibTomMath is slightly larger than MPI (which compiles to about
|
|
$50$KiB) but LibTomMath is also much faster and more complete than MPI.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{API Simplicity}
|
|
LibTomMath is designed after the MPI library and shares the API design. Quite often programs that use MPI will build
|
|
with LibTomMath without change. The function names correlate directly to the action they perform. Almost all of the
|
|
functions share the same parameter passing convention. The learning curve is fairly shallow with the API provided
|
|
which is an extremely valuable benefit for the student and developer alike.
|
|
|
|
The LIP library is an example of a library with an API that is awkward to work with. LIP uses function names that are often ``compressed'' to
|
|
illegible short hand. LibTomMath does not share this characteristic.
|
|
|
|
The GMP library also does not return error codes. Instead it uses a POSIX.1 \cite{POSIX1} signal system where errors
|
|
are signaled to the host application. This happens to be the fastest approach but definitely not the most versatile. In
|
|
effect a math error (i.e. invalid input, heap error, etc) can cause a program to stop functioning which is definitely
|
|
undersireable in many situations.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Optimizations}
|
|
While LibTomMath is certainly not the fastest library (GMP often beats LibTomMath by a factor of two) it does
|
|
feature a set of optimal algorithms for tasks such as modular reduction, exponentiation, multiplication and squaring. GMP
|
|
and LIP also feature such optimizations while MPI only uses baseline algorithms with no optimizations. GMP lacks a few
|
|
of the additional modular reduction optimizations that LibTomMath features\footnote{At the time of this writing GMP
|
|
only had Barrett and Montgomery modular reduction algorithms.}.
|
|
|
|
LibTomMath is almost always an order of magnitude faster than the MPI library at computationally expensive tasks such as modular
|
|
exponentiation. In the grand scheme of ``bignum'' libraries LibTomMath is faster than the average library and usually
|
|
slower than the best libraries such as GMP and OpenSSL by only a small factor.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Portability and Stability}
|
|
LibTomMath will build ``out of the box'' on any platform equipped with a modern version of the GNU C Compiler
|
|
(\textit{GCC}). This means that without changes the library will build without configuration or setting up any
|
|
variables. LIP and MPI will build ``out of the box'' as well but have numerous known bugs. Most notably the author of
|
|
MPI has recently stopped working on his library and LIP has long since been discontinued.
|
|
|
|
GMP requires a configuration script to run and will not build out of the box. GMP and LibTomMath are still in active
|
|
development and are very stable across a variety of platforms.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Choice}
|
|
LibTomMath is a relatively compact, well documented, highly optimized and portable library which seems only natural for
|
|
the case study of this text. Various source files from the LibTomMath project will be included within the text. However,
|
|
the reader is encouraged to download their own copy of the library to actually be able to work with the library.
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Getting Started}
|
|
\section{Library Basics}
|
|
The trick to writing any useful library of source code is to build a solid foundation and work outwards from it. First,
|
|
a problem along with allowable solution parameters should be identified and analyzed. In this particular case the
|
|
inability to accomodate multiple precision integers is the problem. Futhermore, the solution must be written
|
|
as portable source code that is reasonably efficient across several different computer platforms.
|
|
|
|
After a foundation is formed the remainder of the library can be designed and implemented in a hierarchical fashion.
|
|
That is, to implement the lowest level dependencies first and work towards the most abstract functions last. For example,
|
|
before implementing a modular exponentiation algorithm one would implement a modular reduction algorithm.
|
|
By building outwards from a base foundation instead of using a parallel design methodology the resulting project is
|
|
highly modular. Being highly modular is a desirable property of any project as it often means the resulting product
|
|
has a small footprint and updates are easy to perform.
|
|
|
|
Usually when I start a project I will begin with the header files. I define the data types I think I will need and
|
|
prototype the initial functions that are not dependent on other functions (within the library). After I
|
|
implement these base functions I prototype more dependent functions and implement them. The process repeats until
|
|
I implement all of the functions I require. For example, in the case of LibTomMath I implemented functions such as
|
|
mp\_init() well before I implemented mp\_mul() and even further before I implemented mp\_exptmod(). As an example as to
|
|
why this design works note that the Karatsuba and Toom-Cook multipliers were written \textit{after} the
|
|
dependent function mp\_exptmod() was written. Adding the new multiplication algorithms did not require changes to the
|
|
mp\_exptmod() function itself and lowered the total cost of ownership (\textit{so to speak}) and of development
|
|
for new algorithms. This methodology allows new algorithms to be tested in a complete framework with relative ease.
|
|
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\includegraphics{pics/design_process.ps}
|
|
\caption{Design Flow of the First Few Original LibTomMath Functions.}
|
|
\label{pic:design_process}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
Only after the majority of the functions were in place did I pursue a less hierarchical approach to auditing and optimizing
|
|
the source code. For example, one day I may audit the multipliers and the next day the polynomial basis functions.
|
|
|
|
It only makes sense to begin the text with the preliminary data types and support algorithms required as well.
|
|
This chapter discusses the core algorithms of the library which are the dependents for every other algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\section{What is a Multiple Precision Integer?}
|
|
Recall that most programming languages, in particular ISO C \cite{ISOC}, only have fixed precision data types that on their own cannot
|
|
be used to represent values larger than their precision will allow. The purpose of multiple precision algorithms is
|
|
to use fixed precision data types to create and manipulate multiple precision integers which may represent values
|
|
that are very large.
|
|
|
|
As a well known analogy, school children are taught how to form numbers larger than nine by prepending more radix ten digits. In the decimal system
|
|
the largest single digit value is $9$. However, by concatenating digits together larger numbers may be represented. Newly prepended digits
|
|
(\textit{to the left}) are said to be in a different power of ten column. That is, the number $123$ can be described as having a $1$ in the hundreds
|
|
column, $2$ in the tens column and $3$ in the ones column. Or more formally $123 = 1 \cdot 10^2 + 2 \cdot 10^1 + 3 \cdot 10^0$. Computer based
|
|
multiple precision arithmetic is essentially the same concept. Larger integers are represented by adjoining fixed
|
|
precision computer words with the exception that a different radix is used.
|
|
|
|
What most people probably do not think about explicitly are the various other attributes that describe a multiple precision
|
|
integer. For example, the integer $154_{10}$ has two immediately obvious properties. First, the integer is positive,
|
|
that is the sign of this particular integer is positive as opposed to negative. Second, the integer has three digits in
|
|
its representation. There is an additional property that the integer posesses that does not concern pencil-and-paper
|
|
arithmetic. The third property is how many digits placeholders are available to hold the integer.
|
|
|
|
The human analogy of this third property is ensuring there is enough space on the paper to write the integer. For example,
|
|
if one starts writing a large number too far to the right on a piece of paper they will have to erase it and move left.
|
|
Similarly, computer algorithms must maintain strict control over memory usage to ensure that the digits of an integer
|
|
will not exceed the allowed boundaries. These three properties make up what is known as a multiple precision
|
|
integer or mp\_int for short.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{The mp\_int Structure}
|
|
\label{sec:MPINT}
|
|
The mp\_int structure is the ISO C based manifestation of what represents a multiple precision integer. The ISO C standard does not provide for
|
|
any such data type but it does provide for making composite data types known as structures. The following is the structure definition
|
|
used within LibTomMath.
|
|
|
|
\index{mp\_int}
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
%\begin{verbatim}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
|
|
\hline
|
|
typedef struct \{ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}int used, alloc, sign;\\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}mp\_digit *dp;\\
|
|
\} \textbf{mp\_int}; \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
%\end{verbatim}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{The mp\_int Structure}
|
|
\label{fig:mpint}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
The mp\_int structure (fig. \ref{fig:mpint}) can be broken down as follows.
|
|
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item The \textbf{used} parameter denotes how many digits of the array \textbf{dp} contain the digits used to represent
|
|
a given integer. The \textbf{used} count must be positive (or zero) and may not exceed the \textbf{alloc} count.
|
|
|
|
\item The \textbf{alloc} parameter denotes how
|
|
many digits are available in the array to use by functions before it has to increase in size. When the \textbf{used} count
|
|
of a result would exceed the \textbf{alloc} count all of the algorithms will automatically increase the size of the
|
|
array to accommodate the precision of the result.
|
|
|
|
\item The pointer \textbf{dp} points to a dynamically allocated array of digits that represent the given multiple
|
|
precision integer. It is padded with $(\textbf{alloc} - \textbf{used})$ zero digits. The array is maintained in a least
|
|
significant digit order. As a pencil and paper analogy the array is organized such that the right most digits are stored
|
|
first starting at the location indexed by zero\footnote{In C all arrays begin at zero.} in the array. For example,
|
|
if \textbf{dp} contains $\lbrace a, b, c, \ldots \rbrace$ where \textbf{dp}$_0 = a$, \textbf{dp}$_1 = b$, \textbf{dp}$_2 = c$, $\ldots$ then
|
|
it would represent the integer $a + b\beta + c\beta^2 + \ldots$
|
|
|
|
\index{MP\_ZPOS} \index{MP\_NEG}
|
|
\item The \textbf{sign} parameter denotes the sign as either zero/positive (\textbf{MP\_ZPOS}) or negative (\textbf{MP\_NEG}).
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Valid mp\_int Structures}
|
|
Several rules are placed on the state of an mp\_int structure and are assumed to be followed for reasons of efficiency.
|
|
The only exceptions are when the structure is passed to initialization functions such as mp\_init() and mp\_init\_copy().
|
|
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item The value of \textbf{alloc} may not be less than one. That is \textbf{dp} always points to a previously allocated
|
|
array of digits.
|
|
\item The value of \textbf{used} may not exceed \textbf{alloc} and must be greater than or equal to zero.
|
|
\item The value of \textbf{used} implies the digit at index $(used - 1)$ of the \textbf{dp} array is non-zero. That is,
|
|
leading zero digits in the most significant positions must be trimmed.
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item Digits in the \textbf{dp} array at and above the \textbf{used} location must be zero.
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
\item The value of \textbf{sign} must be \textbf{MP\_ZPOS} if \textbf{used} is zero;
|
|
this represents the mp\_int value of zero.
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
|
|
\section{Argument Passing}
|
|
A convention of argument passing must be adopted early on in the development of any library. Making the function
|
|
prototypes consistent will help eliminate many headaches in the future as the library grows to significant complexity.
|
|
In LibTomMath the multiple precision integer functions accept parameters from left to right as pointers to mp\_int
|
|
structures. That means that the source (input) operands are placed on the left and the destination (output) on the right.
|
|
Consider the following examples.
|
|
|
|
\begin{verbatim}
|
|
mp_mul(&a, &b, &c); /* c = a * b */
|
|
mp_add(&a, &b, &a); /* a = a + b */
|
|
mp_sqr(&a, &b); /* b = a * a */
|
|
\end{verbatim}
|
|
|
|
The left to right order is a fairly natural way to implement the functions since it lets the developer read aloud the
|
|
functions and make sense of them. For example, the first function would read ``multiply a and b and store in c''.
|
|
|
|
Certain libraries (\textit{LIP by Lenstra for instance}) accept parameters the other way around, to mimic the order
|
|
of assignment expressions. That is, the destination (output) is on the left and arguments (inputs) are on the right. In
|
|
truth, it is entirely a matter of preference. In the case of LibTomMath the convention from the MPI library has been
|
|
adopted.
|
|
|
|
Another very useful design consideration, provided for in LibTomMath, is whether to allow argument sources to also be a
|
|
destination. For example, the second example (\textit{mp\_add}) adds $a$ to $b$ and stores in $a$. This is an important
|
|
feature to implement since it allows the calling functions to cut down on the number of variables it must maintain.
|
|
However, to implement this feature specific care has to be given to ensure the destination is not modified before the
|
|
source is fully read.
|
|
|
|
\section{Return Values}
|
|
A well implemented application, no matter what its purpose, should trap as many runtime errors as possible and return them
|
|
to the caller. By catching runtime errors a library can be guaranteed to prevent undefined behaviour. However, the end
|
|
developer can still manage to cause a library to crash. For example, by passing an invalid pointer an application may
|
|
fault by dereferencing memory not owned by the application.
|
|
|
|
In the case of LibTomMath the only errors that are checked for are related to inappropriate inputs (division by zero for
|
|
instance) and memory allocation errors. It will not check that the mp\_int passed to any function is valid nor
|
|
will it check pointers for validity. Any function that can cause a runtime error will return an error code as an
|
|
\textbf{int} data type with one of the following values (fig \ref{fig:errcodes}).
|
|
|
|
\index{MP\_OKAY} \index{MP\_VAL} \index{MP\_MEM}
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Value} & \textbf{Meaning} \\
|
|
\hline \textbf{MP\_OKAY} & The function was successful \\
|
|
\hline \textbf{MP\_VAL} & One of the input value(s) was invalid \\
|
|
\hline \textbf{MP\_MEM} & The function ran out of heap memory \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{LibTomMath Error Codes}
|
|
\label{fig:errcodes}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
When an error is detected within a function it should free any memory it allocated, often during the initialization of
|
|
temporary mp\_ints, and return as soon as possible. The goal is to leave the system in the same state it was when the
|
|
function was called. Error checking with this style of API is fairly simple.
|
|
|
|
\begin{verbatim}
|
|
int err;
|
|
if ((err = mp_add(&a, &b, &c)) != MP_OKAY) {
|
|
printf("Error: %s\n", mp_error_to_string(err));
|
|
exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
|
|
}
|
|
\end{verbatim}
|
|
|
|
The GMP \cite{GMP} library uses C style \textit{signals} to flag errors which is of questionable use. Not all errors are fatal
|
|
and it was not deemed ideal by the author of LibTomMath to force developers to have signal handlers for such cases.
|
|
|
|
\section{Initialization and Clearing}
|
|
The logical starting point when actually writing multiple precision integer functions is the initialization and
|
|
clearing of the mp\_int structures. These two algorithms will be used by the majority of the higher level algorithms.
|
|
|
|
Given the basic mp\_int structure an initialization routine must first allocate memory to hold the digits of
|
|
the integer. Often it is optimal to allocate a sufficiently large pre-set number of digits even though
|
|
the initial integer will represent zero. If only a single digit were allocated quite a few subsequent re-allocations
|
|
would occur when operations are performed on the integers. There is a tradeoff between how many default digits to allocate
|
|
and how many re-allocations are tolerable. Obviously allocating an excessive amount of digits initially will waste
|
|
memory and become unmanageable.
|
|
|
|
If the memory for the digits has been successfully allocated then the rest of the members of the structure must
|
|
be initialized. Since the initial state of an mp\_int is to represent the zero integer, the allocated digits must be set
|
|
to zero. The \textbf{used} count set to zero and \textbf{sign} set to \textbf{MP\_ZPOS}.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Initializing an mp\_int}
|
|
An mp\_int is said to be initialized if it is set to a valid, preferably default, state such that all of the members of the
|
|
structure are set to valid values. The mp\_init algorithm will perform such an action.
|
|
|
|
\index{mp\_init}
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_init}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Allocate memory and initialize $a$ to a known valid mp\_int state. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Allocate memory for \textbf{MP\_PREC} digits. \\
|
|
2. If the allocation failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}) \\
|
|
3. for $n$ from $0$ to $MP\_PREC - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $a_n \leftarrow 0$\\
|
|
4. $a.sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$\\
|
|
5. $a.used \leftarrow 0$\\
|
|
6. $a.alloc \leftarrow MP\_PREC$\\
|
|
7. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY})\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_init}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_init.}
|
|
The purpose of this function is to initialize an mp\_int structure so that the rest of the library can properly
|
|
manipulte it. It is assumed that the input may not have had any of its members previously initialized which is certainly
|
|
a valid assumption if the input resides on the stack.
|
|
|
|
Before any of the members such as \textbf{sign}, \textbf{used} or \textbf{alloc} are initialized the memory for
|
|
the digits is allocated. If this fails the function returns before setting any of the other members. The \textbf{MP\_PREC}
|
|
name represents a constant\footnote{Defined in the ``tommath.h'' header file within LibTomMath.}
|
|
used to dictate the minimum precision of newly initialized mp\_int integers. Ideally, it is at least equal to the smallest
|
|
precision number you'll be working with.
|
|
|
|
Allocating a block of digits at first instead of a single digit has the benefit of lowering the number of usually slow
|
|
heap operations later functions will have to perform in the future. If \textbf{MP\_PREC} is set correctly the slack
|
|
memory and the number of heap operations will be trivial.
|
|
|
|
Once the allocation has been made the digits have to be set to zero as well as the \textbf{used}, \textbf{sign} and
|
|
\textbf{alloc} members initialized. This ensures that the mp\_int will always represent the default state of zero regardless
|
|
of the original condition of the input.
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Remark.}
|
|
This function introduces the idiosyncrasy that all iterative loops, commonly initiated with the ``for'' keyword, iterate incrementally
|
|
when the ``to'' keyword is placed between two expressions. For example, ``for $a$ from $b$ to $c$ do'' means that
|
|
a subsequent expression (or body of expressions) are to be evaluated upto $c - b$ times so long as $b \le c$. In each
|
|
iteration the variable $a$ is substituted for a new integer that lies inclusively between $b$ and $c$. If $b > c$ occured
|
|
the loop would not iterate. By contrast if the ``downto'' keyword were used in place of ``to'' the loop would iterate
|
|
decrementally.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_init.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* init a new mp_int */
|
|
018 int mp_init (mp_int * a)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int i;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* allocate memory required and clear it */
|
|
023 a->dp = OPT_CAST(mp_digit) XMALLOC (sizeof (mp_digit) * MP_PREC);
|
|
024 if (a->dp == NULL) \{
|
|
025 return MP_MEM;
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027
|
|
028 /* set the digits to zero */
|
|
029 for (i = 0; i < MP_PREC; i++) \{
|
|
030 a->dp[i] = 0;
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* set the used to zero, allocated digits to the default precision
|
|
034 * and sign to positive */
|
|
035 a->used = 0;
|
|
036 a->alloc = MP_PREC;
|
|
037 a->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
038
|
|
039 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
040 \}
|
|
041 #endif
|
|
042
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
One immediate observation of this initializtion function is that it does not return a pointer to a mp\_int structure. It
|
|
is assumed that the caller has already allocated memory for the mp\_int structure, typically on the application stack. The
|
|
call to mp\_init() is used only to initialize the members of the structure to a known default state.
|
|
|
|
Here we see (line 23) the memory allocation is performed first. This allows us to exit cleanly and quickly
|
|
if there is an error. If the allocation fails the routine will return \textbf{MP\_MEM} to the caller to indicate there
|
|
was a memory error. The function XMALLOC is what actually allocates the memory. Technically XMALLOC is not a function
|
|
but a macro defined in ``tommath.h``. By default, XMALLOC will evaluate to malloc() which is the C library's built--in
|
|
memory allocation routine.
|
|
|
|
In order to assure the mp\_int is in a known state the digits must be set to zero. On most platforms this could have been
|
|
accomplished by using calloc() instead of malloc(). However, to correctly initialize a integer type to a given value in a
|
|
portable fashion you have to actually assign the value. The for loop (line 29) performs this required
|
|
operation.
|
|
|
|
After the memory has been successfully initialized the remainder of the members are initialized
|
|
(lines 33 through 34) to their respective default states. At this point the algorithm has succeeded and
|
|
a success code is returned to the calling function. If this function returns \textbf{MP\_OKAY} it is safe to assume the
|
|
mp\_int structure has been properly initialized and is safe to use with other functions within the library.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Clearing an mp\_int}
|
|
When an mp\_int is no longer required by the application, the memory that has been allocated for its digits must be
|
|
returned to the application's memory pool with the mp\_clear algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_clear}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The memory for $a$ shall be deallocated. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $a$ has been previously freed then return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
2. for $n$ from 0 to $a.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $a_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
3. Free the memory allocated for the digits of $a$. \\
|
|
4. $a.used \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
5. $a.alloc \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
6. $a.sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
7. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_clear}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_clear.}
|
|
This algorithm accomplishes two goals. First, it clears the digits and the other mp\_int members. This ensures that
|
|
if a developer accidentally re-uses a cleared structure it is less likely to cause problems. The second goal
|
|
is to free the allocated memory.
|
|
|
|
The logic behind the algorithm is extended by marking cleared mp\_int structures so that subsequent calls to this
|
|
algorithm will not try to free the memory multiple times. Cleared mp\_ints are detectable by having a pre-defined invalid
|
|
digit pointer \textbf{dp} setting.
|
|
|
|
Once an mp\_int has been cleared the mp\_int structure is no longer in a valid state for any other algorithm
|
|
with the exception of algorithms mp\_init, mp\_init\_copy, mp\_init\_size and mp\_clear.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_clear.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* clear one (frees) */
|
|
018 void
|
|
019 mp_clear (mp_int * a)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int i;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* only do anything if a hasn't been freed previously */
|
|
024 if (a->dp != NULL) \{
|
|
025 /* first zero the digits */
|
|
026 for (i = 0; i < a->used; i++) \{
|
|
027 a->dp[i] = 0;
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* free ram */
|
|
031 XFREE(a->dp);
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* reset members to make debugging easier */
|
|
034 a->dp = NULL;
|
|
035 a->alloc = a->used = 0;
|
|
036 a->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
037 \}
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039 #endif
|
|
040
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The algorithm only operates on the mp\_int if it hasn't been previously cleared. The if statement (line 24)
|
|
checks to see if the \textbf{dp} member is not \textbf{NULL}. If the mp\_int is a valid mp\_int then \textbf{dp} cannot be
|
|
\textbf{NULL} in which case the if statement will evaluate to true.
|
|
|
|
The digits of the mp\_int are cleared by the for loop (line 26) which assigns a zero to every digit. Similar to mp\_init()
|
|
the digits are assigned zero instead of using block memory operations (such as memset()) since this is more portable.
|
|
|
|
The digits are deallocated off the heap via the XFREE macro. Similar to XMALLOC the XFREE macro actually evaluates to
|
|
a standard C library function. In this case the free() function. Since free() only deallocates the memory the pointer
|
|
still has to be reset to \textbf{NULL} manually (line 34).
|
|
|
|
Now that the digits have been cleared and deallocated the other members are set to their final values (lines 35 and 36).
|
|
|
|
\section{Maintenance Algorithms}
|
|
|
|
The previous sections describes how to initialize and clear an mp\_int structure. To further support operations
|
|
that are to be performed on mp\_int structures (such as addition and multiplication) the dependent algorithms must be
|
|
able to augment the precision of an mp\_int and
|
|
initialize mp\_ints with differing initial conditions.
|
|
|
|
These algorithms complete the set of low level algorithms required to work with mp\_int structures in the higher level
|
|
algorithms such as addition, multiplication and modular exponentiation.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Augmenting an mp\_int's Precision}
|
|
When storing a value in an mp\_int structure, a sufficient number of digits must be available to accomodate the entire
|
|
result of an operation without loss of precision. Quite often the size of the array given by the \textbf{alloc} member
|
|
is large enough to simply increase the \textbf{used} digit count. However, when the size of the array is too small it
|
|
must be re-sized appropriately to accomodate the result. The mp\_grow algorithm will provide this functionality.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_grow}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ and an integer $b$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a$ is expanded to accomodate $b$ digits. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. if $a.alloc \ge b$ then return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
2. $u \leftarrow b\mbox{ (mod }MP\_PREC\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
3. $v \leftarrow b + 2 \cdot MP\_PREC - u$ \\
|
|
4. Re-allocate the array of digits $a$ to size $v$ \\
|
|
5. If the allocation failed then return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
6. for n from a.alloc to $v - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}6.1 $a_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
7. $a.alloc \leftarrow v$ \\
|
|
8. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_grow}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_grow.}
|
|
It is ideal to prevent re-allocations from being performed if they are not required (step one). This is useful to
|
|
prevent mp\_ints from growing excessively in code that erroneously calls mp\_grow.
|
|
|
|
The requested digit count is padded up to next multiple of \textbf{MP\_PREC} plus an additional \textbf{MP\_PREC} (steps two and three).
|
|
This helps prevent many trivial reallocations that would grow an mp\_int by trivially small values.
|
|
|
|
It is assumed that the reallocation (step four) leaves the lower $a.alloc$ digits of the mp\_int intact. This is much
|
|
akin to how the \textit{realloc} function from the standard C library works. Since the newly allocated digits are
|
|
assumed to contain undefined values they are initially set to zero.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_grow.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* grow as required */
|
|
018 int mp_grow (mp_int * a, int size)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int i;
|
|
021 mp_digit *tmp;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* if the alloc size is smaller alloc more ram */
|
|
024 if (a->alloc < size) \{
|
|
025 /* ensure there are always at least MP_PREC digits extra on top */
|
|
026 size += (MP_PREC * 2) - (size % MP_PREC);
|
|
027
|
|
028 /* reallocate the array a->dp
|
|
029 *
|
|
030 * We store the return in a temporary variable
|
|
031 * in case the operation failed we don't want
|
|
032 * to overwrite the dp member of a.
|
|
033 */
|
|
034 tmp = OPT_CAST(mp_digit) XREALLOC (a->dp, sizeof (mp_digit) * size);
|
|
035 if (tmp == NULL) \{
|
|
036 /* reallocation failed but "a" is still valid [can be freed] */
|
|
037 return MP_MEM;
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039
|
|
040 /* reallocation succeeded so set a->dp */
|
|
041 a->dp = tmp;
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* zero excess digits */
|
|
044 i = a->alloc;
|
|
045 a->alloc = size;
|
|
046 for (; i < a->alloc; i++) \{
|
|
047 a->dp[i] = 0;
|
|
048 \}
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
051 \}
|
|
052 #endif
|
|
053
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
A quick optimization is to first determine if a memory re-allocation is required at all. The if statement (line 24) checks
|
|
if the \textbf{alloc} member of the mp\_int is smaller than the requested digit count. If the count is not larger than \textbf{alloc}
|
|
the function skips the re-allocation part thus saving time.
|
|
|
|
When a re-allocation is performed it is turned into an optimal request to save time in the future. The requested digit count is
|
|
padded upwards to 2nd multiple of \textbf{MP\_PREC} larger than \textbf{alloc} (line 26). The XREALLOC function is used
|
|
to re-allocate the memory. As per the other functions XREALLOC is actually a macro which evaluates to realloc by default. The realloc
|
|
function leaves the base of the allocation intact which means the first \textbf{alloc} digits of the mp\_int are the same as before
|
|
the re-allocation. All that is left is to clear the newly allocated digits and return.
|
|
|
|
Note that the re-allocation result is actually stored in a temporary pointer $tmp$. This is to allow this function to return
|
|
an error with a valid pointer. Earlier releases of the library stored the result of XREALLOC into the mp\_int $a$. That would
|
|
result in a memory leak if XREALLOC ever failed.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Initializing Variable Precision mp\_ints}
|
|
Occasionally the number of digits required will be known in advance of an initialization, based on, for example, the size
|
|
of input mp\_ints to a given algorithm. The purpose of algorithm mp\_init\_size is similar to mp\_init except that it
|
|
will allocate \textit{at least} a specified number of digits.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_init\_size}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ and the requested number of digits $b$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a$ is initialized to hold at least $b$ digits. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $u \leftarrow b \mbox{ (mod }MP\_PREC\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
2. $v \leftarrow b + 2 \cdot MP\_PREC - u$ \\
|
|
3. Allocate $v$ digits. \\
|
|
4. for $n$ from $0$ to $v - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $a_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
5. $a.sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$\\
|
|
6. $a.used \leftarrow 0$\\
|
|
7. $a.alloc \leftarrow v$\\
|
|
8. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY})\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_init\_size}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_init\_size.}
|
|
This algorithm will initialize an mp\_int structure $a$ like algorithm mp\_init with the exception that the number of
|
|
digits allocated can be controlled by the second input argument $b$. The input size is padded upwards so it is a
|
|
multiple of \textbf{MP\_PREC} plus an additional \textbf{MP\_PREC} digits. This padding is used to prevent trivial
|
|
allocations from becoming a bottleneck in the rest of the algorithms.
|
|
|
|
Like algorithm mp\_init, the mp\_int structure is initialized to a default state representing the integer zero. This
|
|
particular algorithm is useful if it is known ahead of time the approximate size of the input. If the approximation is
|
|
correct no further memory re-allocations are required to work with the mp\_int.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_init\_size.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* init an mp_init for a given size */
|
|
018 int mp_init_size (mp_int * a, int size)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int x;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* pad size so there are always extra digits */
|
|
023 size += (MP_PREC * 2) - (size % MP_PREC);
|
|
024
|
|
025 /* alloc mem */
|
|
026 a->dp = OPT_CAST(mp_digit) XMALLOC (sizeof (mp_digit) * size);
|
|
027 if (a->dp == NULL) \{
|
|
028 return MP_MEM;
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* set the members */
|
|
032 a->used = 0;
|
|
033 a->alloc = size;
|
|
034 a->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
035
|
|
036 /* zero the digits */
|
|
037 for (x = 0; x < size; x++) \{
|
|
038 a->dp[x] = 0;
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040
|
|
041 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043 #endif
|
|
044
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The number of digits $b$ requested is padded (line 23) by first augmenting it to the next multiple of
|
|
\textbf{MP\_PREC} and then adding \textbf{MP\_PREC} to the result. If the memory can be successfully allocated the
|
|
mp\_int is placed in a default state representing the integer zero. Otherwise, the error code \textbf{MP\_MEM} will be
|
|
returned (line 28).
|
|
|
|
The digits are allocated and set to zero at the same time with the calloc() function (line @25,XCALLOC@). The
|
|
\textbf{used} count is set to zero, the \textbf{alloc} count set to the padded digit count and the \textbf{sign} flag set
|
|
to \textbf{MP\_ZPOS} to achieve a default valid mp\_int state (lines 32, 33 and 34). If the function
|
|
returns succesfully then it is correct to assume that the mp\_int structure is in a valid state for the remainder of the
|
|
functions to work with.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Multiple Integer Initializations and Clearings}
|
|
Occasionally a function will require a series of mp\_int data types to be made available simultaneously.
|
|
The purpose of algorithm mp\_init\_multi is to initialize a variable length array of mp\_int structures in a single
|
|
statement. It is essentially a shortcut to multiple initializations.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_init\_multi}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Variable length array $V_k$ of mp\_int variables of length $k$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The array is initialized such that each mp\_int of $V_k$ is ready to use. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. for $n$ from 0 to $k - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}1.1. Initialize the mp\_int $V_n$ (\textit{mp\_init}) \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}1.2. If initialization failed then do \\
|
|
\hspace{+6mm}1.2.1. for $j$ from $0$ to $n$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{+9mm}1.2.1.1. Free the mp\_int $V_j$ (\textit{mp\_clear}) \\
|
|
\hspace{+6mm}1.2.2. Return(\textit{MP\_MEM}) \\
|
|
2. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_init\_multi}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_init\_multi.}
|
|
The algorithm will initialize the array of mp\_int variables one at a time. If a runtime error has been detected
|
|
(\textit{step 1.2}) all of the previously initialized variables are cleared. The goal is an ``all or nothing''
|
|
initialization which allows for quick recovery from runtime errors.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_init\_multi.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016 #include <stdarg.h>
|
|
017
|
|
018 int mp_init_multi(mp_int *mp, ...)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 mp_err res = MP_OKAY; /* Assume ok until proven otherwise */
|
|
021 int n = 0; /* Number of ok inits */
|
|
022 mp_int* cur_arg = mp;
|
|
023 va_list args;
|
|
024
|
|
025 va_start(args, mp); /* init args to next argument from caller */
|
|
026 while (cur_arg != NULL) \{
|
|
027 if (mp_init(cur_arg) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
028 /* Oops - error! Back-track and mp_clear what we already
|
|
029 succeeded in init-ing, then return error.
|
|
030 */
|
|
031 va_list clean_args;
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* end the current list */
|
|
034 va_end(args);
|
|
035
|
|
036 /* now start cleaning up */
|
|
037 cur_arg = mp;
|
|
038 va_start(clean_args, mp);
|
|
039 while (n--) \{
|
|
040 mp_clear(cur_arg);
|
|
041 cur_arg = va_arg(clean_args, mp_int*);
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043 va_end(clean_args);
|
|
044 res = MP_MEM;
|
|
045 break;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047 n++;
|
|
048 cur_arg = va_arg(args, mp_int*);
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050 va_end(args);
|
|
051 return res; /* Assumed ok, if error flagged above. */
|
|
052 \}
|
|
053
|
|
054 #endif
|
|
055
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This function intializes a variable length list of mp\_int structure pointers. However, instead of having the mp\_int
|
|
structures in an actual C array they are simply passed as arguments to the function. This function makes use of the
|
|
``...'' argument syntax of the C programming language. The list is terminated with a final \textbf{NULL} argument
|
|
appended on the right.
|
|
|
|
The function uses the ``stdarg.h'' \textit{va} functions to step portably through the arguments to the function. A count
|
|
$n$ of succesfully initialized mp\_int structures is maintained (line 47) such that if a failure does occur,
|
|
the algorithm can backtrack and free the previously initialized structures (lines 27 to 46).
|
|
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Clamping Excess Digits}
|
|
When a function anticipates a result will be $n$ digits it is simpler to assume this is true within the body of
|
|
the function instead of checking during the computation. For example, a multiplication of a $i$ digit number by a
|
|
$j$ digit produces a result of at most $i + j$ digits. It is entirely possible that the result is $i + j - 1$
|
|
though, with no final carry into the last position. However, suppose the destination had to be first expanded
|
|
(\textit{via mp\_grow}) to accomodate $i + j - 1$ digits than further expanded to accomodate the final carry.
|
|
That would be a considerable waste of time since heap operations are relatively slow.
|
|
|
|
The ideal solution is to always assume the result is $i + j$ and fix up the \textbf{used} count after the function
|
|
terminates. This way a single heap operation (\textit{at most}) is required. However, if the result was not checked
|
|
there would be an excess high order zero digit.
|
|
|
|
For example, suppose the product of two integers was $x_n = (0x_{n-1}x_{n-2}...x_0)_{\beta}$. The leading zero digit
|
|
will not contribute to the precision of the result. In fact, through subsequent operations more leading zero digits would
|
|
accumulate to the point the size of the integer would be prohibitive. As a result even though the precision is very
|
|
low the representation is excessively large.
|
|
|
|
The mp\_clamp algorithm is designed to solve this very problem. It will trim high-order zeros by decrementing the
|
|
\textbf{used} count until a non-zero most significant digit is found. Also in this system, zero is considered to be a
|
|
positive number which means that if the \textbf{used} count is decremented to zero, the sign must be set to
|
|
\textbf{MP\_ZPOS}.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_clamp}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Any excess leading zero digits of $a$ are removed \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. while $a.used > 0$ and $a_{a.used - 1} = 0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}1.1 $a.used \leftarrow a.used - 1$ \\
|
|
2. if $a.used = 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}2.1 $a.sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_clamp}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_clamp.}
|
|
As can be expected this algorithm is very simple. The loop on step one is expected to iterate only once or twice at
|
|
the most. For example, this will happen in cases where there is not a carry to fill the last position. Step two fixes the sign for
|
|
when all of the digits are zero to ensure that the mp\_int is valid at all times.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_clamp.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* trim unused digits
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * This is used to ensure that leading zero digits are
|
|
020 * trimed and the leading "used" digit will be non-zero
|
|
021 * Typically very fast. Also fixes the sign if there
|
|
022 * are no more leading digits
|
|
023 */
|
|
024 void
|
|
025 mp_clamp (mp_int * a)
|
|
026 \{
|
|
027 /* decrease used while the most significant digit is
|
|
028 * zero.
|
|
029 */
|
|
030 while (a->used > 0 && a->dp[a->used - 1] == 0) \{
|
|
031 --(a->used);
|
|
032 \}
|
|
033
|
|
034 /* reset the sign flag if used == 0 */
|
|
035 if (a->used == 0) \{
|
|
036 a->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
037 \}
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039 #endif
|
|
040
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Note on line 27 how to test for the \textbf{used} count is made on the left of the \&\& operator. In the C programming
|
|
language the terms to \&\& are evaluated left to right with a boolean short-circuit if any condition fails. This is
|
|
important since if the \textbf{used} is zero the test on the right would fetch below the array. That is obviously
|
|
undesirable. The parenthesis on line 30 is used to make sure the \textbf{used} count is decremented and not
|
|
the pointer ``a''.
|
|
|
|
\section*{Exercises}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{cl}
|
|
$\left [ 1 \right ]$ & Discuss the relevance of the \textbf{used} member of the mp\_int structure. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 1 \right ]$ & Discuss the consequences of not using padding when performing allocations. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ]$ & Estimate an ideal value for \textbf{MP\_PREC} when performing 1024-bit RSA \\
|
|
& encryption when $\beta = 2^{28}$. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 1 \right ]$ & Discuss the relevance of the algorithm mp\_clamp. What does it prevent? \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 1 \right ]$ & Give an example of when the algorithm mp\_init\_copy might be useful. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
|
|
|
|
%%%
|
|
% CHAPTER FOUR
|
|
%%%
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Basic Operations}
|
|
|
|
\section{Introduction}
|
|
In the previous chapter a series of low level algorithms were established that dealt with initializing and maintaining
|
|
mp\_int structures. This chapter will discuss another set of seemingly non-algebraic algorithms which will form the low
|
|
level basis of the entire library. While these algorithm are relatively trivial it is important to understand how they
|
|
work before proceeding since these algorithms will be used almost intrinsically in the following chapters.
|
|
|
|
The algorithms in this chapter deal primarily with more ``programmer'' related tasks such as creating copies of
|
|
mp\_int structures, assigning small values to mp\_int structures and comparisons of the values mp\_int structures
|
|
represent.
|
|
|
|
\section{Assigning Values to mp\_int Structures}
|
|
\subsection{Copying an mp\_int}
|
|
Assigning the value that a given mp\_int structure represents to another mp\_int structure shall be known as making
|
|
a copy for the purposes of this text. The copy of the mp\_int will be a separate entity that represents the same
|
|
value as the mp\_int it was copied from. The mp\_copy algorithm provides this functionality.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_copy}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ and $b$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Store a copy of $a$ in $b$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b.alloc < a.used$ then grow $b$ to $a.used$ digits. (\textit{mp\_grow}) \\
|
|
2. for $n$ from 0 to $a.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $b_{n} \leftarrow a_{n}$ \\
|
|
3. for $n$ from $a.used$ to $b.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $b_{n} \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
4. $b.used \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
5. $b.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
6. return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_copy}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_copy.}
|
|
This algorithm copies the mp\_int $a$ such that upon succesful termination of the algorithm the mp\_int $b$ will
|
|
represent the same integer as the mp\_int $a$. The mp\_int $b$ shall be a complete and distinct copy of the
|
|
mp\_int $a$ meaing that the mp\_int $a$ can be modified and it shall not affect the value of the mp\_int $b$.
|
|
|
|
If $b$ does not have enough room for the digits of $a$ it must first have its precision augmented via the mp\_grow
|
|
algorithm. The digits of $a$ are copied over the digits of $b$ and any excess digits of $b$ are set to zero (step two
|
|
and three). The \textbf{used} and \textbf{sign} members of $a$ are finally copied over the respective members of
|
|
$b$.
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Remark.} This algorithm also introduces a new idiosyncrasy that will be used throughout the rest of the
|
|
text. The error return codes of other algorithms are not explicitly checked in the pseudo-code presented. For example, in
|
|
step one of the mp\_copy algorithm the return of mp\_grow is not explicitly checked to ensure it succeeded. Text space is
|
|
limited so it is assumed that if a algorithm fails it will clear all temporarily allocated mp\_ints and return
|
|
the error code itself. However, the C code presented will demonstrate all of the error handling logic required to
|
|
implement the pseudo-code.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_copy.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* copy, b = a */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_copy (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int res, n;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* if dst == src do nothing */
|
|
024 if (a == b) \{
|
|
025 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027
|
|
028 /* grow dest */
|
|
029 if (b->alloc < a->used) \{
|
|
030 if ((res = mp_grow (b, a->used)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
031 return res;
|
|
032 \}
|
|
033 \}
|
|
034
|
|
035 /* zero b and copy the parameters over */
|
|
036 \{
|
|
037 register mp_digit *tmpa, *tmpb;
|
|
038
|
|
039 /* pointer aliases */
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* source */
|
|
042 tmpa = a->dp;
|
|
043
|
|
044 /* destination */
|
|
045 tmpb = b->dp;
|
|
046
|
|
047 /* copy all the digits */
|
|
048 for (n = 0; n < a->used; n++) \{
|
|
049 *tmpb++ = *tmpa++;
|
|
050 \}
|
|
051
|
|
052 /* clear high digits */
|
|
053 for (; n < b->used; n++) \{
|
|
054 *tmpb++ = 0;
|
|
055 \}
|
|
056 \}
|
|
057
|
|
058 /* copy used count and sign */
|
|
059 b->used = a->used;
|
|
060 b->sign = a->sign;
|
|
061 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
062 \}
|
|
063 #endif
|
|
064
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Occasionally a dependent algorithm may copy an mp\_int effectively into itself such as when the input and output
|
|
mp\_int structures passed to a function are one and the same. For this case it is optimal to return immediately without
|
|
copying digits (line 24).
|
|
|
|
The mp\_int $b$ must have enough digits to accomodate the used digits of the mp\_int $a$. If $b.alloc$ is less than
|
|
$a.used$ the algorithm mp\_grow is used to augment the precision of $b$ (lines 29 to 33). In order to
|
|
simplify the inner loop that copies the digits from $a$ to $b$, two aliases $tmpa$ and $tmpb$ point directly at the digits
|
|
of the mp\_ints $a$ and $b$ respectively. These aliases (lines 42 and 45) allow the compiler to access the digits without first dereferencing the
|
|
mp\_int pointers and then subsequently the pointer to the digits.
|
|
|
|
After the aliases are established the digits from $a$ are copied into $b$ (lines 48 to 50) and then the excess
|
|
digits of $b$ are set to zero (lines 53 to 55). Both ``for'' loops make use of the pointer aliases and in
|
|
fact the alias for $b$ is carried through into the second ``for'' loop to clear the excess digits. This optimization
|
|
allows the alias to stay in a machine register fairly easy between the two loops.
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Remarks.} The use of pointer aliases is an implementation methodology first introduced in this function that will
|
|
be used considerably in other functions. Technically, a pointer alias is simply a short hand alias used to lower the
|
|
number of pointer dereferencing operations required to access data. For example, a for loop may resemble
|
|
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
for (x = 0; x < 100; x++) \{
|
|
a->num[4]->dp[x] = 0;
|
|
\}
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
|
|
This could be re-written using aliases as
|
|
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
mp_digit *tmpa;
|
|
a = a->num[4]->dp;
|
|
for (x = 0; x < 100; x++) \{
|
|
*a++ = 0;
|
|
\}
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
|
|
In this case an alias is used to access the
|
|
array of digits within an mp\_int structure directly. It may seem that a pointer alias is strictly not required
|
|
as a compiler may optimize out the redundant pointer operations. However, there are two dominant reasons to use aliases.
|
|
|
|
The first reason is that most compilers will not effectively optimize pointer arithmetic. For example, some optimizations
|
|
may work for the Microsoft Visual C++ compiler (MSVC) and not for the GNU C Compiler (GCC). Also some optimizations may
|
|
work for GCC and not MSVC. As such it is ideal to find a common ground for as many compilers as possible. Pointer
|
|
aliases optimize the code considerably before the compiler even reads the source code which means the end compiled code
|
|
stands a better chance of being faster.
|
|
|
|
The second reason is that pointer aliases often can make an algorithm simpler to read. Consider the first ``for''
|
|
loop of the function mp\_copy() re-written to not use pointer aliases.
|
|
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
/* copy all the digits */
|
|
for (n = 0; n < a->used; n++) \{
|
|
b->dp[n] = a->dp[n];
|
|
\}
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
|
|
Whether this code is harder to read depends strongly on the individual. However, it is quantifiably slightly more
|
|
complicated as there are four variables within the statement instead of just two.
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Nested Statements}
|
|
Another commonly used technique in the source routines is that certain sections of code are nested. This is used in
|
|
particular with the pointer aliases to highlight code phases. For example, a Comba multiplier (discussed in chapter six)
|
|
will typically have three different phases. First the temporaries are initialized, then the columns calculated and
|
|
finally the carries are propagated. In this example the middle column production phase will typically be nested as it
|
|
uses temporary variables and aliases the most.
|
|
|
|
The nesting also simplies the source code as variables that are nested are only valid for their scope. As a result
|
|
the various temporary variables required do not propagate into other sections of code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Creating a Clone}
|
|
Another common operation is to make a local temporary copy of an mp\_int argument. To initialize an mp\_int
|
|
and then copy another existing mp\_int into the newly intialized mp\_int will be known as creating a clone. This is
|
|
useful within functions that need to modify an argument but do not wish to actually modify the original copy. The
|
|
mp\_init\_copy algorithm has been designed to help perform this task.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_init\_copy}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ and $b$\\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a$ is initialized to be a copy of $b$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Init $a$. (\textit{mp\_init}) \\
|
|
2. Copy $b$ to $a$. (\textit{mp\_copy}) \\
|
|
3. Return the status of the copy operation. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_init\_copy}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_init\_copy.}
|
|
This algorithm will initialize an mp\_int variable and copy another previously initialized mp\_int variable into it. As
|
|
such this algorithm will perform two operations in one step.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_init\_copy.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* creates "a" then copies b into it */
|
|
018 int mp_init_copy (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int res;
|
|
021
|
|
022 if ((res = mp_init (a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
023 return res;
|
|
024 \}
|
|
025 return mp_copy (b, a);
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027 #endif
|
|
028
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This will initialize \textbf{a} and make it a verbatim copy of the contents of \textbf{b}. Note that
|
|
\textbf{a} will have its own memory allocated which means that \textbf{b} may be cleared after the call
|
|
and \textbf{a} will be left intact.
|
|
|
|
\section{Zeroing an Integer}
|
|
Reseting an mp\_int to the default state is a common step in many algorithms. The mp\_zero algorithm will be the algorithm used to
|
|
perform this task.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_zero}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Zero the contents of $a$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $a.used \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
2. $a.sign \leftarrow$ MP\_ZPOS \\
|
|
3. for $n$ from 0 to $a.alloc - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $a_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_zero}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_zero.}
|
|
This algorithm simply resets a mp\_int to the default state.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_zero.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* set to zero */
|
|
018 void mp_zero (mp_int * a)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int n;
|
|
021 mp_digit *tmp;
|
|
022
|
|
023 a->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
024 a->used = 0;
|
|
025
|
|
026 tmp = a->dp;
|
|
027 for (n = 0; n < a->alloc; n++) \{
|
|
028 *tmp++ = 0;
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030 \}
|
|
031 #endif
|
|
032
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
After the function is completed, all of the digits are zeroed, the \textbf{used} count is zeroed and the
|
|
\textbf{sign} variable is set to \textbf{MP\_ZPOS}.
|
|
|
|
\section{Sign Manipulation}
|
|
\subsection{Absolute Value}
|
|
With the mp\_int representation of an integer, calculating the absolute value is trivial. The mp\_abs algorithm will compute
|
|
the absolute value of an mp\_int.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_abs}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Computes $b = \vert a \vert$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Copy $a$ to $b$. (\textit{mp\_copy}) \\
|
|
2. If the copy failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
3. $b.sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
4. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_abs}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_abs.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the absolute of an mp\_int input. First it copies $a$ over $b$. This is an example of an
|
|
algorithm where the check in mp\_copy that determines if the source and destination are equal proves useful. This allows,
|
|
for instance, the developer to pass the same mp\_int as the source and destination to this function without addition
|
|
logic to handle it.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_abs.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* b = |a|
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * Simple function copies the input and fixes the sign to positive
|
|
020 */
|
|
021 int
|
|
022 mp_abs (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
023 \{
|
|
024 int res;
|
|
025
|
|
026 /* copy a to b */
|
|
027 if (a != b) \{
|
|
028 if ((res = mp_copy (a, b)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
029 return res;
|
|
030 \}
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* force the sign of b to positive */
|
|
034 b->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
035
|
|
036 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
037 \}
|
|
038 #endif
|
|
039
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This fairly trivial algorithm first eliminates non--required duplications (line 27) and then sets the
|
|
\textbf{sign} flag to \textbf{MP\_ZPOS}.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Integer Negation}
|
|
With the mp\_int representation of an integer, calculating the negation is also trivial. The mp\_neg algorithm will compute
|
|
the negative of an mp\_int input.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_neg}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Computes $b = -a$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Copy $a$ to $b$. (\textit{mp\_copy}) \\
|
|
2. If the copy failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
3. If $a.used = 0$ then return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
4. If $a.sign = MP\_ZPOS$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $b.sign = MP\_NEG$. \\
|
|
5. else do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $b.sign = MP\_ZPOS$. \\
|
|
6. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_neg}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_neg.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the negation of an input. First it copies $a$ over $b$. If $a$ has no used digits then
|
|
the algorithm returns immediately. Otherwise it flips the sign flag and stores the result in $b$. Note that if
|
|
$a$ had no digits then it must be positive by definition. Had step three been omitted then the algorithm would return
|
|
zero as negative.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_neg.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* b = -a */
|
|
018 int mp_neg (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int res;
|
|
021 if (a != b) \{
|
|
022 if ((res = mp_copy (a, b)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
023 return res;
|
|
024 \}
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 if (mp_iszero(b) != MP_YES) \{
|
|
028 b->sign = (a->sign == MP_ZPOS) ? MP_NEG : MP_ZPOS;
|
|
029 \} else \{
|
|
030 b->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032
|
|
033 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
034 \}
|
|
035 #endif
|
|
036
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Like mp\_abs() this function avoids non--required duplications (line 21) and then sets the sign. We
|
|
have to make sure that only non--zero values get a \textbf{sign} of \textbf{MP\_NEG}. If the mp\_int is zero
|
|
than the \textbf{sign} is hard--coded to \textbf{MP\_ZPOS}.
|
|
|
|
\section{Small Constants}
|
|
\subsection{Setting Small Constants}
|
|
Often a mp\_int must be set to a relatively small value such as $1$ or $2$. For these cases the mp\_set algorithm is useful.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_set}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ and a digit $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Make $a$ equivalent to $b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Zero $a$ (\textit{mp\_zero}). \\
|
|
2. $a_0 \leftarrow b \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
3. $a.used \leftarrow \left \lbrace \begin{array}{ll}
|
|
1 & \mbox{if }a_0 > 0 \\
|
|
0 & \mbox{if }a_0 = 0
|
|
\end{array} \right .$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_set}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_set.}
|
|
This algorithm sets a mp\_int to a small single digit value. Step number 1 ensures that the integer is reset to the default state. The
|
|
single digit is set (\textit{modulo $\beta$}) and the \textbf{used} count is adjusted accordingly.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_set.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* set to a digit */
|
|
018 void mp_set (mp_int * a, mp_digit b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 mp_zero (a);
|
|
021 a->dp[0] = b & MP_MASK;
|
|
022 a->used = (a->dp[0] != 0) ? 1 : 0;
|
|
023 \}
|
|
024 #endif
|
|
025
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
First we zero (line 20) the mp\_int to make sure that the other members are initialized for a
|
|
small positive constant. mp\_zero() ensures that the \textbf{sign} is positive and the \textbf{used} count
|
|
is zero. Next we set the digit and reduce it modulo $\beta$ (line 21). After this step we have to
|
|
check if the resulting digit is zero or not. If it is not then we set the \textbf{used} count to one, otherwise
|
|
to zero.
|
|
|
|
We can quickly reduce modulo $\beta$ since it is of the form $2^k$ and a quick binary AND operation with
|
|
$2^k - 1$ will perform the same operation.
|
|
|
|
One important limitation of this function is that it will only set one digit. The size of a digit is not fixed, meaning source that uses
|
|
this function should take that into account. Only trivially small constants can be set using this function.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Setting Large Constants}
|
|
To overcome the limitations of the mp\_set algorithm the mp\_set\_int algorithm is ideal. It accepts a ``long''
|
|
data type as input and will always treat it as a 32-bit integer.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_set\_int}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An mp\_int $a$ and a ``long'' integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Make $a$ equivalent to $b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Zero $a$ (\textit{mp\_zero}) \\
|
|
2. for $n$ from 0 to 7 do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $a \leftarrow a \cdot 16$ (\textit{mp\_mul2d}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 $u \leftarrow \lfloor b / 2^{4(7 - n)} \rfloor \mbox{ (mod }16\mbox{)}$\\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.3 $a_0 \leftarrow a_0 + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.4 $a.used \leftarrow a.used + 1$ \\
|
|
3. Clamp excess used digits (\textit{mp\_clamp}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_set\_int}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_set\_int.}
|
|
The algorithm performs eight iterations of a simple loop where in each iteration four bits from the source are added to the
|
|
mp\_int. Step 2.1 will multiply the current result by sixteen making room for four more bits in the less significant positions. In step 2.2 the
|
|
next four bits from the source are extracted and are added to the mp\_int. The \textbf{used} digit count is
|
|
incremented to reflect the addition. The \textbf{used} digit counter is incremented since if any of the leading digits were zero the mp\_int would have
|
|
zero digits used and the newly added four bits would be ignored.
|
|
|
|
Excess zero digits are trimmed in steps 2.1 and 3 by using higher level algorithms mp\_mul2d and mp\_clamp.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_set\_int.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* set a 32-bit const */
|
|
018 int mp_set_int (mp_int * a, unsigned long b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int x, res;
|
|
021
|
|
022 mp_zero (a);
|
|
023
|
|
024 /* set four bits at a time */
|
|
025 for (x = 0; x < 8; x++) \{
|
|
026 /* shift the number up four bits */
|
|
027 if ((res = mp_mul_2d (a, 4, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
028 return res;
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* OR in the top four bits of the source */
|
|
032 a->dp[0] |= (b >> 28) & 15;
|
|
033
|
|
034 /* shift the source up to the next four bits */
|
|
035 b <<= 4;
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* ensure that digits are not clamped off */
|
|
038 a->used += 1;
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040 mp_clamp (a);
|
|
041 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043 #endif
|
|
044
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This function sets four bits of the number at a time to handle all practical \textbf{DIGIT\_BIT} sizes. The weird
|
|
addition on line 38 ensures that the newly added in bits are added to the number of digits. While it may not
|
|
seem obvious as to why the digit counter does not grow exceedingly large it is because of the shift on line 27
|
|
as well as the call to mp\_clamp() on line 40. Both functions will clamp excess leading digits which keeps
|
|
the number of used digits low.
|
|
|
|
\section{Comparisons}
|
|
\subsection{Unsigned Comparisions}
|
|
Comparing a multiple precision integer is performed with the exact same algorithm used to compare two decimal numbers. For example,
|
|
to compare $1,234$ to $1,264$ the digits are extracted by their positions. That is we compare $1 \cdot 10^3 + 2 \cdot 10^2 + 3 \cdot 10^1 + 4 \cdot 10^0$
|
|
to $1 \cdot 10^3 + 2 \cdot 10^2 + 6 \cdot 10^1 + 4 \cdot 10^0$ by comparing single digits at a time starting with the highest magnitude
|
|
positions. If any leading digit of one integer is greater than a digit in the same position of another integer then obviously it must be greater.
|
|
|
|
The first comparision routine that will be developed is the unsigned magnitude compare which will perform a comparison based on the digits of two
|
|
mp\_int variables alone. It will ignore the sign of the two inputs. Such a function is useful when an absolute comparison is required or if the
|
|
signs are known to agree in advance.
|
|
|
|
To facilitate working with the results of the comparison functions three constants are required.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|r|l|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Constant} & \textbf{Meaning} \\
|
|
\hline \textbf{MP\_GT} & Greater Than \\
|
|
\hline \textbf{MP\_EQ} & Equal To \\
|
|
\hline \textbf{MP\_LT} & Less Than \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Comparison Return Codes}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_cmp\_mag}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two mp\_ints $a$ and $b$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Unsigned comparison results ($a$ to the left of $b$). \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $a.used > b.used$ then return(\textit{MP\_GT}) \\
|
|
2. If $a.used < b.used$ then return(\textit{MP\_LT}) \\
|
|
3. for n from $a.used - 1$ to 0 do \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}3.1 if $a_n > b_n$ then return(\textit{MP\_GT}) \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}3.2 if $a_n < b_n$ then return(\textit{MP\_LT}) \\
|
|
4. Return(\textit{MP\_EQ}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_cmp\_mag}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_cmp\_mag.}
|
|
By saying ``$a$ to the left of $b$'' it is meant that the comparison is with respect to $a$, that is if $a$ is greater than $b$ it will return
|
|
\textbf{MP\_GT} and similar with respect to when $a = b$ and $a < b$. The first two steps compare the number of digits used in both $a$ and $b$.
|
|
Obviously if the digit counts differ there would be an imaginary zero digit in the smaller number where the leading digit of the larger number is.
|
|
If both have the same number of digits than the actual digits themselves must be compared starting at the leading digit.
|
|
|
|
By step three both inputs must have the same number of digits so its safe to start from either $a.used - 1$ or $b.used - 1$ and count down to
|
|
the zero'th digit. If after all of the digits have been compared, no difference is found, the algorithm returns \textbf{MP\_EQ}.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_cmp\_mag.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* compare maginitude of two ints (unsigned) */
|
|
018 int mp_cmp_mag (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int n;
|
|
021 mp_digit *tmpa, *tmpb;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* compare based on # of non-zero digits */
|
|
024 if (a->used > b->used) \{
|
|
025 return MP_GT;
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027
|
|
028 if (a->used < b->used) \{
|
|
029 return MP_LT;
|
|
030 \}
|
|
031
|
|
032 /* alias for a */
|
|
033 tmpa = a->dp + (a->used - 1);
|
|
034
|
|
035 /* alias for b */
|
|
036 tmpb = b->dp + (a->used - 1);
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* compare based on digits */
|
|
039 for (n = 0; n < a->used; ++n, --tmpa, --tmpb) \{
|
|
040 if (*tmpa > *tmpb) \{
|
|
041 return MP_GT;
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043
|
|
044 if (*tmpa < *tmpb) \{
|
|
045 return MP_LT;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047 \}
|
|
048 return MP_EQ;
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050 #endif
|
|
051
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The two if statements (lines 24 and 28) compare the number of digits in the two inputs. These two are
|
|
performed before all of the digits are compared since it is a very cheap test to perform and can potentially save
|
|
considerable time. The implementation given is also not valid without those two statements. $b.alloc$ may be
|
|
smaller than $a.used$, meaning that undefined values will be read from $b$ past the end of the array of digits.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Signed Comparisons}
|
|
Comparing with sign considerations is also fairly critical in several routines (\textit{division for example}). Based on an unsigned magnitude
|
|
comparison a trivial signed comparison algorithm can be written.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_cmp}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two mp\_ints $a$ and $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Signed Comparison Results ($a$ to the left of $b$) \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. if $a.sign = MP\_NEG$ and $b.sign = MP\_ZPOS$ then return(\textit{MP\_LT}) \\
|
|
2. if $a.sign = MP\_ZPOS$ and $b.sign = MP\_NEG$ then return(\textit{MP\_GT}) \\
|
|
3. if $a.sign = MP\_NEG$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}3.1 Return the unsigned comparison of $b$ and $a$ (\textit{mp\_cmp\_mag}) \\
|
|
4 Otherwise \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}4.1 Return the unsigned comparison of $a$ and $b$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_cmp}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_cmp.}
|
|
The first two steps compare the signs of the two inputs. If the signs do not agree then it can return right away with the appropriate
|
|
comparison code. When the signs are equal the digits of the inputs must be compared to determine the correct result. In step
|
|
three the unsigned comparision flips the order of the arguments since they are both negative. For instance, if $-a > -b$ then
|
|
$\vert a \vert < \vert b \vert$. Step number four will compare the two when they are both positive.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_cmp.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* compare two ints (signed)*/
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_cmp (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 /* compare based on sign */
|
|
022 if (a->sign != b->sign) \{
|
|
023 if (a->sign == MP_NEG) \{
|
|
024 return MP_LT;
|
|
025 \} else \{
|
|
026 return MP_GT;
|
|
027 \}
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* compare digits */
|
|
031 if (a->sign == MP_NEG) \{
|
|
032 /* if negative compare opposite direction */
|
|
033 return mp_cmp_mag(b, a);
|
|
034 \} else \{
|
|
035 return mp_cmp_mag(a, b);
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037 \}
|
|
038 #endif
|
|
039
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The two if statements (lines 22 and 23) perform the initial sign comparison. If the signs are not the equal then which ever
|
|
has the positive sign is larger. The inputs are compared (line 31) based on magnitudes. If the signs were both
|
|
negative then the unsigned comparison is performed in the opposite direction (line 33). Otherwise, the signs are assumed to
|
|
be both positive and a forward direction unsigned comparison is performed.
|
|
|
|
\section*{Exercises}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{cl}
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ]$ & Modify algorithm mp\_set\_int to accept as input a variable length array of bits. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ]$ & Give the probability that algorithm mp\_cmp\_mag will have to compare $k$ digits \\
|
|
& of two random digits (of equal magnitude) before a difference is found. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 1 \right ]$ & Suggest a simple method to speed up the implementation of mp\_cmp\_mag based \\
|
|
& on the observations made in the previous problem. \\
|
|
&
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Basic Arithmetic}
|
|
\section{Introduction}
|
|
At this point algorithms for initialization, clearing, zeroing, copying, comparing and setting small constants have been
|
|
established. The next logical set of algorithms to develop are addition, subtraction and digit shifting algorithms. These
|
|
algorithms make use of the lower level algorithms and are the cruicial building block for the multiplication algorithms. It is very important
|
|
that these algorithms are highly optimized. On their own they are simple $O(n)$ algorithms but they can be called from higher level algorithms
|
|
which easily places them at $O(n^2)$ or even $O(n^3)$ work levels.
|
|
|
|
All of the algorithms within this chapter make use of the logical bit shift operations denoted by $<<$ and $>>$ for left and right
|
|
logical shifts respectively. A logical shift is analogous to sliding the decimal point of radix-10 representations. For example, the real
|
|
number $0.9345$ is equivalent to $93.45\%$ which is found by sliding the the decimal two places to the right (\textit{multiplying by $\beta^2 = 10^2$}).
|
|
Algebraically a binary logical shift is equivalent to a division or multiplication by a power of two.
|
|
For example, $a << k = a \cdot 2^k$ while $a >> k = \lfloor a/2^k \rfloor$.
|
|
|
|
One significant difference between a logical shift and the way decimals are shifted is that digits below the zero'th position are removed
|
|
from the number. For example, consider $1101_2 >> 1$ using decimal notation this would produce $110.1_2$. However, with a logical shift the
|
|
result is $110_2$.
|
|
|
|
\section{Addition and Subtraction}
|
|
In common twos complement fixed precision arithmetic negative numbers are easily represented by subtraction from the modulus. For example, with 32-bit integers
|
|
$a - b\mbox{ (mod }2^{32}\mbox{)}$ is the same as $a + (2^{32} - b) \mbox{ (mod }2^{32}\mbox{)}$ since $2^{32} \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2^{32}\mbox{)}$.
|
|
As a result subtraction can be performed with a trivial series of logical operations and an addition.
|
|
|
|
However, in multiple precision arithmetic negative numbers are not represented in the same way. Instead a sign flag is used to keep track of the
|
|
sign of the integer. As a result signed addition and subtraction are actually implemented as conditional usage of lower level addition or
|
|
subtraction algorithms with the sign fixed up appropriately.
|
|
|
|
The lower level algorithms will add or subtract integers without regard to the sign flag. That is they will add or subtract the magnitude of
|
|
the integers respectively.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Low Level Addition}
|
|
An unsigned addition of multiple precision integers is performed with the same long-hand algorithm used to add decimal numbers. That is to add the
|
|
trailing digits first and propagate the resulting carry upwards. Since this is a lower level algorithm the name will have a ``s\_'' prefix.
|
|
Historically that convention stems from the MPI library where ``s\_'' stood for static functions that were hidden from the developer entirely.
|
|
|
|
\newpage
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{s\_mp\_add}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two mp\_ints $a$ and $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The unsigned addition $c = \vert a \vert + \vert b \vert$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. if $a.used > b.used$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}1.1 $min \leftarrow b.used$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}1.2 $max \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}1.3 $x \leftarrow a$ \\
|
|
2. else \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}2.1 $min \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}2.2 $max \leftarrow b.used$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}2.3 $x \leftarrow b$ \\
|
|
3. If $c.alloc < max + 1$ then grow $c$ to hold at least $max + 1$ digits (\textit{mp\_grow}) \\
|
|
4. $oldused \leftarrow c.used$ \\
|
|
5. $c.used \leftarrow max + 1$ \\
|
|
6. $u \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
7. for $n$ from $0$ to $min - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}7.1 $c_n \leftarrow a_n + b_n + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}7.2 $u \leftarrow c_n >> lg(\beta)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}7.3 $c_n \leftarrow c_n \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
8. if $min \ne max$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}8.1 for $n$ from $min$ to $max - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{+6mm}8.1.1 $c_n \leftarrow x_n + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+6mm}8.1.2 $u \leftarrow c_n >> lg(\beta)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{+6mm}8.1.3 $c_n \leftarrow c_n \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
9. $c_{max} \leftarrow u$ \\
|
|
10. if $olduse > max$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{+3mm}10.1 for $n$ from $max + 1$ to $oldused - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{+6mm}10.1.1 $c_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
11. Clamp excess digits in $c$. (\textit{mp\_clamp}) \\
|
|
12. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm s\_mp\_add}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm s\_mp\_add.}
|
|
This algorithm is loosely based on algorithm 14.7 of HAC \cite[pp. 594]{HAC} but has been extended to allow the inputs to have different magnitudes.
|
|
Coincidentally the description of algorithm A in Knuth \cite[pp. 266]{TAOCPV2} shares the same deficiency as the algorithm from \cite{HAC}. Even the
|
|
MIX pseudo machine code presented by Knuth \cite[pp. 266-267]{TAOCPV2} is incapable of handling inputs which are of different magnitudes.
|
|
|
|
The first thing that has to be accomplished is to sort out which of the two inputs is the largest. The addition logic
|
|
will simply add all of the smallest input to the largest input and store that first part of the result in the
|
|
destination. Then it will apply a simpler addition loop to excess digits of the larger input.
|
|
|
|
The first two steps will handle sorting the inputs such that $min$ and $max$ hold the digit counts of the two
|
|
inputs. The variable $x$ will be an mp\_int alias for the largest input or the second input $b$ if they have the
|
|
same number of digits. After the inputs are sorted the destination $c$ is grown as required to accomodate the sum
|
|
of the two inputs. The original \textbf{used} count of $c$ is copied and set to the new used count.
|
|
|
|
At this point the first addition loop will go through as many digit positions that both inputs have. The carry
|
|
variable $\mu$ is set to zero outside the loop. Inside the loop an ``addition'' step requires three statements to produce
|
|
one digit of the summand. First
|
|
two digits from $a$ and $b$ are added together along with the carry $\mu$. The carry of this step is extracted and stored
|
|
in $\mu$ and finally the digit of the result $c_n$ is truncated within the range $0 \le c_n < \beta$.
|
|
|
|
Now all of the digit positions that both inputs have in common have been exhausted. If $min \ne max$ then $x$ is an alias
|
|
for one of the inputs that has more digits. A simplified addition loop is then used to essentially copy the remaining digits
|
|
and the carry to the destination.
|
|
|
|
The final carry is stored in $c_{max}$ and digits above $max$ upto $oldused$ are zeroed which completes the addition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_s\_mp\_add.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* low level addition, based on HAC pp.594, Algorithm 14.7 */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 s_mp_add (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 mp_int *x;
|
|
022 int olduse, res, min, max;
|
|
023
|
|
024 /* find sizes, we let |a| <= |b| which means we have to sort
|
|
025 * them. "x" will point to the input with the most digits
|
|
026 */
|
|
027 if (a->used > b->used) \{
|
|
028 min = b->used;
|
|
029 max = a->used;
|
|
030 x = a;
|
|
031 \} else \{
|
|
032 min = a->used;
|
|
033 max = b->used;
|
|
034 x = b;
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* init result */
|
|
038 if (c->alloc < max + 1) \{
|
|
039 if ((res = mp_grow (c, max + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
040 return res;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043
|
|
044 /* get old used digit count and set new one */
|
|
045 olduse = c->used;
|
|
046 c->used = max + 1;
|
|
047
|
|
048 \{
|
|
049 register mp_digit u, *tmpa, *tmpb, *tmpc;
|
|
050 register int i;
|
|
051
|
|
052 /* alias for digit pointers */
|
|
053
|
|
054 /* first input */
|
|
055 tmpa = a->dp;
|
|
056
|
|
057 /* second input */
|
|
058 tmpb = b->dp;
|
|
059
|
|
060 /* destination */
|
|
061 tmpc = c->dp;
|
|
062
|
|
063 /* zero the carry */
|
|
064 u = 0;
|
|
065 for (i = 0; i < min; i++) \{
|
|
066 /* Compute the sum at one digit, T[i] = A[i] + B[i] + U */
|
|
067 *tmpc = *tmpa++ + *tmpb++ + u;
|
|
068
|
|
069 /* U = carry bit of T[i] */
|
|
070 u = *tmpc >> ((mp_digit)DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
071
|
|
072 /* take away carry bit from T[i] */
|
|
073 *tmpc++ &= MP_MASK;
|
|
074 \}
|
|
075
|
|
076 /* now copy higher words if any, that is in A+B
|
|
077 * if A or B has more digits add those in
|
|
078 */
|
|
079 if (min != max) \{
|
|
080 for (; i < max; i++) \{
|
|
081 /* T[i] = X[i] + U */
|
|
082 *tmpc = x->dp[i] + u;
|
|
083
|
|
084 /* U = carry bit of T[i] */
|
|
085 u = *tmpc >> ((mp_digit)DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
086
|
|
087 /* take away carry bit from T[i] */
|
|
088 *tmpc++ &= MP_MASK;
|
|
089 \}
|
|
090 \}
|
|
091
|
|
092 /* add carry */
|
|
093 *tmpc++ = u;
|
|
094
|
|
095 /* clear digits above oldused */
|
|
096 for (i = c->used; i < olduse; i++) \{
|
|
097 *tmpc++ = 0;
|
|
098 \}
|
|
099 \}
|
|
100
|
|
101 mp_clamp (c);
|
|
102 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
103 \}
|
|
104 #endif
|
|
105
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
We first sort (lines 27 to 35) the inputs based on magnitude and determine the $min$ and $max$ variables.
|
|
Note that $x$ is a pointer to an mp\_int assigned to the largest input, in effect it is a local alias. Next we
|
|
grow the destination (37 to 42) ensure that it can accomodate the result of the addition.
|
|
|
|
Similar to the implementation of mp\_copy this function uses the braced code and local aliases coding style. The three aliases that are on
|
|
lines 55, 58 and 61 represent the two inputs and destination variables respectively. These aliases are used to ensure the
|
|
compiler does not have to dereference $a$, $b$ or $c$ (respectively) to access the digits of the respective mp\_int.
|
|
|
|
The initial carry $u$ will be cleared (line 64), note that $u$ is of type mp\_digit which ensures type
|
|
compatibility within the implementation. The initial addition (line 65 to 74) adds digits from
|
|
both inputs until the smallest input runs out of digits. Similarly the conditional addition loop
|
|
(line 80 to 90) adds the remaining digits from the larger of the two inputs. The addition is finished
|
|
with the final carry being stored in $tmpc$ (line 93). Note the ``++'' operator within the same expression.
|
|
After line 93, $tmpc$ will point to the $c.used$'th digit of the mp\_int $c$. This is useful
|
|
for the next loop (line 96 to 99) which set any old upper digits to zero.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Low Level Subtraction}
|
|
The low level unsigned subtraction algorithm is very similar to the low level unsigned addition algorithm. The principle difference is that the
|
|
unsigned subtraction algorithm requires the result to be positive. That is when computing $a - b$ the condition $\vert a \vert \ge \vert b\vert$ must
|
|
be met for this algorithm to function properly. Keep in mind this low level algorithm is not meant to be used in higher level algorithms directly.
|
|
This algorithm as will be shown can be used to create functional signed addition and subtraction algorithms.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For this algorithm a new variable is required to make the description simpler. Recall from section 1.3.1 that a mp\_digit must be able to represent
|
|
the range $0 \le x < 2\beta$ for the algorithms to work correctly. However, it is allowable that a mp\_digit represent a larger range of values. For
|
|
this algorithm we will assume that the variable $\gamma$ represents the number of bits available in a
|
|
mp\_digit (\textit{this implies $2^{\gamma} > \beta$}).
|
|
|
|
For example, the default for LibTomMath is to use a ``unsigned long'' for the mp\_digit ``type'' while $\beta = 2^{28}$. In ISO C an ``unsigned long''
|
|
data type must be able to represent $0 \le x < 2^{32}$ meaning that in this case $\gamma \ge 32$.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{s\_mp\_sub}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two mp\_ints $a$ and $b$ ($\vert a \vert \ge \vert b \vert$) \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The unsigned subtraction $c = \vert a \vert - \vert b \vert$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $min \leftarrow b.used$ \\
|
|
2. $max \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
3. If $c.alloc < max$ then grow $c$ to hold at least $max$ digits. (\textit{mp\_grow}) \\
|
|
4. $oldused \leftarrow c.used$ \\
|
|
5. $c.used \leftarrow max$ \\
|
|
6. $u \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
7. for $n$ from $0$ to $min - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $c_n \leftarrow a_n - b_n - u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.2 $u \leftarrow c_n >> (\gamma - 1)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.3 $c_n \leftarrow c_n \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
8. if $min < max$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 for $n$ from $min$ to $max - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}8.1.1 $c_n \leftarrow a_n - u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}8.1.2 $u \leftarrow c_n >> (\gamma - 1)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}8.1.3 $c_n \leftarrow c_n \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
9. if $oldused > max$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 for $n$ from $max$ to $oldused - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}9.1.1 $c_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
10. Clamp excess digits of $c$. (\textit{mp\_clamp}). \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm s\_mp\_sub}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm s\_mp\_sub.}
|
|
This algorithm performs the unsigned subtraction of two mp\_int variables under the restriction that the result must be positive. That is when
|
|
passing variables $a$ and $b$ the condition that $\vert a \vert \ge \vert b \vert$ must be met for the algorithm to function correctly. This
|
|
algorithm is loosely based on algorithm 14.9 \cite[pp. 595]{HAC} and is similar to algorithm S in \cite[pp. 267]{TAOCPV2} as well. As was the case
|
|
of the algorithm s\_mp\_add both other references lack discussion concerning various practical details such as when the inputs differ in magnitude.
|
|
|
|
The initial sorting of the inputs is trivial in this algorithm since $a$ is guaranteed to have at least the same magnitude of $b$. Steps 1 and 2
|
|
set the $min$ and $max$ variables. Unlike the addition routine there is guaranteed to be no carry which means that the final result can be at
|
|
most $max$ digits in length as opposed to $max + 1$. Similar to the addition algorithm the \textbf{used} count of $c$ is copied locally and
|
|
set to the maximal count for the operation.
|
|
|
|
The subtraction loop that begins on step seven is essentially the same as the addition loop of algorithm s\_mp\_add except single precision
|
|
subtraction is used instead. Note the use of the $\gamma$ variable to extract the carry (\textit{also known as the borrow}) within the subtraction
|
|
loops. Under the assumption that two's complement single precision arithmetic is used this will successfully extract the desired carry.
|
|
|
|
For example, consider subtracting $0101_2$ from $0100_2$ where $\gamma = 4$ and $\beta = 2$. The least significant bit will force a carry upwards to
|
|
the third bit which will be set to zero after the borrow. After the very first bit has been subtracted $4 - 1 \equiv 0011_2$ will remain, When the
|
|
third bit of $0101_2$ is subtracted from the result it will cause another carry. In this case though the carry will be forced to propagate all the
|
|
way to the most significant bit.
|
|
|
|
Recall that $\beta < 2^{\gamma}$. This means that if a carry does occur just before the $lg(\beta)$'th bit it will propagate all the way to the most
|
|
significant bit. Thus, the high order bits of the mp\_digit that are not part of the actual digit will either be all zero, or all one. All that
|
|
is needed is a single zero or one bit for the carry. Therefore a single logical shift right by $\gamma - 1$ positions is sufficient to extract the
|
|
carry. This method of carry extraction may seem awkward but the reason for it becomes apparent when the implementation is discussed.
|
|
|
|
If $b$ has a smaller magnitude than $a$ then step 9 will force the carry and copy operation to propagate through the larger input $a$ into $c$. Step
|
|
10 will ensure that any leading digits of $c$ above the $max$'th position are zeroed.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_s\_mp\_sub.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* low level subtraction (assumes |a| > |b|), HAC pp.595 Algorithm 14.9 */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 s_mp_sub (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int olduse, res, min, max;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* find sizes */
|
|
024 min = b->used;
|
|
025 max = a->used;
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* init result */
|
|
028 if (c->alloc < max) \{
|
|
029 if ((res = mp_grow (c, max)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
030 return res;
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032 \}
|
|
033 olduse = c->used;
|
|
034 c->used = max;
|
|
035
|
|
036 \{
|
|
037 register mp_digit u, *tmpa, *tmpb, *tmpc;
|
|
038 register int i;
|
|
039
|
|
040 /* alias for digit pointers */
|
|
041 tmpa = a->dp;
|
|
042 tmpb = b->dp;
|
|
043 tmpc = c->dp;
|
|
044
|
|
045 /* set carry to zero */
|
|
046 u = 0;
|
|
047 for (i = 0; i < min; i++) \{
|
|
048 /* T[i] = A[i] - B[i] - U */
|
|
049 *tmpc = *tmpa++ - *tmpb++ - u;
|
|
050
|
|
051 /* U = carry bit of T[i]
|
|
052 * Note this saves performing an AND operation since
|
|
053 * if a carry does occur it will propagate all the way to the
|
|
054 * MSB. As a result a single shift is enough to get the carry
|
|
055 */
|
|
056 u = *tmpc >> ((mp_digit)(CHAR_BIT * sizeof (mp_digit) - 1));
|
|
057
|
|
058 /* Clear carry from T[i] */
|
|
059 *tmpc++ &= MP_MASK;
|
|
060 \}
|
|
061
|
|
062 /* now copy higher words if any, e.g. if A has more digits than B */
|
|
063 for (; i < max; i++) \{
|
|
064 /* T[i] = A[i] - U */
|
|
065 *tmpc = *tmpa++ - u;
|
|
066
|
|
067 /* U = carry bit of T[i] */
|
|
068 u = *tmpc >> ((mp_digit)(CHAR_BIT * sizeof (mp_digit) - 1));
|
|
069
|
|
070 /* Clear carry from T[i] */
|
|
071 *tmpc++ &= MP_MASK;
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073
|
|
074 /* clear digits above used (since we may not have grown result above) */
|
|
|
|
075 for (i = c->used; i < olduse; i++) \{
|
|
076 *tmpc++ = 0;
|
|
077 \}
|
|
078 \}
|
|
079
|
|
080 mp_clamp (c);
|
|
081 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
082 \}
|
|
083
|
|
084 #endif
|
|
085
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Like low level addition we ``sort'' the inputs. Except in this case the sorting is hardcoded
|
|
(lines 24 and 25). In reality the $min$ and $max$ variables are only aliases and are only
|
|
used to make the source code easier to read. Again the pointer alias optimization is used
|
|
within this algorithm. The aliases $tmpa$, $tmpb$ and $tmpc$ are initialized
|
|
(lines 41, 42 and 43) for $a$, $b$ and $c$ respectively.
|
|
|
|
The first subtraction loop (lines 46 through 60) subtract digits from both inputs until the smaller of
|
|
the two inputs has been exhausted. As remarked earlier there is an implementation reason for using the ``awkward''
|
|
method of extracting the carry (line 56). The traditional method for extracting the carry would be to shift
|
|
by $lg(\beta)$ positions and logically AND the least significant bit. The AND operation is required because all of
|
|
the bits above the $\lg(\beta)$'th bit will be set to one after a carry occurs from subtraction. This carry
|
|
extraction requires two relatively cheap operations to extract the carry. The other method is to simply shift the
|
|
most significant bit to the least significant bit thus extracting the carry with a single cheap operation. This
|
|
optimization only works on twos compliment machines which is a safe assumption to make.
|
|
|
|
If $a$ has a larger magnitude than $b$ an additional loop (lines 63 through 72) is required to propagate
|
|
the carry through $a$ and copy the result to $c$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{High Level Addition}
|
|
Now that both lower level addition and subtraction algorithms have been established an effective high level signed addition algorithm can be
|
|
established. This high level addition algorithm will be what other algorithms and developers will use to perform addition of mp\_int data
|
|
types.
|
|
|
|
Recall from section 5.2 that an mp\_int represents an integer with an unsigned mantissa (\textit{the array of digits}) and a \textbf{sign}
|
|
flag. A high level addition is actually performed as a series of eight separate cases which can be optimized down to three unique cases.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_add}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two mp\_ints $a$ and $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The signed addition $c = a + b$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. if $a.sign = b.sign$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $c.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 $c \leftarrow \vert a \vert + \vert b \vert$ (\textit{s\_mp\_add})\\
|
|
2. else do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 if $\vert a \vert < \vert b \vert$ then do (\textit{mp\_cmp\_mag}) \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.1.1 $c.sign \leftarrow b.sign$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.1.2 $c \leftarrow \vert b \vert - \vert a \vert$ (\textit{s\_mp\_sub}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 else do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.1 $c.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.2 $c \leftarrow \vert a \vert - \vert b \vert$ \\
|
|
3. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_add}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_add.}
|
|
This algorithm performs the signed addition of two mp\_int variables. There is no reference algorithm to draw upon from
|
|
either \cite{TAOCPV2} or \cite{HAC} since they both only provide unsigned operations. The algorithm is fairly
|
|
straightforward but restricted since subtraction can only produce positive results.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Sign of $a$} & \textbf{Sign of $b$} & \textbf{$\vert a \vert > \vert b \vert $} & \textbf{Unsigned Operation} & \textbf{Result Sign Flag} \\
|
|
\hline $+$ & $+$ & Yes & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $+$ & $+$ & No & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $-$ & Yes & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $-$ & No & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline &&&&\\
|
|
|
|
\hline $+$ & $-$ & No & $c = b - a$ & $b.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $+$ & No & $c = b - a$ & $b.sign$ \\
|
|
|
|
\hline &&&&\\
|
|
|
|
\hline $+$ & $-$ & Yes & $c = a - b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $+$ & Yes & $c = a - b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Addition Guide Chart}
|
|
\label{fig:AddChart}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Figure~\ref{fig:AddChart} lists all of the eight possible input combinations and is sorted to show that only three
|
|
specific cases need to be handled. The return code of the unsigned operations at step 1.2, 2.1.2 and 2.2.2 are
|
|
forwarded to step three to check for errors. This simplifies the description of the algorithm considerably and best
|
|
follows how the implementation actually was achieved.
|
|
|
|
Also note how the \textbf{sign} is set before the unsigned addition or subtraction is performed. Recall from the descriptions of algorithms
|
|
s\_mp\_add and s\_mp\_sub that the mp\_clamp function is used at the end to trim excess digits. The mp\_clamp algorithm will set the \textbf{sign}
|
|
to \textbf{MP\_ZPOS} when the \textbf{used} digit count reaches zero.
|
|
|
|
For example, consider performing $-a + a$ with algorithm mp\_add. By the description of the algorithm the sign is set to \textbf{MP\_NEG} which would
|
|
produce a result of $-0$. However, since the sign is set first then the unsigned addition is performed the subsequent usage of algorithm mp\_clamp
|
|
within algorithm s\_mp\_add will force $-0$ to become $0$.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_add.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* high level addition (handles signs) */
|
|
018 int mp_add (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int sa, sb, res;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* get sign of both inputs */
|
|
023 sa = a->sign;
|
|
024 sb = b->sign;
|
|
025
|
|
026 /* handle two cases, not four */
|
|
027 if (sa == sb) \{
|
|
028 /* both positive or both negative */
|
|
029 /* add their magnitudes, copy the sign */
|
|
030 c->sign = sa;
|
|
031 res = s_mp_add (a, b, c);
|
|
032 \} else \{
|
|
033 /* one positive, the other negative */
|
|
034 /* subtract the one with the greater magnitude from */
|
|
035 /* the one of the lesser magnitude. The result gets */
|
|
036 /* the sign of the one with the greater magnitude. */
|
|
037 if (mp_cmp_mag (a, b) == MP_LT) \{
|
|
038 c->sign = sb;
|
|
039 res = s_mp_sub (b, a, c);
|
|
040 \} else \{
|
|
041 c->sign = sa;
|
|
042 res = s_mp_sub (a, b, c);
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044 \}
|
|
045 return res;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 #endif
|
|
049
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The source code follows the algorithm fairly closely. The most notable new source code addition is the usage of the $res$ integer variable which
|
|
is used to pass result of the unsigned operations forward. Unlike in the algorithm, the variable $res$ is merely returned as is without
|
|
explicitly checking it and returning the constant \textbf{MP\_OKAY}. The observation is this algorithm will succeed or fail only if the lower
|
|
level functions do so. Returning their return code is sufficient.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{High Level Subtraction}
|
|
The high level signed subtraction algorithm is essentially the same as the high level signed addition algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_sub}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two mp\_ints $a$ and $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The signed subtraction $c = a - b$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. if $a.sign \ne b.sign$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $c.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 $c \leftarrow \vert a \vert + \vert b \vert$ (\textit{s\_mp\_add}) \\
|
|
2. else do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 if $\vert a \vert \ge \vert b \vert$ then do (\textit{mp\_cmp\_mag}) \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.1.1 $c.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.1.2 $c \leftarrow \vert a \vert - \vert b \vert$ (\textit{s\_mp\_sub}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 else do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.1 $c.sign \leftarrow \left \lbrace \begin{array}{ll}
|
|
MP\_ZPOS & \mbox{if }a.sign = MP\_NEG \\
|
|
MP\_NEG & \mbox{otherwise} \\
|
|
\end{array} \right .$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.2 $c \leftarrow \vert b \vert - \vert a \vert$ \\
|
|
3. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_sub}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_sub.}
|
|
This algorithm performs the signed subtraction of two inputs. Similar to algorithm mp\_add there is no reference in either \cite{TAOCPV2} or
|
|
\cite{HAC}. Also this algorithm is restricted by algorithm s\_mp\_sub. Chart \ref{fig:SubChart} lists the eight possible inputs and
|
|
the operations required.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Sign of $a$} & \textbf{Sign of $b$} & \textbf{$\vert a \vert \ge \vert b \vert $} & \textbf{Unsigned Operation} & \textbf{Result Sign Flag} \\
|
|
\hline $+$ & $-$ & Yes & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $+$ & $-$ & No & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $+$ & Yes & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $+$ & No & $c = a + b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline &&&& \\
|
|
\hline $+$ & $+$ & Yes & $c = a - b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $-$ & Yes & $c = a - b$ & $a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline &&&& \\
|
|
\hline $+$ & $+$ & No & $c = b - a$ & $\mbox{opposite of }a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline $-$ & $-$ & No & $c = b - a$ & $\mbox{opposite of }a.sign$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Subtraction Guide Chart}
|
|
\label{fig:SubChart}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Similar to the case of algorithm mp\_add the \textbf{sign} is set first before the unsigned addition or subtraction. That is to prevent the
|
|
algorithm from producing $-a - -a = -0$ as a result.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_sub.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* high level subtraction (handles signs) */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_sub (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int sa, sb, res;
|
|
022
|
|
023 sa = a->sign;
|
|
024 sb = b->sign;
|
|
025
|
|
026 if (sa != sb) \{
|
|
027 /* subtract a negative from a positive, OR */
|
|
028 /* subtract a positive from a negative. */
|
|
029 /* In either case, ADD their magnitudes, */
|
|
030 /* and use the sign of the first number. */
|
|
031 c->sign = sa;
|
|
032 res = s_mp_add (a, b, c);
|
|
033 \} else \{
|
|
034 /* subtract a positive from a positive, OR */
|
|
035 /* subtract a negative from a negative. */
|
|
036 /* First, take the difference between their */
|
|
037 /* magnitudes, then... */
|
|
038 if (mp_cmp_mag (a, b) != MP_LT) \{
|
|
039 /* Copy the sign from the first */
|
|
040 c->sign = sa;
|
|
041 /* The first has a larger or equal magnitude */
|
|
042 res = s_mp_sub (a, b, c);
|
|
043 \} else \{
|
|
044 /* The result has the *opposite* sign from */
|
|
045 /* the first number. */
|
|
046 c->sign = (sa == MP_ZPOS) ? MP_NEG : MP_ZPOS;
|
|
047 /* The second has a larger magnitude */
|
|
048 res = s_mp_sub (b, a, c);
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050 \}
|
|
051 return res;
|
|
052 \}
|
|
053
|
|
054 #endif
|
|
055
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Much like the implementation of algorithm mp\_add the variable $res$ is used to catch the return code of the unsigned addition or subtraction operations
|
|
and forward it to the end of the function. On line 38 the ``not equal to'' \textbf{MP\_LT} expression is used to emulate a
|
|
``greater than or equal to'' comparison.
|
|
|
|
\section{Bit and Digit Shifting}
|
|
It is quite common to think of a multiple precision integer as a polynomial in $x$, that is $y = f(\beta)$ where $f(x) = \sum_{i=0}^{n-1} a_i x^i$.
|
|
This notation arises within discussion of Montgomery and Diminished Radix Reduction as well as Karatsuba multiplication and squaring.
|
|
|
|
In order to facilitate operations on polynomials in $x$ as above a series of simple ``digit'' algorithms have to be established. That is to shift
|
|
the digits left or right as well to shift individual bits of the digits left and right. It is important to note that not all ``shift'' operations
|
|
are on radix-$\beta$ digits.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Multiplication by Two}
|
|
|
|
In a binary system where the radix is a power of two multiplication by two not only arises often in other algorithms it is a fairly efficient
|
|
operation to perform. A single precision logical shift left is sufficient to multiply a single digit by two.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_mul\_2}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. One mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $b = 2a$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b.alloc < a.used + 1$ then grow $b$ to hold $a.used + 1$ digits. (\textit{mp\_grow}) \\
|
|
2. $oldused \leftarrow b.used$ \\
|
|
3. $b.used \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
4. $r \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
5. for $n$ from 0 to $a.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $rr \leftarrow a_n >> (lg(\beta) - 1)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $b_n \leftarrow (a_n << 1) + r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 $r \leftarrow rr$ \\
|
|
6. If $r \ne 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $b_{n + 1} \leftarrow r$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 $b.used \leftarrow b.used + 1$ \\
|
|
7. If $b.used < oldused - 1$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 for $n$ from $b.used$ to $oldused - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.1.1 $b_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
8. $b.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
9. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}).\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_mul\_2}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_mul\_2.}
|
|
This algorithm will quickly multiply a mp\_int by two provided $\beta$ is a power of two. Neither \cite{TAOCPV2} nor \cite{HAC} describe such
|
|
an algorithm despite the fact it arises often in other algorithms. The algorithm is setup much like the lower level algorithm s\_mp\_add since
|
|
it is for all intents and purposes equivalent to the operation $b = \vert a \vert + \vert a \vert$.
|
|
|
|
Step 1 and 2 grow the input as required to accomodate the maximum number of \textbf{used} digits in the result. The initial \textbf{used} count
|
|
is set to $a.used$ at step 4. Only if there is a final carry will the \textbf{used} count require adjustment.
|
|
|
|
Step 6 is an optimization implementation of the addition loop for this specific case. That is since the two values being added together
|
|
are the same there is no need to perform two reads from the digits of $a$. Step 6.1 performs a single precision shift on the current digit $a_n$ to
|
|
obtain what will be the carry for the next iteration. Step 6.2 calculates the $n$'th digit of the result as single precision shift of $a_n$ plus
|
|
the previous carry. Recall from section 4.1 that $a_n << 1$ is equivalent to $a_n \cdot 2$. An iteration of the addition loop is finished with
|
|
forwarding the carry to the next iteration.
|
|
|
|
Step 7 takes care of any final carry by setting the $a.used$'th digit of the result to the carry and augmenting the \textbf{used} count of $b$.
|
|
Step 8 clears any leading digits of $b$ in case it originally had a larger magnitude than $a$.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_mul\_2.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* b = a*2 */
|
|
018 int mp_mul_2(mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int x, res, oldused;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* grow to accomodate result */
|
|
023 if (b->alloc < a->used + 1) \{
|
|
024 if ((res = mp_grow (b, a->used + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
025 return res;
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027 \}
|
|
028
|
|
029 oldused = b->used;
|
|
030 b->used = a->used;
|
|
031
|
|
032 \{
|
|
033 register mp_digit r, rr, *tmpa, *tmpb;
|
|
034
|
|
035 /* alias for source */
|
|
036 tmpa = a->dp;
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* alias for dest */
|
|
039 tmpb = b->dp;
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* carry */
|
|
042 r = 0;
|
|
043 for (x = 0; x < a->used; x++) \{
|
|
044
|
|
045 /* get what will be the *next* carry bit from the
|
|
046 * MSB of the current digit
|
|
047 */
|
|
048 rr = *tmpa >> ((mp_digit)(DIGIT_BIT - 1));
|
|
049
|
|
050 /* now shift up this digit, add in the carry [from the previous] */
|
|
051 *tmpb++ = ((*tmpa++ << ((mp_digit)1)) | r) & MP_MASK;
|
|
052
|
|
053 /* copy the carry that would be from the source
|
|
054 * digit into the next iteration
|
|
055 */
|
|
056 r = rr;
|
|
057 \}
|
|
058
|
|
059 /* new leading digit? */
|
|
060 if (r != 0) \{
|
|
061 /* add a MSB which is always 1 at this point */
|
|
062 *tmpb = 1;
|
|
063 ++(b->used);
|
|
064 \}
|
|
065
|
|
066 /* now zero any excess digits on the destination
|
|
067 * that we didn't write to
|
|
068 */
|
|
069 tmpb = b->dp + b->used;
|
|
070 for (x = b->used; x < oldused; x++) \{
|
|
071 *tmpb++ = 0;
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073 \}
|
|
074 b->sign = a->sign;
|
|
075 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
076 \}
|
|
077 #endif
|
|
078
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This implementation is essentially an optimized implementation of s\_mp\_add for the case of doubling an input. The only noteworthy difference
|
|
is the use of the logical shift operator on line 51 to perform a single precision doubling.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Division by Two}
|
|
A division by two can just as easily be accomplished with a logical shift right as multiplication by two can be with a logical shift left.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_div\_2}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. One mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $b = a/2$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b.alloc < a.used$ then grow $b$ to hold $a.used$ digits. (\textit{mp\_grow}) \\
|
|
2. If the reallocation failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
3. $oldused \leftarrow b.used$ \\
|
|
4. $b.used \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
5. $r \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
6. for $n$ from $b.used - 1$ to $0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $rr \leftarrow a_n \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$\\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 $b_n \leftarrow (a_n >> 1) + (r << (lg(\beta) - 1)) \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 $r \leftarrow rr$ \\
|
|
7. If $b.used < oldused - 1$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 for $n$ from $b.used$ to $oldused - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.1.1 $b_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
8. $b.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
9. Clamp excess digits of $b$. (\textit{mp\_clamp}) \\
|
|
10. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}).\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_div\_2}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_div\_2.}
|
|
This algorithm will divide an mp\_int by two using logical shifts to the right. Like mp\_mul\_2 it uses a modified low level addition
|
|
core as the basis of the algorithm. Unlike mp\_mul\_2 the shift operations work from the leading digit to the trailing digit. The algorithm
|
|
could be written to work from the trailing digit to the leading digit however, it would have to stop one short of $a.used - 1$ digits to prevent
|
|
reading past the end of the array of digits.
|
|
|
|
Essentially the loop at step 6 is similar to that of mp\_mul\_2 except the logical shifts go in the opposite direction and the carry is at the
|
|
least significant bit not the most significant bit.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_div\_2.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* b = a/2 */
|
|
018 int mp_div_2(mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int x, res, oldused;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* copy */
|
|
023 if (b->alloc < a->used) \{
|
|
024 if ((res = mp_grow (b, a->used)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
025 return res;
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027 \}
|
|
028
|
|
029 oldused = b->used;
|
|
030 b->used = a->used;
|
|
031 \{
|
|
032 register mp_digit r, rr, *tmpa, *tmpb;
|
|
033
|
|
034 /* source alias */
|
|
035 tmpa = a->dp + b->used - 1;
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* dest alias */
|
|
038 tmpb = b->dp + b->used - 1;
|
|
039
|
|
040 /* carry */
|
|
041 r = 0;
|
|
042 for (x = b->used - 1; x >= 0; x--) \{
|
|
043 /* get the carry for the next iteration */
|
|
044 rr = *tmpa & 1;
|
|
045
|
|
046 /* shift the current digit, add in carry and store */
|
|
047 *tmpb-- = (*tmpa-- >> 1) | (r << (DIGIT_BIT - 1));
|
|
048
|
|
049 /* forward carry to next iteration */
|
|
050 r = rr;
|
|
051 \}
|
|
052
|
|
053 /* zero excess digits */
|
|
054 tmpb = b->dp + b->used;
|
|
055 for (x = b->used; x < oldused; x++) \{
|
|
056 *tmpb++ = 0;
|
|
057 \}
|
|
058 \}
|
|
059 b->sign = a->sign;
|
|
060 mp_clamp (b);
|
|
061 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
062 \}
|
|
063 #endif
|
|
064
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\section{Polynomial Basis Operations}
|
|
Recall from section 4.3 that any integer can be represented as a polynomial in $x$ as $y = f(\beta)$. Such a representation is also known as
|
|
the polynomial basis \cite[pp. 48]{ROSE}. Given such a notation a multiplication or division by $x$ amounts to shifting whole digits a single
|
|
place. The need for such operations arises in several other higher level algorithms such as Barrett and Montgomery reduction, integer
|
|
division and Karatsuba multiplication.
|
|
|
|
Converting from an array of digits to polynomial basis is very simple. Consider the integer $y \equiv (a_2, a_1, a_0)_{\beta}$ and recall that
|
|
$y = \sum_{i=0}^{2} a_i \beta^i$. Simply replace $\beta$ with $x$ and the expression is in polynomial basis. For example, $f(x) = 8x + 9$ is the
|
|
polynomial basis representation for $89$ using radix ten. That is, $f(10) = 8(10) + 9 = 89$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Multiplication by $x$}
|
|
|
|
Given a polynomial in $x$ such as $f(x) = a_n x^n + a_{n-1} x^{n-1} + ... + a_0$ multiplying by $x$ amounts to shifting the coefficients up one
|
|
degree. In this case $f(x) \cdot x = a_n x^{n+1} + a_{n-1} x^n + ... + a_0 x$. From a scalar basis point of view multiplying by $x$ is equivalent to
|
|
multiplying by the integer $\beta$.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_lshd}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. One mp\_int $a$ and an integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a \leftarrow a \cdot \beta^b$ (equivalent to multiplication by $x^b$). \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b \le 0$ then return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
2. If $a.alloc < a.used + b$ then grow $a$ to at least $a.used + b$ digits. (\textit{mp\_grow}). \\
|
|
3. If the reallocation failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
4. $a.used \leftarrow a.used + b$ \\
|
|
5. $i \leftarrow a.used - 1$ \\
|
|
6. $j \leftarrow a.used - 1 - b$ \\
|
|
7. for $n$ from $a.used - 1$ to $b$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $a_{i} \leftarrow a_{j}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.2 $i \leftarrow i - 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.3 $j \leftarrow j - 1$ \\
|
|
8. for $n$ from 0 to $b - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $a_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
9. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_lshd}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_lshd.}
|
|
This algorithm multiplies an mp\_int by the $b$'th power of $x$. This is equivalent to multiplying by $\beta^b$. The algorithm differs
|
|
from the other algorithms presented so far as it performs the operation in place instead storing the result in a separate location. The
|
|
motivation behind this change is due to the way this function is typically used. Algorithms such as mp\_add store the result in an optionally
|
|
different third mp\_int because the original inputs are often still required. Algorithm mp\_lshd (\textit{and similarly algorithm mp\_rshd}) is
|
|
typically used on values where the original value is no longer required. The algorithm will return success immediately if
|
|
$b \le 0$ since the rest of algorithm is only valid when $b > 0$.
|
|
|
|
First the destination $a$ is grown as required to accomodate the result. The counters $i$ and $j$ are used to form a \textit{sliding window} over
|
|
the digits of $a$ of length $b$. The head of the sliding window is at $i$ (\textit{the leading digit}) and the tail at $j$ (\textit{the trailing digit}).
|
|
The loop on step 7 copies the digit from the tail to the head. In each iteration the window is moved down one digit. The last loop on
|
|
step 8 sets the lower $b$ digits to zero.
|
|
|
|
\newpage
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\includegraphics{pics/sliding_window.ps}
|
|
\caption{Sliding Window Movement}
|
|
\label{pic:sliding_window}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_lshd.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* shift left a certain amount of digits */
|
|
018 int mp_lshd (mp_int * a, int b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int x, res;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* if its less than zero return */
|
|
023 if (b <= 0) \{
|
|
024 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* grow to fit the new digits */
|
|
028 if (a->alloc < a->used + b) \{
|
|
029 if ((res = mp_grow (a, a->used + b)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
030 return res;
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032 \}
|
|
033
|
|
034 \{
|
|
035 register mp_digit *top, *bottom;
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* increment the used by the shift amount then copy upwards */
|
|
038 a->used += b;
|
|
039
|
|
040 /* top */
|
|
041 top = a->dp + a->used - 1;
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* base */
|
|
044 bottom = a->dp + a->used - 1 - b;
|
|
045
|
|
046 /* much like mp_rshd this is implemented using a sliding window
|
|
047 * except the window goes the otherway around. Copying from
|
|
048 * the bottom to the top. see bn_mp_rshd.c for more info.
|
|
049 */
|
|
050 for (x = a->used - 1; x >= b; x--) \{
|
|
051 *top-- = *bottom--;
|
|
052 \}
|
|
053
|
|
054 /* zero the lower digits */
|
|
055 top = a->dp;
|
|
056 for (x = 0; x < b; x++) \{
|
|
057 *top++ = 0;
|
|
058 \}
|
|
059 \}
|
|
060 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
061 \}
|
|
062 #endif
|
|
063
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The if statement (line 23) ensures that the $b$ variable is greater than zero since we do not interpret negative
|
|
shift counts properly. The \textbf{used} count is incremented by $b$ before the copy loop begins. This elminates
|
|
the need for an additional variable in the for loop. The variable $top$ (line 41) is an alias
|
|
for the leading digit while $bottom$ (line 44) is an alias for the trailing edge. The aliases form a
|
|
window of exactly $b$ digits over the input.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Division by $x$}
|
|
|
|
Division by powers of $x$ is easily achieved by shifting the digits right and removing any that will end up to the right of the zero'th digit.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_rshd}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. One mp\_int $a$ and an integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a \leftarrow a / \beta^b$ (Divide by $x^b$). \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b \le 0$ then return. \\
|
|
2. If $a.used \le b$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 Zero $a$. (\textit{mp\_zero}). \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 Return. \\
|
|
3. $i \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
4. $j \leftarrow b$ \\
|
|
5. for $n$ from 0 to $a.used - b - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $a_i \leftarrow a_j$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $i \leftarrow i + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 $j \leftarrow j + 1$ \\
|
|
6. for $n$ from $a.used - b$ to $a.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $a_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
7. $a.used \leftarrow a.used - b$ \\
|
|
8. Return. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_rshd}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_rshd.}
|
|
This algorithm divides the input in place by the $b$'th power of $x$. It is analogous to dividing by a $\beta^b$ but much quicker since
|
|
it does not require single precision division. This algorithm does not actually return an error code as it cannot fail.
|
|
|
|
If the input $b$ is less than one the algorithm quickly returns without performing any work. If the \textbf{used} count is less than or equal
|
|
to the shift count $b$ then it will simply zero the input and return.
|
|
|
|
After the trivial cases of inputs have been handled the sliding window is setup. Much like the case of algorithm mp\_lshd a sliding window that
|
|
is $b$ digits wide is used to copy the digits. Unlike mp\_lshd the window slides in the opposite direction from the trailing to the leading digit.
|
|
Also the digits are copied from the leading to the trailing edge.
|
|
|
|
Once the window copy is complete the upper digits must be zeroed and the \textbf{used} count decremented.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_rshd.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* shift right a certain amount of digits */
|
|
018 void mp_rshd (mp_int * a, int b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int x;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* if b <= 0 then ignore it */
|
|
023 if (b <= 0) \{
|
|
024 return;
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* if b > used then simply zero it and return */
|
|
028 if (a->used <= b) \{
|
|
029 mp_zero (a);
|
|
030 return;
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032
|
|
033 \{
|
|
034 register mp_digit *bottom, *top;
|
|
035
|
|
036 /* shift the digits down */
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* bottom */
|
|
039 bottom = a->dp;
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* top [offset into digits] */
|
|
042 top = a->dp + b;
|
|
043
|
|
044 /* this is implemented as a sliding window where
|
|
045 * the window is b-digits long and digits from
|
|
046 * the top of the window are copied to the bottom
|
|
047 *
|
|
048 * e.g.
|
|
049
|
|
050 b-2 | b-1 | b0 | b1 | b2 | ... | bb | ---->
|
|
051 /\symbol{92} | ---->
|
|
052 \symbol{92}-------------------/ ---->
|
|
053 */
|
|
054 for (x = 0; x < (a->used - b); x++) \{
|
|
055 *bottom++ = *top++;
|
|
056 \}
|
|
057
|
|
058 /* zero the top digits */
|
|
059 for (; x < a->used; x++) \{
|
|
060 *bottom++ = 0;
|
|
061 \}
|
|
062 \}
|
|
063
|
|
064 /* remove excess digits */
|
|
065 a->used -= b;
|
|
066 \}
|
|
067 #endif
|
|
068
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The only noteworthy element of this routine is the lack of a return type since it cannot fail. Like mp\_lshd() we
|
|
form a sliding window except we copy in the other direction. After the window (line 59) we then zero
|
|
the upper digits of the input to make sure the result is correct.
|
|
|
|
\section{Powers of Two}
|
|
|
|
Now that algorithms for moving single bits as well as whole digits exist algorithms for moving the ``in between'' distances are required. For
|
|
example, to quickly multiply by $2^k$ for any $k$ without using a full multiplier algorithm would prove useful. Instead of performing single
|
|
shifts $k$ times to achieve a multiplication by $2^{\pm k}$ a mixture of whole digit shifting and partial digit shifting is employed.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Multiplication by Power of Two}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_mul\_2d}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. One mp\_int $a$ and an integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow a \cdot 2^b$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $c \leftarrow a$. (\textit{mp\_copy}) \\
|
|
2. If $c.alloc < c.used + \lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor + 2$ then grow $c$ accordingly. \\
|
|
3. If the reallocation failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
4. If $b \ge lg(\beta)$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $c \leftarrow c \cdot \beta^{\lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor}$ (\textit{mp\_lshd}). \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.2 If step 4.1 failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
5. $d \leftarrow b \mbox{ (mod }lg(\beta)\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
6. If $d \ne 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $mask \leftarrow 2^d$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 $r \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 for $n$ from $0$ to $c.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.3.1 $rr \leftarrow c_n >> (lg(\beta) - d) \mbox{ (mod }mask\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.3.2 $c_n \leftarrow (c_n << d) + r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.3.3 $r \leftarrow rr$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.4 If $r > 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.4.1 $c_{c.used} \leftarrow r$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.4.2 $c.used \leftarrow c.used + 1$ \\
|
|
7. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_mul\_2d}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_mul\_2d.}
|
|
This algorithm multiplies $a$ by $2^b$ and stores the result in $c$. The algorithm uses algorithm mp\_lshd and a derivative of algorithm mp\_mul\_2 to
|
|
quickly compute the product.
|
|
|
|
First the algorithm will multiply $a$ by $x^{\lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor}$ which will ensure that the remainder multiplicand is less than
|
|
$\beta$. For example, if $b = 37$ and $\beta = 2^{28}$ then this step will multiply by $x$ leaving a multiplication by $2^{37 - 28} = 2^{9}$
|
|
left.
|
|
|
|
After the digits have been shifted appropriately at most $lg(\beta) - 1$ shifts are left to perform. Step 5 calculates the number of remaining shifts
|
|
required. If it is non-zero a modified shift loop is used to calculate the remaining product.
|
|
Essentially the loop is a generic version of algorithm mp\_mul\_2 designed to handle any shift count in the range $1 \le x < lg(\beta)$. The $mask$
|
|
variable is used to extract the upper $d$ bits to form the carry for the next iteration.
|
|
|
|
This algorithm is loosely measured as a $O(2n)$ algorithm which means that if the input is $n$-digits that it takes $2n$ ``time'' to
|
|
complete. It is possible to optimize this algorithm down to a $O(n)$ algorithm at a cost of making the algorithm slightly harder to follow.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_mul\_2d.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* shift left by a certain bit count */
|
|
018 int mp_mul_2d (mp_int * a, int b, mp_int * c)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 mp_digit d;
|
|
021 int res;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* copy */
|
|
024 if (a != c) \{
|
|
025 if ((res = mp_copy (a, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
026 return res;
|
|
027 \}
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029
|
|
030 if (c->alloc < (int)(c->used + b/DIGIT_BIT + 1)) \{
|
|
031 if ((res = mp_grow (c, c->used + b / DIGIT_BIT + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
032 return res;
|
|
033 \}
|
|
034 \}
|
|
035
|
|
036 /* shift by as many digits in the bit count */
|
|
037 if (b >= (int)DIGIT_BIT) \{
|
|
038 if ((res = mp_lshd (c, b / DIGIT_BIT)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
039 return res;
|
|
040 \}
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* shift any bit count < DIGIT_BIT */
|
|
044 d = (mp_digit) (b % DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
045 if (d != 0) \{
|
|
046 register mp_digit *tmpc, shift, mask, r, rr;
|
|
047 register int x;
|
|
048
|
|
049 /* bitmask for carries */
|
|
050 mask = (((mp_digit)1) << d) - 1;
|
|
051
|
|
052 /* shift for msbs */
|
|
053 shift = DIGIT_BIT - d;
|
|
054
|
|
055 /* alias */
|
|
056 tmpc = c->dp;
|
|
057
|
|
058 /* carry */
|
|
059 r = 0;
|
|
060 for (x = 0; x < c->used; x++) \{
|
|
061 /* get the higher bits of the current word */
|
|
062 rr = (*tmpc >> shift) & mask;
|
|
063
|
|
064 /* shift the current word and OR in the carry */
|
|
065 *tmpc = ((*tmpc << d) | r) & MP_MASK;
|
|
066 ++tmpc;
|
|
067
|
|
068 /* set the carry to the carry bits of the current word */
|
|
069 r = rr;
|
|
070 \}
|
|
071
|
|
072 /* set final carry */
|
|
073 if (r != 0) \{
|
|
074 c->dp[(c->used)++] = r;
|
|
075 \}
|
|
076 \}
|
|
077 mp_clamp (c);
|
|
078 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
079 \}
|
|
080 #endif
|
|
081
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The shifting is performed in--place which means the first step (line 24) is to copy the input to the
|
|
destination. We avoid calling mp\_copy() by making sure the mp\_ints are different. The destination then
|
|
has to be grown (line 31) to accomodate the result.
|
|
|
|
If the shift count $b$ is larger than $lg(\beta)$ then a call to mp\_lshd() is used to handle all of the multiples
|
|
of $lg(\beta)$. Leaving only a remaining shift of $lg(\beta) - 1$ or fewer bits left. Inside the actual shift
|
|
loop (lines 45 to 76) we make use of pre--computed values $shift$ and $mask$. These are used to
|
|
extract the carry bit(s) to pass into the next iteration of the loop. The $r$ and $rr$ variables form a
|
|
chain between consecutive iterations to propagate the carry.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Division by Power of Two}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_div\_2d}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. One mp\_int $a$ and an integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow \lfloor a / 2^b \rfloor, d \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }2^b\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b \le 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $c \leftarrow a$ (\textit{mp\_copy}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 $d \leftarrow 0$ (\textit{mp\_zero}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.3 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
2. $c \leftarrow a$ \\
|
|
3. $d \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }2^b\mbox{)}$ (\textit{mp\_mod\_2d}) \\
|
|
4. If $b \ge lg(\beta)$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $c \leftarrow \lfloor c/\beta^{\lfloor b/lg(\beta) \rfloor} \rfloor$ (\textit{mp\_rshd}). \\
|
|
5. $k \leftarrow b \mbox{ (mod }lg(\beta)\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
6. If $k \ne 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $mask \leftarrow 2^k$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 $r \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 for $n$ from $c.used - 1$ to $0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.3.1 $rr \leftarrow c_n \mbox{ (mod }mask\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.3.2 $c_n \leftarrow (c_n >> k) + (r << (lg(\beta) - k))$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.3.3 $r \leftarrow rr$ \\
|
|
7. Clamp excess digits of $c$. (\textit{mp\_clamp}) \\
|
|
8. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_div\_2d}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_div\_2d.}
|
|
This algorithm will divide an input $a$ by $2^b$ and produce the quotient and remainder. The algorithm is designed much like algorithm
|
|
mp\_mul\_2d by first using whole digit shifts then single precision shifts. This algorithm will also produce the remainder of the division
|
|
by using algorithm mp\_mod\_2d.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_div\_2d.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* shift right by a certain bit count (store quotient in c, optional remaind
|
|
er in d) */
|
|
018 int mp_div_2d (mp_int * a, int b, mp_int * c, mp_int * d)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 mp_digit D, r, rr;
|
|
021 int x, res;
|
|
022 mp_int t;
|
|
023
|
|
024
|
|
025 /* if the shift count is <= 0 then we do no work */
|
|
026 if (b <= 0) \{
|
|
027 res = mp_copy (a, c);
|
|
028 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
029 mp_zero (d);
|
|
030 \}
|
|
031 return res;
|
|
032 \}
|
|
033
|
|
034 if ((res = mp_init (&t)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
035 return res;
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* get the remainder */
|
|
039 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
040 if ((res = mp_mod_2d (a, b, &t)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
041 mp_clear (&t);
|
|
042 return res;
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044 \}
|
|
045
|
|
046 /* copy */
|
|
047 if ((res = mp_copy (a, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
048 mp_clear (&t);
|
|
049 return res;
|
|
050 \}
|
|
051
|
|
052 /* shift by as many digits in the bit count */
|
|
053 if (b >= (int)DIGIT_BIT) \{
|
|
054 mp_rshd (c, b / DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
055 \}
|
|
056
|
|
057 /* shift any bit count < DIGIT_BIT */
|
|
058 D = (mp_digit) (b % DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
059 if (D != 0) \{
|
|
060 register mp_digit *tmpc, mask, shift;
|
|
061
|
|
062 /* mask */
|
|
063 mask = (((mp_digit)1) << D) - 1;
|
|
064
|
|
065 /* shift for lsb */
|
|
066 shift = DIGIT_BIT - D;
|
|
067
|
|
068 /* alias */
|
|
069 tmpc = c->dp + (c->used - 1);
|
|
070
|
|
071 /* carry */
|
|
072 r = 0;
|
|
073 for (x = c->used - 1; x >= 0; x--) \{
|
|
074 /* get the lower bits of this word in a temp */
|
|
075 rr = *tmpc & mask;
|
|
076
|
|
077 /* shift the current word and mix in the carry bits from the previous
|
|
word */
|
|
078 *tmpc = (*tmpc >> D) | (r << shift);
|
|
079 --tmpc;
|
|
080
|
|
081 /* set the carry to the carry bits of the current word found above */
|
|
082 r = rr;
|
|
083 \}
|
|
084 \}
|
|
085 mp_clamp (c);
|
|
086 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
087 mp_exch (&t, d);
|
|
088 \}
|
|
089 mp_clear (&t);
|
|
090 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
091 \}
|
|
092 #endif
|
|
093
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The implementation of algorithm mp\_div\_2d is slightly different than the algorithm specifies. The remainder $d$ may be optionally
|
|
ignored by passing \textbf{NULL} as the pointer to the mp\_int variable. The temporary mp\_int variable $t$ is used to hold the
|
|
result of the remainder operation until the end. This allows $d$ and $a$ to represent the same mp\_int without modifying $a$ before
|
|
the quotient is obtained.
|
|
|
|
The remainder of the source code is essentially the same as the source code for mp\_mul\_2d. The only significant difference is
|
|
the direction of the shifts.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Remainder of Division by Power of Two}
|
|
|
|
The last algorithm in the series of polynomial basis power of two algorithms is calculating the remainder of division by $2^b$. This
|
|
algorithm benefits from the fact that in twos complement arithmetic $a \mbox{ (mod }2^b\mbox{)}$ is the same as $a$ AND $2^b - 1$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_mod\_2d}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. One mp\_int $a$ and an integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }2^b\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b \le 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $c \leftarrow 0$ (\textit{mp\_zero}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
2. If $b > a.used \cdot lg(\beta)$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $c \leftarrow a$ (\textit{mp\_copy}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 Return the result of step 2.1. \\
|
|
3. $c \leftarrow a$ \\
|
|
4. If step 3 failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
5. for $n$ from $\lceil b / lg(\beta) \rceil$ to $c.used$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $c_n \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
6. $k \leftarrow b \mbox{ (mod }lg(\beta)\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
7. $c_{\lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor} \leftarrow c_{\lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor} \mbox{ (mod }2^{k}\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
8. Clamp excess digits of $c$. (\textit{mp\_clamp}) \\
|
|
9. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_mod\_2d}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_mod\_2d.}
|
|
This algorithm will quickly calculate the value of $a \mbox{ (mod }2^b\mbox{)}$. First if $b$ is less than or equal to zero the
|
|
result is set to zero. If $b$ is greater than the number of bits in $a$ then it simply copies $a$ to $c$ and returns. Otherwise, $a$
|
|
is copied to $b$, leading digits are removed and the remaining leading digit is trimed to the exact bit count.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_mod\_2d.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* calc a value mod 2**b */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_mod_2d (mp_int * a, int b, mp_int * c)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int x, res;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* if b is <= 0 then zero the int */
|
|
024 if (b <= 0) \{
|
|
025 mp_zero (c);
|
|
026 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
027 \}
|
|
028
|
|
029 /* if the modulus is larger than the value than return */
|
|
030 if (b >= (int) (a->used * DIGIT_BIT)) \{
|
|
031 res = mp_copy (a, c);
|
|
032 return res;
|
|
033 \}
|
|
034
|
|
035 /* copy */
|
|
036 if ((res = mp_copy (a, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
037 return res;
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039
|
|
040 /* zero digits above the last digit of the modulus */
|
|
041 for (x = (b / DIGIT_BIT) + ((b % DIGIT_BIT) == 0 ? 0 : 1); x < c->used; x+
|
|
+) \{
|
|
042 c->dp[x] = 0;
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044 /* clear the digit that is not completely outside/inside the modulus */
|
|
045 c->dp[b / DIGIT_BIT] &=
|
|
046 (mp_digit) ((((mp_digit) 1) << (((mp_digit) b) % DIGIT_BIT)) - ((mp_digi
|
|
t) 1));
|
|
047 mp_clamp (c);
|
|
048 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050 #endif
|
|
051
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
We first avoid cases of $b \le 0$ by simply mp\_zero()'ing the destination in such cases. Next if $2^b$ is larger
|
|
than the input we just mp\_copy() the input and return right away. After this point we know we must actually
|
|
perform some work to produce the remainder.
|
|
|
|
Recalling that reducing modulo $2^k$ and a binary ``and'' with $2^k - 1$ are numerically equivalent we can quickly reduce
|
|
the number. First we zero any digits above the last digit in $2^b$ (line 41). Next we reduce the
|
|
leading digit of both (line 45) and then mp\_clamp().
|
|
|
|
\section*{Exercises}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{cl}
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ] $ & Devise an algorithm that performs $a \cdot 2^b$ for generic values of $b$ \\
|
|
& in $O(n)$ time. \\
|
|
&\\
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ] $ & Devise an efficient algorithm to multiply by small low hamming \\
|
|
& weight values such as $3$, $5$ and $9$. Extend it to handle all values \\
|
|
& upto $64$ with a hamming weight less than three. \\
|
|
&\\
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ] $ & Modify the preceding algorithm to handle values of the form \\
|
|
& $2^k - 1$ as well. \\
|
|
&\\
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ] $ & Using only algorithms mp\_mul\_2, mp\_div\_2 and mp\_add create an \\
|
|
& algorithm to multiply two integers in roughly $O(2n^2)$ time for \\
|
|
& any $n$-bit input. Note that the time of addition is ignored in the \\
|
|
& calculation. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 5 \right ] $ & Improve the previous algorithm to have a working time of at most \\
|
|
& $O \left (2^{(k-1)}n + \left ({2n^2 \over k} \right ) \right )$ for an appropriate choice of $k$. Again ignore \\
|
|
& the cost of addition. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ] $ & Devise a chart to find optimal values of $k$ for the previous problem \\
|
|
& for $n = 64 \ldots 1024$ in steps of $64$. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ] $ & Using only algorithms mp\_abs and mp\_sub devise another method for \\
|
|
& calculating the result of a signed comparison. \\
|
|
&
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Multiplication and Squaring}
|
|
\section{The Multipliers}
|
|
For most number theoretic problems including certain public key cryptographic algorithms, the ``multipliers'' form the most important subset of
|
|
algorithms of any multiple precision integer package. The set of multiplier algorithms include integer multiplication, squaring and modular reduction
|
|
where in each of the algorithms single precision multiplication is the dominant operation performed. This chapter will discuss integer multiplication
|
|
and squaring, leaving modular reductions for the subsequent chapter.
|
|
|
|
The importance of the multiplier algorithms is for the most part driven by the fact that certain popular public key algorithms are based on modular
|
|
exponentiation, that is computing $d \equiv a^b \mbox{ (mod }c\mbox{)}$ for some arbitrary choice of $a$, $b$, $c$ and $d$. During a modular
|
|
exponentiation the majority\footnote{Roughly speaking a modular exponentiation will spend about 40\% of the time performing modular reductions,
|
|
35\% of the time performing squaring and 25\% of the time performing multiplications.} of the processor time is spent performing single precision
|
|
multiplications.
|
|
|
|
For centuries general purpose multiplication has required a lengthly $O(n^2)$ process, whereby each digit of one multiplicand has to be multiplied
|
|
against every digit of the other multiplicand. Traditional long-hand multiplication is based on this process; while the techniques can differ the
|
|
overall algorithm used is essentially the same. Only ``recently'' have faster algorithms been studied. First Karatsuba multiplication was discovered in
|
|
1962. This algorithm can multiply two numbers with considerably fewer single precision multiplications when compared to the long-hand approach.
|
|
This technique led to the discovery of polynomial basis algorithms (\textit{good reference?}) and subquently Fourier Transform based solutions.
|
|
|
|
\section{Multiplication}
|
|
\subsection{The Baseline Multiplication}
|
|
\label{sec:basemult}
|
|
\index{baseline multiplication}
|
|
Computing the product of two integers in software can be achieved using a trivial adaptation of the standard $O(n^2)$ long-hand multiplication
|
|
algorithm that school children are taught. The algorithm is considered an $O(n^2)$ algorithm since for two $n$-digit inputs $n^2$ single precision
|
|
multiplications are required. More specifically for a $m$ and $n$ digit input $m \cdot n$ single precision multiplications are required. To
|
|
simplify most discussions, it will be assumed that the inputs have comparable number of digits.
|
|
|
|
The ``baseline multiplication'' algorithm is designed to act as the ``catch-all'' algorithm, only to be used when the faster algorithms cannot be
|
|
used. This algorithm does not use any particularly interesting optimizations and should ideally be avoided if possible. One important
|
|
facet of this algorithm, is that it has been modified to only produce a certain amount of output digits as resolution. The importance of this
|
|
modification will become evident during the discussion of Barrett modular reduction. Recall that for a $n$ and $m$ digit input the product
|
|
will be at most $n + m$ digits. Therefore, this algorithm can be reduced to a full multiplier by having it produce $n + m$ digits of the product.
|
|
|
|
Recall from sub-section 4.2.2 the definition of $\gamma$ as the number of bits in the type \textbf{mp\_digit}. We shall now extend the variable set to
|
|
include $\alpha$ which shall represent the number of bits in the type \textbf{mp\_word}. This implies that $2^{\alpha} > 2 \cdot \beta^2$. The
|
|
constant $\delta = 2^{\alpha - 2lg(\beta)}$ will represent the maximal weight of any column in a product (\textit{see sub-section 5.2.2 for more information}).
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{s\_mp\_mul\_digs}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$, mp\_int $b$ and an integer $digs$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow \vert a \vert \cdot \vert b \vert \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{digs}\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If min$(a.used, b.used) < \delta$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 Calculate $c = \vert a \vert \cdot \vert b \vert$ by the Comba method (\textit{see algorithm~\ref{fig:COMBAMULT}}). \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 Return the result of step 1.1 \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Allocate and initialize a temporary mp\_int. \\
|
|
2. Init $t$ to be of size $digs$ \\
|
|
3. If step 2 failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
4. $t.used \leftarrow digs$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Compute the product. \\
|
|
5. for $ix$ from $0$ to $a.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $u \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $pb \leftarrow \mbox{min}(b.used, digs - ix)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 If $pb < 1$ then goto step 6. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.4 for $iy$ from $0$ to $pb - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.1 $\hat r \leftarrow t_{iy + ix} + a_{ix} \cdot b_{iy} + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.2 $t_{iy + ix} \leftarrow \hat r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.3 $u \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.5 if $ix + pb < digs$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.5.1 $t_{ix + pb} \leftarrow u$ \\
|
|
6. Clamp excess digits of $t$. \\
|
|
7. Swap $c$ with $t$ \\
|
|
8. Clear $t$ \\
|
|
9. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_digs}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_digs.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the unsigned product of two inputs $a$ and $b$, limited to an output precision of $digs$ digits. While it may seem
|
|
a bit awkward to modify the function from its simple $O(n^2)$ description, the usefulness of partial multipliers will arise in a subsequent
|
|
algorithm. The algorithm is loosely based on algorithm 14.12 from \cite[pp. 595]{HAC} and is similar to Algorithm M of Knuth \cite[pp. 268]{TAOCPV2}.
|
|
Algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_digs differs from these cited references since it can produce a variable output precision regardless of the precision of the
|
|
inputs.
|
|
|
|
The first thing this algorithm checks for is whether a Comba multiplier can be used instead. If the minimum digit count of either
|
|
input is less than $\delta$, then the Comba method may be used instead. After the Comba method is ruled out, the baseline algorithm begins. A
|
|
temporary mp\_int variable $t$ is used to hold the intermediate result of the product. This allows the algorithm to be used to
|
|
compute products when either $a = c$ or $b = c$ without overwriting the inputs.
|
|
|
|
All of step 5 is the infamous $O(n^2)$ multiplication loop slightly modified to only produce upto $digs$ digits of output. The $pb$ variable
|
|
is given the count of digits to read from $b$ inside the nested loop. If $pb \le 1$ then no more output digits can be produced and the algorithm
|
|
will exit the loop. The best way to think of the loops are as a series of $pb \times 1$ multiplications. That is, in each pass of the
|
|
innermost loop $a_{ix}$ is multiplied against $b$ and the result is added (\textit{with an appropriate shift}) to $t$.
|
|
|
|
For example, consider multiplying $576$ by $241$. That is equivalent to computing $10^0(1)(576) + 10^1(4)(576) + 10^2(2)(576)$ which is best
|
|
visualized in the following table.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|l|}
|
|
\hline && & 5 & 7 & 6 & \\
|
|
\hline $\times$&& & 2 & 4 & 1 & \\
|
|
\hline &&&&&&\\
|
|
&& & 5 & 7 & 6 & $10^0(1)(576)$ \\
|
|
&2 & 3 & 6 & 1 & 6 & $10^1(4)(576) + 10^0(1)(576)$ \\
|
|
1 & 3 & 8 & 8 & 1 & 6 & $10^2(2)(576) + 10^1(4)(576) + 10^0(1)(576)$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Long-Hand Multiplication Diagram}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Each row of the product is added to the result after being shifted to the left (\textit{multiplied by a power of the radix}) by the appropriate
|
|
count. That is in pass $ix$ of the inner loop the product is added starting at the $ix$'th digit of the reult.
|
|
|
|
Step 5.4.1 introduces the hat symbol (\textit{e.g. $\hat r$}) which represents a double precision variable. The multiplication on that step
|
|
is assumed to be a double wide output single precision multiplication. That is, two single precision variables are multiplied to produce a
|
|
double precision result. The step is somewhat optimized from a long-hand multiplication algorithm because the carry from the addition in step
|
|
5.4.1 is propagated through the nested loop. If the carry was not propagated immediately it would overflow the single precision digit
|
|
$t_{ix+iy}$ and the result would be lost.
|
|
|
|
At step 5.5 the nested loop is finished and any carry that was left over should be forwarded. The carry does not have to be added to the $ix+pb$'th
|
|
digit since that digit is assumed to be zero at this point. However, if $ix + pb \ge digs$ the carry is not set as it would make the result
|
|
exceed the precision requested.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_s\_mp\_mul\_digs.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* multiplies |a| * |b| and only computes upto digs digits of result
|
|
018 * HAC pp. 595, Algorithm 14.12 Modified so you can control how
|
|
019 * many digits of output are created.
|
|
020 */
|
|
021 int s_mp_mul_digs (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c, int digs)
|
|
022 \{
|
|
023 mp_int t;
|
|
024 int res, pa, pb, ix, iy;
|
|
025 mp_digit u;
|
|
026 mp_word r;
|
|
027 mp_digit tmpx, *tmpt, *tmpy;
|
|
028
|
|
029 /* can we use the fast multiplier? */
|
|
030 if (((digs) < MP_WARRAY) &&
|
|
031 MIN (a->used, b->used) <
|
|
032 (1 << ((CHAR_BIT * sizeof (mp_word)) - (2 * DIGIT_BIT)))) \{
|
|
033 return fast_s_mp_mul_digs (a, b, c, digs);
|
|
034 \}
|
|
035
|
|
036 if ((res = mp_init_size (&t, digs)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
037 return res;
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039 t.used = digs;
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* compute the digits of the product directly */
|
|
042 pa = a->used;
|
|
043 for (ix = 0; ix < pa; ix++) \{
|
|
044 /* set the carry to zero */
|
|
045 u = 0;
|
|
046
|
|
047 /* limit ourselves to making digs digits of output */
|
|
048 pb = MIN (b->used, digs - ix);
|
|
049
|
|
050 /* setup some aliases */
|
|
051 /* copy of the digit from a used within the nested loop */
|
|
052 tmpx = a->dp[ix];
|
|
053
|
|
054 /* an alias for the destination shifted ix places */
|
|
055 tmpt = t.dp + ix;
|
|
056
|
|
057 /* an alias for the digits of b */
|
|
058 tmpy = b->dp;
|
|
059
|
|
060 /* compute the columns of the output and propagate the carry */
|
|
061 for (iy = 0; iy < pb; iy++) \{
|
|
062 /* compute the column as a mp_word */
|
|
063 r = ((mp_word)*tmpt) +
|
|
064 ((mp_word)tmpx) * ((mp_word)*tmpy++) +
|
|
065 ((mp_word) u);
|
|
066
|
|
067 /* the new column is the lower part of the result */
|
|
068 *tmpt++ = (mp_digit) (r & ((mp_word) MP_MASK));
|
|
069
|
|
070 /* get the carry word from the result */
|
|
071 u = (mp_digit) (r >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT));
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073 /* set carry if it is placed below digs */
|
|
074 if (ix + iy < digs) \{
|
|
075 *tmpt = u;
|
|
076 \}
|
|
077 \}
|
|
078
|
|
079 mp_clamp (&t);
|
|
080 mp_exch (&t, c);
|
|
081
|
|
082 mp_clear (&t);
|
|
083 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
084 \}
|
|
085 #endif
|
|
086
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
First we determine (line 30) if the Comba method can be used first since it's faster. The conditions for
|
|
sing the Comba routine are that min$(a.used, b.used) < \delta$ and the number of digits of output is less than
|
|
\textbf{MP\_WARRAY}. This new constant is used to control the stack usage in the Comba routines. By default it is
|
|
set to $\delta$ but can be reduced when memory is at a premium.
|
|
|
|
If we cannot use the Comba method we proceed to setup the baseline routine. We allocate the the destination mp\_int
|
|
$t$ (line 36) to the exact size of the output to avoid further re--allocations. At this point we now
|
|
begin the $O(n^2)$ loop.
|
|
|
|
This implementation of multiplication has the caveat that it can be trimmed to only produce a variable number of
|
|
digits as output. In each iteration of the outer loop the $pb$ variable is set (line 48) to the maximum
|
|
number of inner loop iterations.
|
|
|
|
Inside the inner loop we calculate $\hat r$ as the mp\_word product of the two mp\_digits and the addition of the
|
|
carry from the previous iteration. A particularly important observation is that most modern optimizing
|
|
C compilers (GCC for instance) can recognize that a $N \times N \rightarrow 2N$ multiplication is all that
|
|
is required for the product. In x86 terms for example, this means using the MUL instruction.
|
|
|
|
Each digit of the product is stored in turn (line 68) and the carry propagated (line 71) to the
|
|
next iteration.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Faster Multiplication by the ``Comba'' Method}
|
|
|
|
One of the huge drawbacks of the ``baseline'' algorithms is that at the $O(n^2)$ level the carry must be
|
|
computed and propagated upwards. This makes the nested loop very sequential and hard to unroll and implement
|
|
in parallel. The ``Comba'' \cite{COMBA} method is named after little known (\textit{in cryptographic venues}) Paul G.
|
|
Comba who described a method of implementing fast multipliers that do not require nested carry fixup operations. As an
|
|
interesting aside it seems that Paul Barrett describes a similar technique in his 1986 paper \cite{BARRETT} written
|
|
five years before.
|
|
|
|
At the heart of the Comba technique is once again the long-hand algorithm. Except in this case a slight
|
|
twist is placed on how the columns of the result are produced. In the standard long-hand algorithm rows of products
|
|
are produced then added together to form the final result. In the baseline algorithm the columns are added together
|
|
after each iteration to get the result instantaneously.
|
|
|
|
In the Comba algorithm the columns of the result are produced entirely independently of each other. That is at
|
|
the $O(n^2)$ level a simple multiplication and addition step is performed. The carries of the columns are propagated
|
|
after the nested loop to reduce the amount of work requiored. Succintly the first step of the algorithm is to compute
|
|
the product vector $\vec x$ as follows.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
\vec x_n = \sum_{i+j = n} a_ib_j, \forall n \in \lbrace 0, 1, 2, \ldots, i + j \rbrace
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Where $\vec x_n$ is the $n'th$ column of the output vector. Consider the following example which computes the vector $\vec x$ for the multiplication
|
|
of $576$ and $241$.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline & & 5 & 7 & 6 & First Input\\
|
|
\hline $\times$ & & 2 & 4 & 1 & Second Input\\
|
|
\hline & & $1 \cdot 5 = 5$ & $1 \cdot 7 = 7$ & $1 \cdot 6 = 6$ & First pass \\
|
|
& $4 \cdot 5 = 20$ & $4 \cdot 7+5=33$ & $4 \cdot 6+7=31$ & 6 & Second pass \\
|
|
$2 \cdot 5 = 10$ & $2 \cdot 7 + 20 = 34$ & $2 \cdot 6+33=45$ & 31 & 6 & Third pass \\
|
|
\hline 10 & 34 & 45 & 31 & 6 & Final Result \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Comba Multiplication Diagram}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
At this point the vector $x = \left < 10, 34, 45, 31, 6 \right >$ is the result of the first step of the Comba multipler.
|
|
Now the columns must be fixed by propagating the carry upwards. The resultant vector will have one extra dimension over the input vector which is
|
|
congruent to adding a leading zero digit.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Comba Fixup}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Vector $\vec x$ of dimension $k$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. Vector $\vec x$ such that the carries have been propagated. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. for $n$ from $0$ to $k - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $\vec x_{n+1} \leftarrow \vec x_{n+1} + \lfloor \vec x_{n}/\beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 $\vec x_{n} \leftarrow \vec x_{n} \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
2. Return($\vec x$). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Comba Fixup}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
With that algorithm and $k = 5$ and $\beta = 10$ the following vector is produced $\vec x= \left < 1, 3, 8, 8, 1, 6 \right >$. In this case
|
|
$241 \cdot 576$ is in fact $138816$ and the procedure succeeded. If the algorithm is correct and as will be demonstrated shortly more
|
|
efficient than the baseline algorithm why not simply always use this algorithm?
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Column Weight.}
|
|
At the nested $O(n^2)$ level the Comba method adds the product of two single precision variables to each column of the output
|
|
independently. A serious obstacle is if the carry is lost, due to lack of precision before the algorithm has a chance to fix
|
|
the carries. For example, in the multiplication of two three-digit numbers the third column of output will be the sum of
|
|
three single precision multiplications. If the precision of the accumulator for the output digits is less then $3 \cdot (\beta - 1)^2$ then
|
|
an overflow can occur and the carry information will be lost. For any $m$ and $n$ digit inputs the maximum weight of any column is
|
|
min$(m, n)$ which is fairly obvious.
|
|
|
|
The maximum number of terms in any column of a product is known as the ``column weight'' and strictly governs when the algorithm can be used. Recall
|
|
from earlier that a double precision type has $\alpha$ bits of resolution and a single precision digit has $lg(\beta)$ bits of precision. Given these
|
|
two quantities we must not violate the following
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
k \cdot \left (\beta - 1 \right )^2 < 2^{\alpha}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Which reduces to
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
k \cdot \left ( \beta^2 - 2\beta + 1 \right ) < 2^{\alpha}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Let $\rho = lg(\beta)$ represent the number of bits in a single precision digit. By further re-arrangement of the equation the final solution is
|
|
found.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
k < {{2^{\alpha}} \over {\left (2^{2\rho} - 2^{\rho + 1} + 1 \right )}}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
The defaults for LibTomMath are $\beta = 2^{28}$ and $\alpha = 2^{64}$ which means that $k$ is bounded by $k < 257$. In this configuration
|
|
the smaller input may not have more than $256$ digits if the Comba method is to be used. This is quite satisfactory for most applications since
|
|
$256$ digits would allow for numbers in the range of $0 \le x < 2^{7168}$ which, is much larger than most public key cryptographic algorithms require.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{fast\_s\_mp\_mul\_digs}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$, mp\_int $b$ and an integer $digs$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow \vert a \vert \cdot \vert b \vert \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{digs}\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
Place an array of \textbf{MP\_WARRAY} single precision digits named $W$ on the stack. \\
|
|
1. If $c.alloc < digs$ then grow $c$ to $digs$ digits. (\textit{mp\_grow}) \\
|
|
2. If step 1 failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}).\\
|
|
\\
|
|
3. $pa \leftarrow \mbox{MIN}(digs, a.used + b.used)$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
4. $\_ \hat W \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
5. for $ix$ from 0 to $pa - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $ty \leftarrow \mbox{MIN}(b.used - 1, ix)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $tx \leftarrow ix - ty$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 $iy \leftarrow \mbox{MIN}(a.used - tx, ty + 1)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.4 for $iz$ from 0 to $iy - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.1 $\_ \hat W \leftarrow \_ \hat W + a_{tx+iy}b_{ty-iy}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.5 $W_{ix} \leftarrow \_ \hat W (\mbox{mod }\beta)$\\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.6 $\_ \hat W \leftarrow \lfloor \_ \hat W / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
6. $oldused \leftarrow c.used$ \\
|
|
7. $c.used \leftarrow digs$ \\
|
|
8. for $ix$ from $0$ to $pa$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $c_{ix} \leftarrow W_{ix}$ \\
|
|
9. for $ix$ from $pa + 1$ to $oldused - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 $c_{ix} \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
10. Clamp $c$. \\
|
|
11. Return MP\_OKAY. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm fast\_s\_mp\_mul\_digs}
|
|
\label{fig:COMBAMULT}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm fast\_s\_mp\_mul\_digs.}
|
|
This algorithm performs the unsigned multiplication of $a$ and $b$ using the Comba method limited to $digs$ digits of precision.
|
|
|
|
The outer loop of this algorithm is more complicated than that of the baseline multiplier. This is because on the inside of the
|
|
loop we want to produce one column per pass. This allows the accumulator $\_ \hat W$ to be placed in CPU registers and
|
|
reduce the memory bandwidth to two \textbf{mp\_digit} reads per iteration.
|
|
|
|
The $ty$ variable is set to the minimum count of $ix$ or the number of digits in $b$. That way if $a$ has more digits than
|
|
$b$ this will be limited to $b.used - 1$. The $tx$ variable is set to the to the distance past $b.used$ the variable
|
|
$ix$ is. This is used for the immediately subsequent statement where we find $iy$.
|
|
|
|
The variable $iy$ is the minimum digits we can read from either $a$ or $b$ before running out. Computing one column at a time
|
|
means we have to scan one integer upwards and the other downwards. $a$ starts at $tx$ and $b$ starts at $ty$. In each
|
|
pass we are producing the $ix$'th output column and we note that $tx + ty = ix$. As we move $tx$ upwards we have to
|
|
move $ty$ downards so the equality remains valid. The $iy$ variable is the number of iterations until
|
|
$tx \ge a.used$ or $ty < 0$ occurs.
|
|
|
|
After every inner pass we store the lower half of the accumulator into $W_{ix}$ and then propagate the carry of the accumulator
|
|
into the next round by dividing $\_ \hat W$ by $\beta$.
|
|
|
|
To measure the benefits of the Comba method over the baseline method consider the number of operations that are required. If the
|
|
cost in terms of time of a multiply and addition is $p$ and the cost of a carry propagation is $q$ then a baseline multiplication would require
|
|
$O \left ((p + q)n^2 \right )$ time to multiply two $n$-digit numbers. The Comba method requires only $O(pn^2 + qn)$ time, however in practice,
|
|
the speed increase is actually much more. With $O(n)$ space the algorithm can be reduced to $O(pn + qn)$ time by implementing the $n$ multiply
|
|
and addition operations in the nested loop in parallel.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_fast\_s\_mp\_mul\_digs.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* Fast (comba) multiplier
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * This is the fast column-array [comba] multiplier. It is
|
|
020 * designed to compute the columns of the product first
|
|
021 * then handle the carries afterwards. This has the effect
|
|
022 * of making the nested loops that compute the columns very
|
|
023 * simple and schedulable on super-scalar processors.
|
|
024 *
|
|
025 * This has been modified to produce a variable number of
|
|
026 * digits of output so if say only a half-product is required
|
|
027 * you don't have to compute the upper half (a feature
|
|
028 * required for fast Barrett reduction).
|
|
029 *
|
|
030 * Based on Algorithm 14.12 on pp.595 of HAC.
|
|
031 *
|
|
032 */
|
|
033 int fast_s_mp_mul_digs (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c, int digs)
|
|
034 \{
|
|
035 int olduse, res, pa, ix, iz;
|
|
036 mp_digit W[MP_WARRAY];
|
|
037 register mp_word _W;
|
|
038
|
|
039 /* grow the destination as required */
|
|
040 if (c->alloc < digs) \{
|
|
041 if ((res = mp_grow (c, digs)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
042 return res;
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044 \}
|
|
045
|
|
046 /* number of output digits to produce */
|
|
047 pa = MIN(digs, a->used + b->used);
|
|
048
|
|
049 /* clear the carry */
|
|
050 _W = 0;
|
|
051 for (ix = 0; ix < pa; ix++) \{
|
|
052 int tx, ty;
|
|
053 int iy;
|
|
054 mp_digit *tmpx, *tmpy;
|
|
055
|
|
056 /* get offsets into the two bignums */
|
|
057 ty = MIN(b->used-1, ix);
|
|
058 tx = ix - ty;
|
|
059
|
|
060 /* setup temp aliases */
|
|
061 tmpx = a->dp + tx;
|
|
062 tmpy = b->dp + ty;
|
|
063
|
|
064 /* this is the number of times the loop will iterrate, essentially
|
|
065 while (tx++ < a->used && ty-- >= 0) \{ ... \}
|
|
066 */
|
|
067 iy = MIN(a->used-tx, ty+1);
|
|
068
|
|
069 /* execute loop */
|
|
070 for (iz = 0; iz < iy; ++iz) \{
|
|
071 _W += ((mp_word)*tmpx++)*((mp_word)*tmpy--);
|
|
072
|
|
073 \}
|
|
074
|
|
075 /* store term */
|
|
076 W[ix] = ((mp_digit)_W) & MP_MASK;
|
|
077
|
|
078 /* make next carry */
|
|
079 _W = _W >> ((mp_word)DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
080 \}
|
|
081
|
|
082 /* setup dest */
|
|
083 olduse = c->used;
|
|
084 c->used = pa;
|
|
085
|
|
086 \{
|
|
087 register mp_digit *tmpc;
|
|
088 tmpc = c->dp;
|
|
089 for (ix = 0; ix < pa+1; ix++) \{
|
|
090 /* now extract the previous digit [below the carry] */
|
|
091 *tmpc++ = W[ix];
|
|
092 \}
|
|
093
|
|
094 /* clear unused digits [that existed in the old copy of c] */
|
|
095 for (; ix < olduse; ix++) \{
|
|
096 *tmpc++ = 0;
|
|
097 \}
|
|
098 \}
|
|
099 mp_clamp (c);
|
|
100 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
101 \}
|
|
102 #endif
|
|
103
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
As per the pseudo--code we first calculate $pa$ (line 47) as the number of digits to output. Next we begin the outer loop
|
|
to produce the individual columns of the product. We use the two aliases $tmpx$ and $tmpy$ (lines 61, 62) to point
|
|
inside the two multiplicands quickly.
|
|
|
|
The inner loop (lines 70 to 73) of this implementation is where the tradeoff come into play. Originally this comba
|
|
implementation was ``row--major'' which means it adds to each of the columns in each pass. After the outer loop it would then fix
|
|
the carries. This was very fast except it had an annoying drawback. You had to read a mp\_word and two mp\_digits and write
|
|
one mp\_word per iteration. On processors such as the Athlon XP and P4 this did not matter much since the cache bandwidth
|
|
is very high and it can keep the ALU fed with data. It did, however, matter on older and embedded cpus where cache is often
|
|
slower and also often doesn't exist. This new algorithm only performs two reads per iteration under the assumption that the
|
|
compiler has aliased $\_ \hat W$ to a CPU register.
|
|
|
|
After the inner loop we store the current accumulator in $W$ and shift $\_ \hat W$ (lines 76, 79) to forward it as
|
|
a carry for the next pass. After the outer loop we use the final carry (line 76) as the last digit of the product.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Polynomial Basis Multiplication}
|
|
To break the $O(n^2)$ barrier in multiplication requires a completely different look at integer multiplication. In the following algorithms
|
|
the use of polynomial basis representation for two integers $a$ and $b$ as $f(x) = \sum_{i=0}^{n} a_i x^i$ and
|
|
$g(x) = \sum_{i=0}^{n} b_i x^i$ respectively, is required. In this system both $f(x)$ and $g(x)$ have $n + 1$ terms and are of the $n$'th degree.
|
|
|
|
The product $a \cdot b \equiv f(x)g(x)$ is the polynomial $W(x) = \sum_{i=0}^{2n} w_i x^i$. The coefficients $w_i$ will
|
|
directly yield the desired product when $\beta$ is substituted for $x$. The direct solution to solve for the $2n + 1$ coefficients
|
|
requires $O(n^2)$ time and would in practice be slower than the Comba technique.
|
|
|
|
However, numerical analysis theory indicates that only $2n + 1$ distinct points in $W(x)$ are required to determine the values of the $2n + 1$ unknown
|
|
coefficients. This means by finding $\zeta_y = W(y)$ for $2n + 1$ small values of $y$ the coefficients of $W(x)$ can be found with
|
|
Gaussian elimination. This technique is also occasionally refered to as the \textit{interpolation technique} (\textit{references please...}) since in
|
|
effect an interpolation based on $2n + 1$ points will yield a polynomial equivalent to $W(x)$.
|
|
|
|
The coefficients of the polynomial $W(x)$ are unknown which makes finding $W(y)$ for any value of $y$ impossible. However, since
|
|
$W(x) = f(x)g(x)$ the equivalent $\zeta_y = f(y) g(y)$ can be used in its place. The benefit of this technique stems from the
|
|
fact that $f(y)$ and $g(y)$ are much smaller than either $a$ or $b$ respectively. As a result finding the $2n + 1$ relations required
|
|
by multiplying $f(y)g(y)$ involves multiplying integers that are much smaller than either of the inputs.
|
|
|
|
When picking points to gather relations there are always three obvious points to choose, $y = 0, 1$ and $ \infty$. The $\zeta_0$ term
|
|
is simply the product $W(0) = w_0 = a_0 \cdot b_0$. The $\zeta_1$ term is the product
|
|
$W(1) = \left (\sum_{i = 0}^{n} a_i \right ) \left (\sum_{i = 0}^{n} b_i \right )$. The third point $\zeta_{\infty}$ is less obvious but rather
|
|
simple to explain. The $2n + 1$'th coefficient of $W(x)$ is numerically equivalent to the most significant column in an integer multiplication.
|
|
The point at $\infty$ is used symbolically to represent the most significant column, that is $W(\infty) = w_{2n} = a_nb_n$. Note that the
|
|
points at $y = 0$ and $\infty$ yield the coefficients $w_0$ and $w_{2n}$ directly.
|
|
|
|
If more points are required they should be of small values and powers of two such as $2^q$ and the related \textit{mirror points}
|
|
$\left (2^q \right )^{2n} \cdot \zeta_{2^{-q}}$ for small values of $q$. The term ``mirror point'' stems from the fact that
|
|
$\left (2^q \right )^{2n} \cdot \zeta_{2^{-q}}$ can be calculated in the exact opposite fashion as $\zeta_{2^q}$. For
|
|
example, when $n = 2$ and $q = 1$ then following two equations are equivalent to the point $\zeta_{2}$ and its mirror.
|
|
|
|
\begin{eqnarray}
|
|
\zeta_{2} = f(2)g(2) = (4a_2 + 2a_1 + a_0)(4b_2 + 2b_1 + b_0) \nonumber \\
|
|
16 \cdot \zeta_{1 \over 2} = 4f({1\over 2}) \cdot 4g({1 \over 2}) = (a_2 + 2a_1 + 4a_0)(b_2 + 2b_1 + 4b_0)
|
|
\end{eqnarray}
|
|
|
|
Using such points will allow the values of $f(y)$ and $g(y)$ to be independently calculated using only left shifts. For example, when $n = 2$ the
|
|
polynomial $f(2^q)$ is equal to $2^q((2^qa_2) + a_1) + a_0$. This technique of polynomial representation is known as Horner's method.
|
|
|
|
As a general rule of the algorithm when the inputs are split into $n$ parts each there are $2n - 1$ multiplications. Each multiplication is of
|
|
multiplicands that have $n$ times fewer digits than the inputs. The asymptotic running time of this algorithm is
|
|
$O \left ( k^{lg_n(2n - 1)} \right )$ for $k$ digit inputs (\textit{assuming they have the same number of digits}). Figure~\ref{fig:exponent}
|
|
summarizes the exponents for various values of $n$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Split into $n$ Parts} & \textbf{Exponent} & \textbf{Notes}\\
|
|
\hline $2$ & $1.584962501$ & This is Karatsuba Multiplication. \\
|
|
\hline $3$ & $1.464973520$ & This is Toom-Cook Multiplication. \\
|
|
\hline $4$ & $1.403677461$ &\\
|
|
\hline $5$ & $1.365212389$ &\\
|
|
\hline $10$ & $1.278753601$ &\\
|
|
\hline $100$ & $1.149426538$ &\\
|
|
\hline $1000$ & $1.100270931$ &\\
|
|
\hline $10000$ & $1.075252070$ &\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Asymptotic Running Time of Polynomial Basis Multiplication}
|
|
\label{fig:exponent}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
At first it may seem like a good idea to choose $n = 1000$ since the exponent is approximately $1.1$. However, the overhead
|
|
of solving for the 2001 terms of $W(x)$ will certainly consume any savings the algorithm could offer for all but exceedingly large
|
|
numbers.
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Cutoff Point}
|
|
The polynomial basis multiplication algorithms all require fewer single precision multiplications than a straight Comba approach. However,
|
|
the algorithms incur an overhead (\textit{at the $O(n)$ work level}) since they require a system of equations to be solved. This makes the
|
|
polynomial basis approach more costly to use with small inputs.
|
|
|
|
Let $m$ represent the number of digits in the multiplicands (\textit{assume both multiplicands have the same number of digits}). There exists a
|
|
point $y$ such that when $m < y$ the polynomial basis algorithms are more costly than Comba, when $m = y$ they are roughly the same cost and
|
|
when $m > y$ the Comba methods are slower than the polynomial basis algorithms.
|
|
|
|
The exact location of $y$ depends on several key architectural elements of the computer platform in question.
|
|
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item The ratio of clock cycles for single precision multiplication versus other simpler operations such as addition, shifting, etc. For example
|
|
on the AMD Athlon the ratio is roughly $17 : 1$ while on the Intel P4 it is $29 : 1$. The higher the ratio in favour of multiplication the lower
|
|
the cutoff point $y$ will be.
|
|
|
|
\item The complexity of the linear system of equations (\textit{for the coefficients of $W(x)$}) is. Generally speaking as the number of splits
|
|
grows the complexity grows substantially. Ideally solving the system will only involve addition, subtraction and shifting of integers. This
|
|
directly reflects on the ratio previous mentioned.
|
|
|
|
\item To a lesser extent memory bandwidth and function call overheads. Provided the values are in the processor cache this is less of an
|
|
influence over the cutoff point.
|
|
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
|
|
A clean cutoff point separation occurs when a point $y$ is found such that all of the cutoff point conditions are met. For example, if the point
|
|
is too low then there will be values of $m$ such that $m > y$ and the Comba method is still faster. Finding the cutoff points is fairly simple when
|
|
a high resolution timer is available.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Karatsuba Multiplication}
|
|
Karatsuba \cite{KARA} multiplication when originally proposed in 1962 was among the first set of algorithms to break the $O(n^2)$ barrier for
|
|
general purpose multiplication. Given two polynomial basis representations $f(x) = ax + b$ and $g(x) = cx + d$, Karatsuba proved with
|
|
light algebra \cite{KARAP} that the following polynomial is equivalent to multiplication of the two integers the polynomials represent.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
f(x) \cdot g(x) = acx^2 + ((a + b)(c + d) - (ac + bd))x + bd
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Using the observation that $ac$ and $bd$ could be re-used only three half sized multiplications would be required to produce the product. Applying
|
|
this algorithm recursively, the work factor becomes $O(n^{lg(3)})$ which is substantially better than the work factor $O(n^2)$ of the Comba technique. It turns
|
|
out what Karatsuba did not know or at least did not publish was that this is simply polynomial basis multiplication with the points
|
|
$\zeta_0$, $\zeta_{\infty}$ and $\zeta_{1}$. Consider the resultant system of equations.
|
|
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{rcrcrcrc}
|
|
$\zeta_{0}$ & $=$ & & & & & $w_0$ \\
|
|
$\zeta_{1}$ & $=$ & $w_2$ & $+$ & $w_1$ & $+$ & $w_0$ \\
|
|
$\zeta_{\infty}$ & $=$ & $w_2$ & & & & \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
By adding the first and last equation to the equation in the middle the term $w_1$ can be isolated and all three coefficients solved for. The simplicity
|
|
of this system of equations has made Karatsuba fairly popular. In fact the cutoff point is often fairly low\footnote{With LibTomMath 0.18 it is 70 and 109 digits for the Intel P4 and AMD Athlon respectively.}
|
|
making it an ideal algorithm to speed up certain public key cryptosystems such as RSA and Diffie-Hellman.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_karatsuba\_mul}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and mp\_int $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow \vert a \vert \cdot \vert b \vert$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Init the following mp\_int variables: $x0$, $x1$, $y0$, $y1$, $t1$, $x0y0$, $x1y1$.\\
|
|
2. If step 2 failed then return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Split the input. e.g. $a = x1 \cdot \beta^B + x0$ \\
|
|
3. $B \leftarrow \mbox{min}(a.used, b.used)/2$ \\
|
|
4. $x0 \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }\beta^B\mbox{)}$ (\textit{mp\_mod\_2d}) \\
|
|
5. $y0 \leftarrow b \mbox{ (mod }\beta^B\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
6. $x1 \leftarrow \lfloor a / \beta^B \rfloor$ (\textit{mp\_rshd}) \\
|
|
7. $y1 \leftarrow \lfloor b / \beta^B \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Calculate the three products. \\
|
|
8. $x0y0 \leftarrow x0 \cdot y0$ (\textit{mp\_mul}) \\
|
|
9. $x1y1 \leftarrow x1 \cdot y1$ \\
|
|
10. $t1 \leftarrow x1 + x0$ (\textit{mp\_add}) \\
|
|
11. $x0 \leftarrow y1 + y0$ \\
|
|
12. $t1 \leftarrow t1 \cdot x0$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Calculate the middle term. \\
|
|
13. $x0 \leftarrow x0y0 + x1y1$ \\
|
|
14. $t1 \leftarrow t1 - x0$ (\textit{s\_mp\_sub}) \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Calculate the final product. \\
|
|
15. $t1 \leftarrow t1 \cdot \beta^B$ (\textit{mp\_lshd}) \\
|
|
16. $x1y1 \leftarrow x1y1 \cdot \beta^{2B}$ \\
|
|
17. $t1 \leftarrow x0y0 + t1$ \\
|
|
18. $c \leftarrow t1 + x1y1$ \\
|
|
19. Clear all of the temporary variables. \\
|
|
20. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}).\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_karatsuba\_mul}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_karatsuba\_mul.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the unsigned product of two inputs using the Karatsuba multiplication algorithm. It is loosely based on the description
|
|
from Knuth \cite[pp. 294-295]{TAOCPV2}.
|
|
|
|
\index{radix point}
|
|
In order to split the two inputs into their respective halves, a suitable \textit{radix point} must be chosen. The radix point chosen must
|
|
be used for both of the inputs meaning that it must be smaller than the smallest input. Step 3 chooses the radix point $B$ as half of the
|
|
smallest input \textbf{used} count. After the radix point is chosen the inputs are split into lower and upper halves. Step 4 and 5
|
|
compute the lower halves. Step 6 and 7 computer the upper halves.
|
|
|
|
After the halves have been computed the three intermediate half-size products must be computed. Step 8 and 9 compute the trivial products
|
|
$x0 \cdot y0$ and $x1 \cdot y1$. The mp\_int $x0$ is used as a temporary variable after $x1 + x0$ has been computed. By using $x0$ instead
|
|
of an additional temporary variable, the algorithm can avoid an addition memory allocation operation.
|
|
|
|
The remaining steps 13 through 18 compute the Karatsuba polynomial through a variety of digit shifting and addition operations.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_karatsuba\_mul.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* c = |a| * |b| using Karatsuba Multiplication using
|
|
018 * three half size multiplications
|
|
019 *
|
|
020 * Let B represent the radix [e.g. 2**DIGIT_BIT] and
|
|
021 * let n represent half of the number of digits in
|
|
022 * the min(a,b)
|
|
023 *
|
|
024 * a = a1 * B**n + a0
|
|
025 * b = b1 * B**n + b0
|
|
026 *
|
|
027 * Then, a * b =>
|
|
028 a1b1 * B**2n + ((a1 + a0)(b1 + b0) - (a0b0 + a1b1)) * B + a0b0
|
|
029 *
|
|
030 * Note that a1b1 and a0b0 are used twice and only need to be
|
|
031 * computed once. So in total three half size (half # of
|
|
032 * digit) multiplications are performed, a0b0, a1b1 and
|
|
033 * (a1+b1)(a0+b0)
|
|
034 *
|
|
035 * Note that a multiplication of half the digits requires
|
|
036 * 1/4th the number of single precision multiplications so in
|
|
037 * total after one call 25% of the single precision multiplications
|
|
038 * are saved. Note also that the call to mp_mul can end up back
|
|
039 * in this function if the a0, a1, b0, or b1 are above the threshold.
|
|
040 * This is known as divide-and-conquer and leads to the famous
|
|
041 * O(N**lg(3)) or O(N**1.584) work which is asymptopically lower than
|
|
042 * the standard O(N**2) that the baseline/comba methods use.
|
|
043 * Generally though the overhead of this method doesn't pay off
|
|
044 * until a certain size (N ~ 80) is reached.
|
|
045 */
|
|
046 int mp_karatsuba_mul (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
047 \{
|
|
048 mp_int x0, x1, y0, y1, t1, x0y0, x1y1;
|
|
049 int B, err;
|
|
050
|
|
051 /* default the return code to an error */
|
|
052 err = MP_MEM;
|
|
053
|
|
054 /* min # of digits */
|
|
055 B = MIN (a->used, b->used);
|
|
056
|
|
057 /* now divide in two */
|
|
058 B = B >> 1;
|
|
059
|
|
060 /* init copy all the temps */
|
|
061 if (mp_init_size (&x0, B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
062 goto ERR;
|
|
063 if (mp_init_size (&x1, a->used - B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
064 goto X0;
|
|
065 if (mp_init_size (&y0, B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
066 goto X1;
|
|
067 if (mp_init_size (&y1, b->used - B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
068 goto Y0;
|
|
069
|
|
070 /* init temps */
|
|
071 if (mp_init_size (&t1, B * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
072 goto Y1;
|
|
073 if (mp_init_size (&x0y0, B * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
074 goto T1;
|
|
075 if (mp_init_size (&x1y1, B * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
076 goto X0Y0;
|
|
077
|
|
078 /* now shift the digits */
|
|
079 x0.used = y0.used = B;
|
|
080 x1.used = a->used - B;
|
|
081 y1.used = b->used - B;
|
|
082
|
|
083 \{
|
|
084 register int x;
|
|
085 register mp_digit *tmpa, *tmpb, *tmpx, *tmpy;
|
|
086
|
|
087 /* we copy the digits directly instead of using higher level functions
|
|
088 * since we also need to shift the digits
|
|
089 */
|
|
090 tmpa = a->dp;
|
|
091 tmpb = b->dp;
|
|
092
|
|
093 tmpx = x0.dp;
|
|
094 tmpy = y0.dp;
|
|
095 for (x = 0; x < B; x++) \{
|
|
096 *tmpx++ = *tmpa++;
|
|
097 *tmpy++ = *tmpb++;
|
|
098 \}
|
|
099
|
|
100 tmpx = x1.dp;
|
|
101 for (x = B; x < a->used; x++) \{
|
|
102 *tmpx++ = *tmpa++;
|
|
103 \}
|
|
104
|
|
105 tmpy = y1.dp;
|
|
106 for (x = B; x < b->used; x++) \{
|
|
107 *tmpy++ = *tmpb++;
|
|
108 \}
|
|
109 \}
|
|
110
|
|
111 /* only need to clamp the lower words since by definition the
|
|
112 * upper words x1/y1 must have a known number of digits
|
|
113 */
|
|
114 mp_clamp (&x0);
|
|
115 mp_clamp (&y0);
|
|
116
|
|
117 /* now calc the products x0y0 and x1y1 */
|
|
118 /* after this x0 is no longer required, free temp [x0==t2]! */
|
|
119 if (mp_mul (&x0, &y0, &x0y0) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
120 goto X1Y1; /* x0y0 = x0*y0 */
|
|
121 if (mp_mul (&x1, &y1, &x1y1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
122 goto X1Y1; /* x1y1 = x1*y1 */
|
|
123
|
|
124 /* now calc x1+x0 and y1+y0 */
|
|
125 if (s_mp_add (&x1, &x0, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
126 goto X1Y1; /* t1 = x1 - x0 */
|
|
127 if (s_mp_add (&y1, &y0, &x0) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
128 goto X1Y1; /* t2 = y1 - y0 */
|
|
129 if (mp_mul (&t1, &x0, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
130 goto X1Y1; /* t1 = (x1 + x0) * (y1 + y0) */
|
|
131
|
|
132 /* add x0y0 */
|
|
133 if (mp_add (&x0y0, &x1y1, &x0) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
134 goto X1Y1; /* t2 = x0y0 + x1y1 */
|
|
135 if (s_mp_sub (&t1, &x0, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
136 goto X1Y1; /* t1 = (x1+x0)*(y1+y0) - (x1y1 + x0y0) */
|
|
137
|
|
138 /* shift by B */
|
|
139 if (mp_lshd (&t1, B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
140 goto X1Y1; /* t1 = (x0y0 + x1y1 - (x1-x0)*(y1-y0))<<B */
|
|
141 if (mp_lshd (&x1y1, B * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
142 goto X1Y1; /* x1y1 = x1y1 << 2*B */
|
|
143
|
|
144 if (mp_add (&x0y0, &t1, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
145 goto X1Y1; /* t1 = x0y0 + t1 */
|
|
146 if (mp_add (&t1, &x1y1, c) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
147 goto X1Y1; /* t1 = x0y0 + t1 + x1y1 */
|
|
148
|
|
149 /* Algorithm succeeded set the return code to MP_OKAY */
|
|
150 err = MP_OKAY;
|
|
151
|
|
152 X1Y1:mp_clear (&x1y1);
|
|
153 X0Y0:mp_clear (&x0y0);
|
|
154 T1:mp_clear (&t1);
|
|
155 Y1:mp_clear (&y1);
|
|
156 Y0:mp_clear (&y0);
|
|
157 X1:mp_clear (&x1);
|
|
158 X0:mp_clear (&x0);
|
|
159 ERR:
|
|
160 return err;
|
|
161 \}
|
|
162 #endif
|
|
163
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The new coding element in this routine, not seen in previous routines, is the usage of goto statements. The conventional
|
|
wisdom is that goto statements should be avoided. This is generally true, however when every single function call can fail, it makes sense
|
|
to handle error recovery with a single piece of code. Lines 61 to 75 handle initializing all of the temporary variables
|
|
required. Note how each of the if statements goes to a different label in case of failure. This allows the routine to correctly free only
|
|
the temporaries that have been successfully allocated so far.
|
|
|
|
The temporary variables are all initialized using the mp\_init\_size routine since they are expected to be large. This saves the
|
|
additional reallocation that would have been necessary. Also $x0$, $x1$, $y0$ and $y1$ have to be able to hold at least their respective
|
|
number of digits for the next section of code.
|
|
|
|
The first algebraic portion of the algorithm is to split the two inputs into their halves. However, instead of using mp\_mod\_2d and mp\_rshd
|
|
to extract the halves, the respective code has been placed inline within the body of the function. To initialize the halves, the \textbf{used} and
|
|
\textbf{sign} members are copied first. The first for loop on line 101 copies the lower halves. Since they are both the same magnitude it
|
|
is simpler to calculate both lower halves in a single loop. The for loop on lines 106 and 106 calculate the upper halves $x1$ and
|
|
$y1$ respectively.
|
|
|
|
By inlining the calculation of the halves, the Karatsuba multiplier has a slightly lower overhead and can be used for smaller magnitude inputs.
|
|
|
|
When line 150 is reached, the algorithm has completed succesfully. The ``error status'' variable $err$ is set to \textbf{MP\_OKAY} so that
|
|
the same code that handles errors can be used to clear the temporary variables and return.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Toom-Cook $3$-Way Multiplication}
|
|
Toom-Cook $3$-Way \cite{TOOM} multiplication is essentially the polynomial basis algorithm for $n = 2$ except that the points are
|
|
chosen such that $\zeta$ is easy to compute and the resulting system of equations easy to reduce. Here, the points $\zeta_{0}$,
|
|
$16 \cdot \zeta_{1 \over 2}$, $\zeta_1$, $\zeta_2$ and $\zeta_{\infty}$ make up the five required points to solve for the coefficients
|
|
of the $W(x)$.
|
|
|
|
With the five relations that Toom-Cook specifies, the following system of equations is formed.
|
|
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{rcrcrcrcrcr}
|
|
$\zeta_0$ & $=$ & $0w_4$ & $+$ & $0w_3$ & $+$ & $0w_2$ & $+$ & $0w_1$ & $+$ & $1w_0$ \\
|
|
$16 \cdot \zeta_{1 \over 2}$ & $=$ & $1w_4$ & $+$ & $2w_3$ & $+$ & $4w_2$ & $+$ & $8w_1$ & $+$ & $16w_0$ \\
|
|
$\zeta_1$ & $=$ & $1w_4$ & $+$ & $1w_3$ & $+$ & $1w_2$ & $+$ & $1w_1$ & $+$ & $1w_0$ \\
|
|
$\zeta_2$ & $=$ & $16w_4$ & $+$ & $8w_3$ & $+$ & $4w_2$ & $+$ & $2w_1$ & $+$ & $1w_0$ \\
|
|
$\zeta_{\infty}$ & $=$ & $1w_4$ & $+$ & $0w_3$ & $+$ & $0w_2$ & $+$ & $0w_1$ & $+$ & $0w_0$ \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
A trivial solution to this matrix requires $12$ subtractions, two multiplications by a small power of two, two divisions by a small power
|
|
of two, two divisions by three and one multiplication by three. All of these $19$ sub-operations require less than quadratic time, meaning that
|
|
the algorithm can be faster than a baseline multiplication. However, the greater complexity of this algorithm places the cutoff point
|
|
(\textbf{TOOM\_MUL\_CUTOFF}) where Toom-Cook becomes more efficient much higher than the Karatsuba cutoff point.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_toom\_mul}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and mp\_int $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow a \cdot b $ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
Split $a$ and $b$ into three pieces. E.g. $a = a_2 \beta^{2k} + a_1 \beta^{k} + a_0$ \\
|
|
1. $k \leftarrow \lfloor \mbox{min}(a.used, b.used) / 3 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
2. $a_0 \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{k}\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
3. $a_1 \leftarrow \lfloor a / \beta^k \rfloor$, $a_1 \leftarrow a_1 \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{k}\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
4. $a_2 \leftarrow \lfloor a / \beta^{2k} \rfloor$, $a_2 \leftarrow a_2 \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{k}\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
5. $b_0 \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{k}\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
6. $b_1 \leftarrow \lfloor a / \beta^k \rfloor$, $b_1 \leftarrow b_1 \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{k}\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
7. $b_2 \leftarrow \lfloor a / \beta^{2k} \rfloor$, $b_2 \leftarrow b_2 \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{k}\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Find the five equations for $w_0, w_1, ..., w_4$. \\
|
|
8. $w_0 \leftarrow a_0 \cdot b_0$ \\
|
|
9. $w_4 \leftarrow a_2 \cdot b_2$ \\
|
|
10. $tmp_1 \leftarrow 2 \cdot a_0$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow a_1 + tmp_1$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow 2 \cdot tmp_1$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow tmp_1 + a_2$ \\
|
|
11. $tmp_2 \leftarrow 2 \cdot b_0$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow b_1 + tmp_2$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow 2 \cdot tmp_2$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow tmp_2 + b_2$ \\
|
|
12. $w_1 \leftarrow tmp_1 \cdot tmp_2$ \\
|
|
13. $tmp_1 \leftarrow 2 \cdot a_2$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow a_1 + tmp_1$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow 2 \cdot tmp_1$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow tmp_1 + a_0$ \\
|
|
14. $tmp_2 \leftarrow 2 \cdot b_2$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow b_1 + tmp_2$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow 2 \cdot tmp_2$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow tmp_2 + b_0$ \\
|
|
15. $w_3 \leftarrow tmp_1 \cdot tmp_2$ \\
|
|
16. $tmp_1 \leftarrow a_0 + a_1$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow tmp_1 + a_2$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow b_0 + b_1$, $tmp_2 \leftarrow tmp_2 + b_2$ \\
|
|
17. $w_2 \leftarrow tmp_1 \cdot tmp_2$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Continued on the next page.\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_toom\_mul}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_toom\_mul} (continued). \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and mp\_int $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow a \cdot b $ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
Now solve the system of equations. \\
|
|
18. $w_1 \leftarrow w_4 - w_1$, $w_3 \leftarrow w_3 - w_0$ \\
|
|
19. $w_1 \leftarrow \lfloor w_1 / 2 \rfloor$, $w_3 \leftarrow \lfloor w_3 / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
20. $w_2 \leftarrow w_2 - w_0$, $w_2 \leftarrow w_2 - w_4$ \\
|
|
21. $w_1 \leftarrow w_1 - w_2$, $w_3 \leftarrow w_3 - w_2$ \\
|
|
22. $tmp_1 \leftarrow 8 \cdot w_0$, $w_1 \leftarrow w_1 - tmp_1$, $tmp_1 \leftarrow 8 \cdot w_4$, $w_3 \leftarrow w_3 - tmp_1$ \\
|
|
23. $w_2 \leftarrow 3 \cdot w_2$, $w_2 \leftarrow w_2 - w_1$, $w_2 \leftarrow w_2 - w_3$ \\
|
|
24. $w_1 \leftarrow w_1 - w_2$, $w_3 \leftarrow w_3 - w_2$ \\
|
|
25. $w_1 \leftarrow \lfloor w_1 / 3 \rfloor, w_3 \leftarrow \lfloor w_3 / 3 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Now substitute $\beta^k$ for $x$ by shifting $w_0, w_1, ..., w_4$. \\
|
|
26. for $n$ from $1$ to $4$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}26.1 $w_n \leftarrow w_n \cdot \beta^{nk}$ \\
|
|
27. $c \leftarrow w_0 + w_1$, $c \leftarrow c + w_2$, $c \leftarrow c + w_3$, $c \leftarrow c + w_4$ \\
|
|
28. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_toom\_mul (continued)}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_toom\_mul.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the product of two mp\_int variables $a$ and $b$ using the Toom-Cook approach. Compared to the Karatsuba multiplication, this
|
|
algorithm has a lower asymptotic running time of approximately $O(n^{1.464})$ but at an obvious cost in overhead. In this
|
|
description, several statements have been compounded to save space. The intention is that the statements are executed from left to right across
|
|
any given step.
|
|
|
|
The two inputs $a$ and $b$ are first split into three $k$-digit integers $a_0, a_1, a_2$ and $b_0, b_1, b_2$ respectively. From these smaller
|
|
integers the coefficients of the polynomial basis representations $f(x)$ and $g(x)$ are known and can be used to find the relations required.
|
|
|
|
The first two relations $w_0$ and $w_4$ are the points $\zeta_{0}$ and $\zeta_{\infty}$ respectively. The relation $w_1, w_2$ and $w_3$ correspond
|
|
to the points $16 \cdot \zeta_{1 \over 2}, \zeta_{2}$ and $\zeta_{1}$ respectively. These are found using logical shifts to independently find
|
|
$f(y)$ and $g(y)$ which significantly speeds up the algorithm.
|
|
|
|
After the five relations $w_0, w_1, \ldots, w_4$ have been computed, the system they represent must be solved in order for the unknown coefficients
|
|
$w_1, w_2$ and $w_3$ to be isolated. The steps 18 through 25 perform the system reduction required as previously described. Each step of
|
|
the reduction represents the comparable matrix operation that would be performed had this been performed by pencil. For example, step 18 indicates
|
|
that row $1$ must be subtracted from row $4$ and simultaneously row $0$ subtracted from row $3$.
|
|
|
|
Once the coeffients have been isolated, the polynomial $W(x) = \sum_{i=0}^{2n} w_i x^i$ is known. By substituting $\beta^{k}$ for $x$, the integer
|
|
result $a \cdot b$ is produced.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_toom\_mul.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* multiplication using the Toom-Cook 3-way algorithm
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * Much more complicated than Karatsuba but has a lower
|
|
020 * asymptotic running time of O(N**1.464). This algorithm is
|
|
021 * only particularly useful on VERY large inputs
|
|
022 * (we're talking 1000s of digits here...).
|
|
023 */
|
|
024 int mp_toom_mul(mp_int *a, mp_int *b, mp_int *c)
|
|
025 \{
|
|
026 mp_int w0, w1, w2, w3, w4, tmp1, tmp2, a0, a1, a2, b0, b1, b2;
|
|
027 int res, B;
|
|
028
|
|
029 /* init temps */
|
|
030 if ((res = mp_init_multi(&w0, &w1, &w2, &w3, &w4,
|
|
031 &a0, &a1, &a2, &b0, &b1,
|
|
032 &b2, &tmp1, &tmp2, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
033 return res;
|
|
034 \}
|
|
035
|
|
036 /* B */
|
|
037 B = MIN(a->used, b->used) / 3;
|
|
038
|
|
039 /* a = a2 * B**2 + a1 * B + a0 */
|
|
040 if ((res = mp_mod_2d(a, DIGIT_BIT * B, &a0)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
041 goto ERR;
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043
|
|
044 if ((res = mp_copy(a, &a1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
045 goto ERR;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047 mp_rshd(&a1, B);
|
|
048 mp_mod_2d(&a1, DIGIT_BIT * B, &a1);
|
|
049
|
|
050 if ((res = mp_copy(a, &a2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
051 goto ERR;
|
|
052 \}
|
|
053 mp_rshd(&a2, B*2);
|
|
054
|
|
055 /* b = b2 * B**2 + b1 * B + b0 */
|
|
056 if ((res = mp_mod_2d(b, DIGIT_BIT * B, &b0)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
057 goto ERR;
|
|
058 \}
|
|
059
|
|
060 if ((res = mp_copy(b, &b1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
061 goto ERR;
|
|
062 \}
|
|
063 mp_rshd(&b1, B);
|
|
064 mp_mod_2d(&b1, DIGIT_BIT * B, &b1);
|
|
065
|
|
066 if ((res = mp_copy(b, &b2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
067 goto ERR;
|
|
068 \}
|
|
069 mp_rshd(&b2, B*2);
|
|
070
|
|
071 /* w0 = a0*b0 */
|
|
072 if ((res = mp_mul(&a0, &b0, &w0)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
073 goto ERR;
|
|
074 \}
|
|
075
|
|
076 /* w4 = a2 * b2 */
|
|
077 if ((res = mp_mul(&a2, &b2, &w4)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
078 goto ERR;
|
|
079 \}
|
|
080
|
|
081 /* w1 = (a2 + 2(a1 + 2a0))(b2 + 2(b1 + 2b0)) */
|
|
082 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&a0, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
083 goto ERR;
|
|
084 \}
|
|
085 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp1, &a1, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
086 goto ERR;
|
|
087 \}
|
|
088 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&tmp1, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
089 goto ERR;
|
|
090 \}
|
|
091 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp1, &a2, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
092 goto ERR;
|
|
093 \}
|
|
094
|
|
095 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&b0, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
096 goto ERR;
|
|
097 \}
|
|
098 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp2, &b1, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
099 goto ERR;
|
|
100 \}
|
|
101 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&tmp2, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
102 goto ERR;
|
|
103 \}
|
|
104 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp2, &b2, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
105 goto ERR;
|
|
106 \}
|
|
107
|
|
108 if ((res = mp_mul(&tmp1, &tmp2, &w1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
109 goto ERR;
|
|
110 \}
|
|
111
|
|
112 /* w3 = (a0 + 2(a1 + 2a2))(b0 + 2(b1 + 2b2)) */
|
|
113 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&a2, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
114 goto ERR;
|
|
115 \}
|
|
116 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp1, &a1, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
117 goto ERR;
|
|
118 \}
|
|
119 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&tmp1, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
120 goto ERR;
|
|
121 \}
|
|
122 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp1, &a0, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
123 goto ERR;
|
|
124 \}
|
|
125
|
|
126 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&b2, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
127 goto ERR;
|
|
128 \}
|
|
129 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp2, &b1, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
130 goto ERR;
|
|
131 \}
|
|
132 if ((res = mp_mul_2(&tmp2, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
133 goto ERR;
|
|
134 \}
|
|
135 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp2, &b0, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
136 goto ERR;
|
|
137 \}
|
|
138
|
|
139 if ((res = mp_mul(&tmp1, &tmp2, &w3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
140 goto ERR;
|
|
141 \}
|
|
142
|
|
143
|
|
144 /* w2 = (a2 + a1 + a0)(b2 + b1 + b0) */
|
|
145 if ((res = mp_add(&a2, &a1, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
146 goto ERR;
|
|
147 \}
|
|
148 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp1, &a0, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
149 goto ERR;
|
|
150 \}
|
|
151 if ((res = mp_add(&b2, &b1, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
152 goto ERR;
|
|
153 \}
|
|
154 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp2, &b0, &tmp2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
155 goto ERR;
|
|
156 \}
|
|
157 if ((res = mp_mul(&tmp1, &tmp2, &w2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
158 goto ERR;
|
|
159 \}
|
|
160
|
|
161 /* now solve the matrix
|
|
162
|
|
163 0 0 0 0 1
|
|
164 1 2 4 8 16
|
|
165 1 1 1 1 1
|
|
166 16 8 4 2 1
|
|
167 1 0 0 0 0
|
|
168
|
|
169 using 12 subtractions, 4 shifts,
|
|
170 2 small divisions and 1 small multiplication
|
|
171 */
|
|
172
|
|
173 /* r1 - r4 */
|
|
174 if ((res = mp_sub(&w1, &w4, &w1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
175 goto ERR;
|
|
176 \}
|
|
177 /* r3 - r0 */
|
|
178 if ((res = mp_sub(&w3, &w0, &w3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
179 goto ERR;
|
|
180 \}
|
|
181 /* r1/2 */
|
|
182 if ((res = mp_div_2(&w1, &w1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
183 goto ERR;
|
|
184 \}
|
|
185 /* r3/2 */
|
|
186 if ((res = mp_div_2(&w3, &w3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
187 goto ERR;
|
|
188 \}
|
|
189 /* r2 - r0 - r4 */
|
|
190 if ((res = mp_sub(&w2, &w0, &w2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
191 goto ERR;
|
|
192 \}
|
|
193 if ((res = mp_sub(&w2, &w4, &w2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
194 goto ERR;
|
|
195 \}
|
|
196 /* r1 - r2 */
|
|
197 if ((res = mp_sub(&w1, &w2, &w1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
198 goto ERR;
|
|
199 \}
|
|
200 /* r3 - r2 */
|
|
201 if ((res = mp_sub(&w3, &w2, &w3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
202 goto ERR;
|
|
203 \}
|
|
204 /* r1 - 8r0 */
|
|
205 if ((res = mp_mul_2d(&w0, 3, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
206 goto ERR;
|
|
207 \}
|
|
208 if ((res = mp_sub(&w1, &tmp1, &w1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
209 goto ERR;
|
|
210 \}
|
|
211 /* r3 - 8r4 */
|
|
212 if ((res = mp_mul_2d(&w4, 3, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
213 goto ERR;
|
|
214 \}
|
|
215 if ((res = mp_sub(&w3, &tmp1, &w3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
216 goto ERR;
|
|
217 \}
|
|
218 /* 3r2 - r1 - r3 */
|
|
219 if ((res = mp_mul_d(&w2, 3, &w2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
220 goto ERR;
|
|
221 \}
|
|
222 if ((res = mp_sub(&w2, &w1, &w2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
223 goto ERR;
|
|
224 \}
|
|
225 if ((res = mp_sub(&w2, &w3, &w2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
226 goto ERR;
|
|
227 \}
|
|
228 /* r1 - r2 */
|
|
229 if ((res = mp_sub(&w1, &w2, &w1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
230 goto ERR;
|
|
231 \}
|
|
232 /* r3 - r2 */
|
|
233 if ((res = mp_sub(&w3, &w2, &w3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
234 goto ERR;
|
|
235 \}
|
|
236 /* r1/3 */
|
|
237 if ((res = mp_div_3(&w1, &w1, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
238 goto ERR;
|
|
239 \}
|
|
240 /* r3/3 */
|
|
241 if ((res = mp_div_3(&w3, &w3, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
242 goto ERR;
|
|
243 \}
|
|
244
|
|
245 /* at this point shift W[n] by B*n */
|
|
246 if ((res = mp_lshd(&w1, 1*B)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
247 goto ERR;
|
|
248 \}
|
|
249 if ((res = mp_lshd(&w2, 2*B)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
250 goto ERR;
|
|
251 \}
|
|
252 if ((res = mp_lshd(&w3, 3*B)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
253 goto ERR;
|
|
254 \}
|
|
255 if ((res = mp_lshd(&w4, 4*B)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
256 goto ERR;
|
|
257 \}
|
|
258
|
|
259 if ((res = mp_add(&w0, &w1, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
260 goto ERR;
|
|
261 \}
|
|
262 if ((res = mp_add(&w2, &w3, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
263 goto ERR;
|
|
264 \}
|
|
265 if ((res = mp_add(&w4, &tmp1, &tmp1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
266 goto ERR;
|
|
267 \}
|
|
268 if ((res = mp_add(&tmp1, c, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
269 goto ERR;
|
|
270 \}
|
|
271
|
|
272 ERR:
|
|
273 mp_clear_multi(&w0, &w1, &w2, &w3, &w4,
|
|
274 &a0, &a1, &a2, &b0, &b1,
|
|
275 &b2, &tmp1, &tmp2, NULL);
|
|
276 return res;
|
|
277 \}
|
|
278
|
|
279 #endif
|
|
280
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The first obvious thing to note is that this algorithm is complicated. The complexity is worth it if you are multiplying very
|
|
large numbers. For example, a 10,000 digit multiplication takes approximaly 99,282,205 fewer single precision multiplications with
|
|
Toom--Cook than a Comba or baseline approach (this is a savings of more than 99$\%$). For most ``crypto'' sized numbers this
|
|
algorithm is not practical as Karatsuba has a much lower cutoff point.
|
|
|
|
First we split $a$ and $b$ into three roughly equal portions. This has been accomplished (lines 40 to 69) with
|
|
combinations of mp\_rshd() and mp\_mod\_2d() function calls. At this point $a = a2 \cdot \beta^2 + a1 \cdot \beta + a0$ and similiarly
|
|
for $b$.
|
|
|
|
Next we compute the five points $w0, w1, w2, w3$ and $w4$. Recall that $w0$ and $w4$ can be computed directly from the portions so
|
|
we get those out of the way first (lines 72 and 77). Next we compute $w1, w2$ and $w3$ using Horners method.
|
|
|
|
After this point we solve for the actual values of $w1, w2$ and $w3$ by reducing the $5 \times 5$ system which is relatively
|
|
straight forward.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Signed Multiplication}
|
|
Now that algorithms to handle multiplications of every useful dimensions have been developed, a rather simple finishing touch is required. So far all
|
|
of the multiplication algorithms have been unsigned multiplications which leaves only a signed multiplication algorithm to be established.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_mul}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and mp\_int $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c \leftarrow a \cdot b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $a.sign = b.sign$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $sign = MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
2. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $sign = MP\_ZNEG$ \\
|
|
3. If min$(a.used, b.used) \ge TOOM\_MUL\_CUTOFF$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $c \leftarrow a \cdot b$ using algorithm mp\_toom\_mul \\
|
|
4. else if min$(a.used, b.used) \ge KARATSUBA\_MUL\_CUTOFF$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $c \leftarrow a \cdot b$ using algorithm mp\_karatsuba\_mul \\
|
|
5. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $digs \leftarrow a.used + b.used + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 If $digs < MP\_ARRAY$ and min$(a.used, b.used) \le \delta$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.2.1 $c \leftarrow a \cdot b \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{digs}\mbox{)}$ using algorithm fast\_s\_mp\_mul\_digs. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 else \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.3.1 $c \leftarrow a \cdot b \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{digs}\mbox{)}$ using algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_digs. \\
|
|
6. $c.sign \leftarrow sign$ \\
|
|
7. Return the result of the unsigned multiplication performed. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_mul}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_mul.}
|
|
This algorithm performs the signed multiplication of two inputs. It will make use of any of the three unsigned multiplication algorithms
|
|
available when the input is of appropriate size. The \textbf{sign} of the result is not set until the end of the algorithm since algorithm
|
|
s\_mp\_mul\_digs will clear it.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_mul.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* high level multiplication (handles sign) */
|
|
018 int mp_mul (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int res, neg;
|
|
021 neg = (a->sign == b->sign) ? MP_ZPOS : MP_NEG;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* use Toom-Cook? */
|
|
024 #ifdef BN_MP_TOOM_MUL_C
|
|
025 if (MIN (a->used, b->used) >= TOOM_MUL_CUTOFF) \{
|
|
026 res = mp_toom_mul(a, b, c);
|
|
027 \} else
|
|
028 #endif
|
|
029 #ifdef BN_MP_KARATSUBA_MUL_C
|
|
030 /* use Karatsuba? */
|
|
031 if (MIN (a->used, b->used) >= KARATSUBA_MUL_CUTOFF) \{
|
|
032 res = mp_karatsuba_mul (a, b, c);
|
|
033 \} else
|
|
034 #endif
|
|
035 \{
|
|
036 /* can we use the fast multiplier?
|
|
037 *
|
|
038 * The fast multiplier can be used if the output will
|
|
039 * have less than MP_WARRAY digits and the number of
|
|
040 * digits won't affect carry propagation
|
|
041 */
|
|
042 int digs = a->used + b->used + 1;
|
|
043
|
|
044 #ifdef BN_FAST_S_MP_MUL_DIGS_C
|
|
045 if ((digs < MP_WARRAY) &&
|
|
046 MIN(a->used, b->used) <=
|
|
047 (1 << ((CHAR_BIT * sizeof (mp_word)) - (2 * DIGIT_BIT)))) \{
|
|
048 res = fast_s_mp_mul_digs (a, b, c, digs);
|
|
049 \} else
|
|
050 #endif
|
|
051 #ifdef BN_S_MP_MUL_DIGS_C
|
|
052 res = s_mp_mul (a, b, c); /* uses s_mp_mul_digs */
|
|
053 #else
|
|
054 res = MP_VAL;
|
|
055 #endif
|
|
056
|
|
057 \}
|
|
058 c->sign = (c->used > 0) ? neg : MP_ZPOS;
|
|
059 return res;
|
|
060 \}
|
|
061 #endif
|
|
062
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The implementation is rather simplistic and is not particularly noteworthy. Line 23 computes the sign of the result using the ``?''
|
|
operator from the C programming language. Line 47 computes $\delta$ using the fact that $1 << k$ is equal to $2^k$.
|
|
|
|
\section{Squaring}
|
|
\label{sec:basesquare}
|
|
|
|
Squaring is a special case of multiplication where both multiplicands are equal. At first it may seem like there is no significant optimization
|
|
available but in fact there is. Consider the multiplication of $576$ against $241$. In total there will be nine single precision multiplications
|
|
performed which are $1\cdot 6$, $1 \cdot 7$, $1 \cdot 5$, $4 \cdot 6$, $4 \cdot 7$, $4 \cdot 5$, $2 \cdot 6$, $2 \cdot 7$ and $2 \cdot 5$. Now consider
|
|
the multiplication of $123$ against $123$. The nine products are $3 \cdot 3$, $3 \cdot 2$, $3 \cdot 1$, $2 \cdot 3$, $2 \cdot 2$, $2 \cdot 1$,
|
|
$1 \cdot 3$, $1 \cdot 2$ and $1 \cdot 1$. On closer inspection some of the products are equivalent. For example, $3 \cdot 2 = 2 \cdot 3$
|
|
and $3 \cdot 1 = 1 \cdot 3$.
|
|
|
|
For any $n$-digit input, there are ${{\left (n^2 + n \right)}\over 2}$ possible unique single precision multiplications required compared to the $n^2$
|
|
required for multiplication. The following diagram gives an example of the operations required.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{ccccc|c}
|
|
&&1&2&3&\\
|
|
$\times$ &&1&2&3&\\
|
|
\hline && $3 \cdot 1$ & $3 \cdot 2$ & $3 \cdot 3$ & Row 0\\
|
|
& $2 \cdot 1$ & $2 \cdot 2$ & $2 \cdot 3$ && Row 1 \\
|
|
$1 \cdot 1$ & $1 \cdot 2$ & $1 \cdot 3$ &&& Row 2 \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Squaring Optimization Diagram}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Starting from zero and numbering the columns from right to left a very simple pattern becomes obvious. For the purposes of this discussion let $x$
|
|
represent the number being squared. The first observation is that in row $k$ the $2k$'th column of the product has a $\left (x_k \right)^2$ term in it.
|
|
|
|
The second observation is that every column $j$ in row $k$ where $j \ne 2k$ is part of a double product. Every non-square term of a column will
|
|
appear twice hence the name ``double product''. Every odd column is made up entirely of double products. In fact every column is made up of double
|
|
products and at most one square (\textit{see the exercise section}).
|
|
|
|
The third and final observation is that for row $k$ the first unique non-square term, that is, one that hasn't already appeared in an earlier row,
|
|
occurs at column $2k + 1$. For example, on row $1$ of the previous squaring, column one is part of the double product with column one from row zero.
|
|
Column two of row one is a square and column three is the first unique column.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{The Baseline Squaring Algorithm}
|
|
The baseline squaring algorithm is meant to be a catch-all squaring algorithm. It will handle any of the input sizes that the faster routines
|
|
will not handle.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{s\_mp\_sqr}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $b \leftarrow a^2$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Init a temporary mp\_int of at least $2 \cdot a.used +1$ digits. (\textit{mp\_init\_size}) \\
|
|
2. If step 1 failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}) \\
|
|
3. $t.used \leftarrow 2 \cdot a.used + 1$ \\
|
|
4. For $ix$ from 0 to $a.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}Calculate the square. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $\hat r \leftarrow t_{2ix} + \left (a_{ix} \right )^2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.2 $t_{2ix} \leftarrow \hat r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}Calculate the double products after the square. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.3 $u \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.4 For $iy$ from $ix + 1$ to $a.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.4.1 $\hat r \leftarrow 2 \cdot a_{ix}a_{iy} + t_{ix + iy} + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.4.2 $t_{ix + iy} \leftarrow \hat r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.4.3 $u \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}Set the last carry. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.5 While $u > 0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.5.1 $iy \leftarrow iy + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.5.2 $\hat r \leftarrow t_{ix + iy} + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.5.3 $t_{ix + iy} \leftarrow \hat r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.5.4 $u \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
5. Clamp excess digits of $t$. (\textit{mp\_clamp}) \\
|
|
6. Exchange $b$ and $t$. \\
|
|
7. Clear $t$ (\textit{mp\_clear}) \\
|
|
8. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm s\_mp\_sqr}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm s\_mp\_sqr.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the square of an input using the three observations on squaring. It is based fairly faithfully on algorithm 14.16 of HAC
|
|
\cite[pp.596-597]{HAC}. Similar to algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_digs, a temporary mp\_int is allocated to hold the result of the squaring. This allows the
|
|
destination mp\_int to be the same as the source mp\_int.
|
|
|
|
The outer loop of this algorithm begins on step 4. It is best to think of the outer loop as walking down the rows of the partial results, while
|
|
the inner loop computes the columns of the partial result. Step 4.1 and 4.2 compute the square term for each row, and step 4.3 and 4.4 propagate
|
|
the carry and compute the double products.
|
|
|
|
The requirement that a mp\_word be able to represent the range $0 \le x < 2 \beta^2$ arises from this
|
|
very algorithm. The product $a_{ix}a_{iy}$ will lie in the range $0 \le x \le \beta^2 - 2\beta + 1$ which is obviously less than $\beta^2$ meaning that
|
|
when it is multiplied by two, it can be properly represented by a mp\_word.
|
|
|
|
Similar to algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_digs, after every pass of the inner loop, the destination is correctly set to the sum of all of the partial
|
|
results calculated so far. This involves expensive carry propagation which will be eliminated in the next algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_s\_mp\_sqr.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* low level squaring, b = a*a, HAC pp.596-597, Algorithm 14.16 */
|
|
018 int s_mp_sqr (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 mp_int t;
|
|
021 int res, ix, iy, pa;
|
|
022 mp_word r;
|
|
023 mp_digit u, tmpx, *tmpt;
|
|
024
|
|
025 pa = a->used;
|
|
026 if ((res = mp_init_size (&t, 2*pa + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
027 return res;
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* default used is maximum possible size */
|
|
031 t.used = 2*pa + 1;
|
|
032
|
|
033 for (ix = 0; ix < pa; ix++) \{
|
|
034 /* first calculate the digit at 2*ix */
|
|
035 /* calculate double precision result */
|
|
036 r = ((mp_word) t.dp[2*ix]) +
|
|
037 ((mp_word)a->dp[ix])*((mp_word)a->dp[ix]);
|
|
038
|
|
039 /* store lower part in result */
|
|
040 t.dp[ix+ix] = (mp_digit) (r & ((mp_word) MP_MASK));
|
|
041
|
|
042 /* get the carry */
|
|
043 u = (mp_digit)(r >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT));
|
|
044
|
|
045 /* left hand side of A[ix] * A[iy] */
|
|
046 tmpx = a->dp[ix];
|
|
047
|
|
048 /* alias for where to store the results */
|
|
049 tmpt = t.dp + (2*ix + 1);
|
|
050
|
|
051 for (iy = ix + 1; iy < pa; iy++) \{
|
|
052 /* first calculate the product */
|
|
053 r = ((mp_word)tmpx) * ((mp_word)a->dp[iy]);
|
|
054
|
|
055 /* now calculate the double precision result, note we use
|
|
056 * addition instead of *2 since it's easier to optimize
|
|
057 */
|
|
058 r = ((mp_word) *tmpt) + r + r + ((mp_word) u);
|
|
059
|
|
060 /* store lower part */
|
|
061 *tmpt++ = (mp_digit) (r & ((mp_word) MP_MASK));
|
|
062
|
|
063 /* get carry */
|
|
064 u = (mp_digit)(r >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT));
|
|
065 \}
|
|
066 /* propagate upwards */
|
|
067 while (u != ((mp_digit) 0)) \{
|
|
068 r = ((mp_word) *tmpt) + ((mp_word) u);
|
|
069 *tmpt++ = (mp_digit) (r & ((mp_word) MP_MASK));
|
|
070 u = (mp_digit)(r >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT));
|
|
071 \}
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073
|
|
074 mp_clamp (&t);
|
|
075 mp_exch (&t, b);
|
|
076 mp_clear (&t);
|
|
077 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
078 \}
|
|
079 #endif
|
|
080
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Inside the outer loop (line 33) the square term is calculated on line 36. The carry (line 43) has been
|
|
extracted from the mp\_word accumulator using a right shift. Aliases for $a_{ix}$ and $t_{ix+iy}$ are initialized
|
|
(lines 46 and 49) to simplify the inner loop. The doubling is performed using two
|
|
additions (line 58) since it is usually faster than shifting, if not at least as fast.
|
|
|
|
The important observation is that the inner loop does not begin at $iy = 0$ like for multiplication. As such the inner loops
|
|
get progressively shorter as the algorithm proceeds. This is what leads to the savings compared to using a multiplication to
|
|
square a number.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Faster Squaring by the ``Comba'' Method}
|
|
A major drawback to the baseline method is the requirement for single precision shifting inside the $O(n^2)$ nested loop. Squaring has an additional
|
|
drawback that it must double the product inside the inner loop as well. As for multiplication, the Comba technique can be used to eliminate these
|
|
performance hazards.
|
|
|
|
The first obvious solution is to make an array of mp\_words which will hold all of the columns. This will indeed eliminate all of the carry
|
|
propagation operations from the inner loop. However, the inner product must still be doubled $O(n^2)$ times. The solution stems from the simple fact
|
|
that $2a + 2b + 2c = 2(a + b + c)$. That is the sum of all of the double products is equal to double the sum of all the products. For example,
|
|
$ab + ba + ac + ca = 2ab + 2ac = 2(ab + ac)$.
|
|
|
|
However, we cannot simply double all of the columns, since the squares appear only once per row. The most practical solution is to have two
|
|
mp\_word arrays. One array will hold the squares and the other array will hold the double products. With both arrays the doubling and
|
|
carry propagation can be moved to a $O(n)$ work level outside the $O(n^2)$ level. In this case, we have an even simpler solution in mind.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{fast\_s\_mp\_sqr}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $b \leftarrow a^2$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
Place an array of \textbf{MP\_WARRAY} mp\_digits named $W$ on the stack. \\
|
|
1. If $b.alloc < 2a.used + 1$ then grow $b$ to $2a.used + 1$ digits. (\textit{mp\_grow}). \\
|
|
2. If step 1 failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
\\
|
|
3. $pa \leftarrow 2 \cdot a.used$ \\
|
|
4. $\hat W1 \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
5. for $ix$ from $0$ to $pa - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $\_ \hat W \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $ty \leftarrow \mbox{MIN}(a.used - 1, ix)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 $tx \leftarrow ix - ty$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.4 $iy \leftarrow \mbox{MIN}(a.used - tx, ty + 1)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.5 $iy \leftarrow \mbox{MIN}(iy, \lfloor \left (ty - tx + 1 \right )/2 \rfloor)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.6 for $iz$ from $0$ to $iz - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.6.1 $\_ \hat W \leftarrow \_ \hat W + a_{tx + iz}a_{ty - iz}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.7 $\_ \hat W \leftarrow 2 \cdot \_ \hat W + \hat W1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.8 if $ix$ is even then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.8.1 $\_ \hat W \leftarrow \_ \hat W + \left ( a_{\lfloor ix/2 \rfloor}\right )^2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.9 $W_{ix} \leftarrow \_ \hat W (\mbox{mod }\beta)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.10 $\hat W1 \leftarrow \lfloor \_ \hat W / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
6. $oldused \leftarrow b.used$ \\
|
|
7. $b.used \leftarrow 2 \cdot a.used$ \\
|
|
8. for $ix$ from $0$ to $pa - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $b_{ix} \leftarrow W_{ix}$ \\
|
|
9. for $ix$ from $pa$ to $oldused - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 $b_{ix} \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
10. Clamp excess digits from $b$. (\textit{mp\_clamp}) \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm fast\_s\_mp\_sqr}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm fast\_s\_mp\_sqr.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the square of an input using the Comba technique. It is designed to be a replacement for algorithm
|
|
s\_mp\_sqr when the number of input digits is less than \textbf{MP\_WARRAY} and less than $\delta \over 2$.
|
|
This algorithm is very similar to the Comba multiplier except with a few key differences we shall make note of.
|
|
|
|
First, we have an accumulator and carry variables $\_ \hat W$ and $\hat W1$ respectively. This is because the inner loop
|
|
products are to be doubled. If we had added the previous carry in we would be doubling too much. Next we perform an
|
|
addition MIN condition on $iy$ (step 5.5) to prevent overlapping digits. For example, $a_3 \cdot a_5$ is equal
|
|
$a_5 \cdot a_3$. Whereas in the multiplication case we would have $5 < a.used$ and $3 \ge 0$ is maintained since we double the sum
|
|
of the products just outside the inner loop we have to avoid doing this. This is also a good thing since we perform
|
|
fewer multiplications and the routine ends up being faster.
|
|
|
|
Finally the last difference is the addition of the ``square'' term outside the inner loop (step 5.8). We add in the square
|
|
only to even outputs and it is the square of the term at the $\lfloor ix / 2 \rfloor$ position.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_fast\_s\_mp\_sqr.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* the jist of squaring...
|
|
018 * you do like mult except the offset of the tmpx [one that
|
|
019 * starts closer to zero] can't equal the offset of tmpy.
|
|
020 * So basically you set up iy like before then you min it with
|
|
021 * (ty-tx) so that it never happens. You double all those
|
|
022 * you add in the inner loop
|
|
023
|
|
024 After that loop you do the squares and add them in.
|
|
025 */
|
|
026
|
|
027 int fast_s_mp_sqr (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
028 \{
|
|
029 int olduse, res, pa, ix, iz;
|
|
030 mp_digit W[MP_WARRAY], *tmpx;
|
|
031 mp_word W1;
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* grow the destination as required */
|
|
034 pa = a->used + a->used;
|
|
035 if (b->alloc < pa) \{
|
|
036 if ((res = mp_grow (b, pa)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
037 return res;
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* number of output digits to produce */
|
|
042 W1 = 0;
|
|
043 for (ix = 0; ix < pa; ix++) \{
|
|
044 int tx, ty, iy;
|
|
045 mp_word _W;
|
|
046 mp_digit *tmpy;
|
|
047
|
|
048 /* clear counter */
|
|
049 _W = 0;
|
|
050
|
|
051 /* get offsets into the two bignums */
|
|
052 ty = MIN(a->used-1, ix);
|
|
053 tx = ix - ty;
|
|
054
|
|
055 /* setup temp aliases */
|
|
056 tmpx = a->dp + tx;
|
|
057 tmpy = a->dp + ty;
|
|
058
|
|
059 /* this is the number of times the loop will iterrate, essentially
|
|
060 while (tx++ < a->used && ty-- >= 0) \{ ... \}
|
|
061 */
|
|
062 iy = MIN(a->used-tx, ty+1);
|
|
063
|
|
064 /* now for squaring tx can never equal ty
|
|
065 * we halve the distance since they approach at a rate of 2x
|
|
066 * and we have to round because odd cases need to be executed
|
|
067 */
|
|
068 iy = MIN(iy, (ty-tx+1)>>1);
|
|
069
|
|
070 /* execute loop */
|
|
071 for (iz = 0; iz < iy; iz++) \{
|
|
072 _W += ((mp_word)*tmpx++)*((mp_word)*tmpy--);
|
|
073 \}
|
|
074
|
|
075 /* double the inner product and add carry */
|
|
076 _W = _W + _W + W1;
|
|
077
|
|
078 /* even columns have the square term in them */
|
|
079 if ((ix&1) == 0) \{
|
|
080 _W += ((mp_word)a->dp[ix>>1])*((mp_word)a->dp[ix>>1]);
|
|
081 \}
|
|
082
|
|
083 /* store it */
|
|
084 W[ix] = (mp_digit)(_W & MP_MASK);
|
|
085
|
|
086 /* make next carry */
|
|
087 W1 = _W >> ((mp_word)DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
088 \}
|
|
089
|
|
090 /* setup dest */
|
|
091 olduse = b->used;
|
|
092 b->used = a->used+a->used;
|
|
093
|
|
094 \{
|
|
095 mp_digit *tmpb;
|
|
096 tmpb = b->dp;
|
|
097 for (ix = 0; ix < pa; ix++) \{
|
|
098 *tmpb++ = W[ix] & MP_MASK;
|
|
099 \}
|
|
100
|
|
101 /* clear unused digits [that existed in the old copy of c] */
|
|
102 for (; ix < olduse; ix++) \{
|
|
103 *tmpb++ = 0;
|
|
104 \}
|
|
105 \}
|
|
106 mp_clamp (b);
|
|
107 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
108 \}
|
|
109 #endif
|
|
110
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This implementation is essentially a copy of Comba multiplication with the appropriate changes added to make it faster for
|
|
the special case of squaring.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Polynomial Basis Squaring}
|
|
The same algorithm that performs optimal polynomial basis multiplication can be used to perform polynomial basis squaring. The minor exception
|
|
is that $\zeta_y = f(y)g(y)$ is actually equivalent to $\zeta_y = f(y)^2$ since $f(y) = g(y)$. Instead of performing $2n + 1$
|
|
multiplications to find the $\zeta$ relations, squaring operations are performed instead.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Karatsuba Squaring}
|
|
Let $f(x) = ax + b$ represent the polynomial basis representation of a number to square.
|
|
Let $h(x) = \left ( f(x) \right )^2$ represent the square of the polynomial. The Karatsuba equation can be modified to square a
|
|
number with the following equation.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
h(x) = a^2x^2 + \left ((a + b)^2 - (a^2 + b^2) \right )x + b^2
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Upon closer inspection this equation only requires the calculation of three half-sized squares: $a^2$, $b^2$ and $(a + b)^2$. As in
|
|
Karatsuba multiplication, this algorithm can be applied recursively on the input and will achieve an asymptotic running time of
|
|
$O \left ( n^{lg(3)} \right )$.
|
|
|
|
If the asymptotic times of Karatsuba squaring and multiplication are the same, why not simply use the multiplication algorithm
|
|
instead? The answer to this arises from the cutoff point for squaring. As in multiplication there exists a cutoff point, at which the
|
|
time required for a Comba based squaring and a Karatsuba based squaring meet. Due to the overhead inherent in the Karatsuba method, the cutoff
|
|
point is fairly high. For example, on an AMD Athlon XP processor with $\beta = 2^{28}$, the cutoff point is around 127 digits.
|
|
|
|
Consider squaring a 200 digit number with this technique. It will be split into two 100 digit halves which are subsequently squared.
|
|
The 100 digit halves will not be squared using Karatsuba, but instead using the faster Comba based squaring algorithm. If Karatsuba multiplication
|
|
were used instead, the 100 digit numbers would be squared with a slower Comba based multiplication.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_karatsuba\_sqr}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $b \leftarrow a^2$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. Initialize the following temporary mp\_ints: $x0$, $x1$, $t1$, $t2$, $x0x0$ and $x1x1$. \\
|
|
2. If any of the initializations on step 1 failed return(\textit{MP\_MEM}). \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Split the input. e.g. $a = x1\beta^B + x0$ \\
|
|
3. $B \leftarrow \lfloor a.used / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
4. $x0 \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }\beta^B\mbox{)}$ (\textit{mp\_mod\_2d}) \\
|
|
5. $x1 \leftarrow \lfloor a / \beta^B \rfloor$ (\textit{mp\_lshd}) \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Calculate the three squares. \\
|
|
6. $x0x0 \leftarrow x0^2$ (\textit{mp\_sqr}) \\
|
|
7. $x1x1 \leftarrow x1^2$ \\
|
|
8. $t1 \leftarrow x1 + x0$ (\textit{s\_mp\_add}) \\
|
|
9. $t1 \leftarrow t1^2$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Compute the middle term. \\
|
|
10. $t2 \leftarrow x0x0 + x1x1$ (\textit{s\_mp\_add}) \\
|
|
11. $t1 \leftarrow t1 - t2$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Compute final product. \\
|
|
12. $t1 \leftarrow t1\beta^B$ (\textit{mp\_lshd}) \\
|
|
13. $x1x1 \leftarrow x1x1\beta^{2B}$ \\
|
|
14. $t1 \leftarrow t1 + x0x0$ \\
|
|
15. $b \leftarrow t1 + x1x1$ \\
|
|
16. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_karatsuba\_sqr}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_karatsuba\_sqr.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the square of an input $a$ using the Karatsuba technique. This algorithm is very similar to the Karatsuba based
|
|
multiplication algorithm with the exception that the three half-size multiplications have been replaced with three half-size squarings.
|
|
|
|
The radix point for squaring is simply placed exactly in the middle of the digits when the input has an odd number of digits, otherwise it is
|
|
placed just below the middle. Step 3, 4 and 5 compute the two halves required using $B$
|
|
as the radix point. The first two squares in steps 6 and 7 are rather straightforward while the last square is of a more compact form.
|
|
|
|
By expanding $\left (x1 + x0 \right )^2$, the $x1^2$ and $x0^2$ terms in the middle disappear, that is $(x0 - x1)^2 - (x1^2 + x0^2) = 2 \cdot x0 \cdot x1$.
|
|
Now if $5n$ single precision additions and a squaring of $n$-digits is faster than multiplying two $n$-digit numbers and doubling then
|
|
this method is faster. Assuming no further recursions occur, the difference can be estimated with the following inequality.
|
|
|
|
Let $p$ represent the cost of a single precision addition and $q$ the cost of a single precision multiplication both in terms of time\footnote{Or
|
|
machine clock cycles.}.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
5pn +{{q(n^2 + n)} \over 2} \le pn + qn^2
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
For example, on an AMD Athlon XP processor $p = {1 \over 3}$ and $q = 6$. This implies that the following inequality should hold.
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{rcl}
|
|
${5n \over 3} + 3n^2 + 3n$ & $<$ & ${n \over 3} + 6n^2$ \\
|
|
${5 \over 3} + 3n + 3$ & $<$ & ${1 \over 3} + 6n$ \\
|
|
${13 \over 9}$ & $<$ & $n$ \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
This results in a cutoff point around $n = 2$. As a consequence it is actually faster to compute the middle term the ``long way'' on processors
|
|
where multiplication is substantially slower\footnote{On the Athlon there is a 1:17 ratio between clock cycles for addition and multiplication. On
|
|
the Intel P4 processor this ratio is 1:29 making this method even more beneficial. The only common exception is the ARMv4 processor which has a
|
|
ratio of 1:7. } than simpler operations such as addition.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_karatsuba\_sqr.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* Karatsuba squaring, computes b = a*a using three
|
|
018 * half size squarings
|
|
019 *
|
|
020 * See comments of karatsuba_mul for details. It
|
|
021 * is essentially the same algorithm but merely
|
|
022 * tuned to perform recursive squarings.
|
|
023 */
|
|
024 int mp_karatsuba_sqr (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
025 \{
|
|
026 mp_int x0, x1, t1, t2, x0x0, x1x1;
|
|
027 int B, err;
|
|
028
|
|
029 err = MP_MEM;
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* min # of digits */
|
|
032 B = a->used;
|
|
033
|
|
034 /* now divide in two */
|
|
035 B = B >> 1;
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* init copy all the temps */
|
|
038 if (mp_init_size (&x0, B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
039 goto ERR;
|
|
040 if (mp_init_size (&x1, a->used - B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
041 goto X0;
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* init temps */
|
|
044 if (mp_init_size (&t1, a->used * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
045 goto X1;
|
|
046 if (mp_init_size (&t2, a->used * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
047 goto T1;
|
|
048 if (mp_init_size (&x0x0, B * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
049 goto T2;
|
|
050 if (mp_init_size (&x1x1, (a->used - B) * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
051 goto X0X0;
|
|
052
|
|
053 \{
|
|
054 register int x;
|
|
055 register mp_digit *dst, *src;
|
|
056
|
|
057 src = a->dp;
|
|
058
|
|
059 /* now shift the digits */
|
|
060 dst = x0.dp;
|
|
061 for (x = 0; x < B; x++) \{
|
|
062 *dst++ = *src++;
|
|
063 \}
|
|
064
|
|
065 dst = x1.dp;
|
|
066 for (x = B; x < a->used; x++) \{
|
|
067 *dst++ = *src++;
|
|
068 \}
|
|
069 \}
|
|
070
|
|
071 x0.used = B;
|
|
072 x1.used = a->used - B;
|
|
073
|
|
074 mp_clamp (&x0);
|
|
075
|
|
076 /* now calc the products x0*x0 and x1*x1 */
|
|
077 if (mp_sqr (&x0, &x0x0) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
078 goto X1X1; /* x0x0 = x0*x0 */
|
|
079 if (mp_sqr (&x1, &x1x1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
080 goto X1X1; /* x1x1 = x1*x1 */
|
|
081
|
|
082 /* now calc (x1+x0)**2 */
|
|
083 if (s_mp_add (&x1, &x0, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
084 goto X1X1; /* t1 = x1 - x0 */
|
|
085 if (mp_sqr (&t1, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
086 goto X1X1; /* t1 = (x1 - x0) * (x1 - x0) */
|
|
087
|
|
088 /* add x0y0 */
|
|
089 if (s_mp_add (&x0x0, &x1x1, &t2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
090 goto X1X1; /* t2 = x0x0 + x1x1 */
|
|
091 if (s_mp_sub (&t1, &t2, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
092 goto X1X1; /* t1 = (x1+x0)**2 - (x0x0 + x1x1) */
|
|
093
|
|
094 /* shift by B */
|
|
095 if (mp_lshd (&t1, B) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
096 goto X1X1; /* t1 = (x0x0 + x1x1 - (x1-x0)*(x1-x0))<<B */
|
|
097 if (mp_lshd (&x1x1, B * 2) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
098 goto X1X1; /* x1x1 = x1x1 << 2*B */
|
|
099
|
|
100 if (mp_add (&x0x0, &t1, &t1) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
101 goto X1X1; /* t1 = x0x0 + t1 */
|
|
102 if (mp_add (&t1, &x1x1, b) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
103 goto X1X1; /* t1 = x0x0 + t1 + x1x1 */
|
|
104
|
|
105 err = MP_OKAY;
|
|
106
|
|
107 X1X1:mp_clear (&x1x1);
|
|
108 X0X0:mp_clear (&x0x0);
|
|
109 T2:mp_clear (&t2);
|
|
110 T1:mp_clear (&t1);
|
|
111 X1:mp_clear (&x1);
|
|
112 X0:mp_clear (&x0);
|
|
113 ERR:
|
|
114 return err;
|
|
115 \}
|
|
116 #endif
|
|
117
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This implementation is largely based on the implementation of algorithm mp\_karatsuba\_mul. It uses the same inline style to copy and
|
|
shift the input into the two halves. The loop from line 53 to line 69 has been modified since only one input exists. The \textbf{used}
|
|
count of both $x0$ and $x1$ is fixed up and $x0$ is clamped before the calculations begin. At this point $x1$ and $x0$ are valid equivalents
|
|
to the respective halves as if mp\_rshd and mp\_mod\_2d had been used.
|
|
|
|
By inlining the copy and shift operations the cutoff point for Karatsuba multiplication can be lowered. On the Athlon the cutoff point
|
|
is exactly at the point where Comba squaring can no longer be used (\textit{128 digits}). On slower processors such as the Intel P4
|
|
it is actually below the Comba limit (\textit{at 110 digits}).
|
|
|
|
This routine uses the same error trap coding style as mp\_karatsuba\_sqr. As the temporary variables are initialized errors are
|
|
redirected to the error trap higher up. If the algorithm completes without error the error code is set to \textbf{MP\_OKAY} and
|
|
mp\_clears are executed normally.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Toom-Cook Squaring}
|
|
The Toom-Cook squaring algorithm mp\_toom\_sqr is heavily based on the algorithm mp\_toom\_mul with the exception that squarings are used
|
|
instead of multiplication to find the five relations. The reader is encouraged to read the description of the latter algorithm and try to
|
|
derive their own Toom-Cook squaring algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{High Level Squaring}
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_sqr}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $b \leftarrow a^2$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $a.used \ge TOOM\_SQR\_CUTOFF$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $b \leftarrow a^2$ using algorithm mp\_toom\_sqr \\
|
|
2. else if $a.used \ge KARATSUBA\_SQR\_CUTOFF$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $b \leftarrow a^2$ using algorithm mp\_karatsuba\_sqr \\
|
|
3. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $digs \leftarrow a.used + b.used + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.2 If $digs < MP\_ARRAY$ and $a.used \le \delta$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}3.2.1 $b \leftarrow a^2$ using algorithm fast\_s\_mp\_sqr. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.3 else \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}3.3.1 $b \leftarrow a^2$ using algorithm s\_mp\_sqr. \\
|
|
4. $b.sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
5. Return the result of the unsigned squaring performed. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_sqr}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_sqr.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the square of the input using one of four different algorithms. If the input is very large and has at least
|
|
\textbf{TOOM\_SQR\_CUTOFF} or \textbf{KARATSUBA\_SQR\_CUTOFF} digits then either the Toom-Cook or the Karatsuba Squaring algorithm is used. If
|
|
neither of the polynomial basis algorithms should be used then either the Comba or baseline algorithm is used.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_sqr.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* computes b = a*a */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_sqr (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int res;
|
|
022
|
|
023 #ifdef BN_MP_TOOM_SQR_C
|
|
024 /* use Toom-Cook? */
|
|
025 if (a->used >= TOOM_SQR_CUTOFF) \{
|
|
026 res = mp_toom_sqr(a, b);
|
|
027 /* Karatsuba? */
|
|
028 \} else
|
|
029 #endif
|
|
030 #ifdef BN_MP_KARATSUBA_SQR_C
|
|
031 if (a->used >= KARATSUBA_SQR_CUTOFF) \{
|
|
032 res = mp_karatsuba_sqr (a, b);
|
|
033 \} else
|
|
034 #endif
|
|
035 \{
|
|
036 #ifdef BN_FAST_S_MP_SQR_C
|
|
037 /* can we use the fast comba multiplier? */
|
|
038 if ((a->used * 2 + 1) < MP_WARRAY &&
|
|
039 a->used <
|
|
040 (1 << (sizeof(mp_word) * CHAR_BIT - 2*DIGIT_BIT - 1))) \{
|
|
041 res = fast_s_mp_sqr (a, b);
|
|
042 \} else
|
|
043 #endif
|
|
044 #ifdef BN_S_MP_SQR_C
|
|
045 res = s_mp_sqr (a, b);
|
|
046 #else
|
|
047 res = MP_VAL;
|
|
048 #endif
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050 b->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
051 return res;
|
|
052 \}
|
|
053 #endif
|
|
054
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\section*{Exercises}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{cl}
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ] $ & Devise an efficient algorithm for selection of the radix point to handle inputs \\
|
|
& that have different number of digits in Karatsuba multiplication. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ] $ & In section 5.3 the fact that every column of a squaring is made up \\
|
|
& of double products and at most one square is stated. Prove this statement. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ] $ & Prove the equation for Karatsuba squaring. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 1 \right ] $ & Prove that Karatsuba squaring requires $O \left (n^{lg(3)} \right )$ time. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ] $ & Determine the minimal ratio between addition and multiplication clock cycles \\
|
|
& required for equation $6.7$ to be true. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ] $ & Implement a threaded version of Comba multiplication (and squaring) where you \\
|
|
& compute subsets of the columns in each thread. Determine a cutoff point where \\
|
|
& it is effective and add the logic to mp\_mul() and mp\_sqr(). \\
|
|
&\\
|
|
$\left [ 4 \right ] $ & Same as the previous but also modify the Karatsuba and Toom-Cook. You must \\
|
|
& increase the throughput of mp\_exptmod() for random odd moduli in the range \\
|
|
& $512 \ldots 4096$ bits significantly ($> 2x$) to complete this challenge. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Modular Reduction}
|
|
\section{Basics of Modular Reduction}
|
|
\index{modular residue}
|
|
Modular reduction is an operation that arises quite often within public key cryptography algorithms and various number theoretic algorithms,
|
|
such as factoring. Modular reduction algorithms are the third class of algorithms of the ``multipliers'' set. A number $a$ is said to be \textit{reduced}
|
|
modulo another number $b$ by finding the remainder of the division $a/b$. Full integer division with remainder is a topic to be covered
|
|
in~\ref{sec:division}.
|
|
|
|
Modular reduction is equivalent to solving for $r$ in the following equation. $a = bq + r$ where $q = \lfloor a/b \rfloor$. The result
|
|
$r$ is said to be ``congruent to $a$ modulo $b$'' which is also written as $r \equiv a \mbox{ (mod }b\mbox{)}$. In other vernacular $r$ is known as the
|
|
``modular residue'' which leads to ``quadratic residue''\footnote{That's fancy talk for $b \equiv a^2 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$.} and
|
|
other forms of residues.
|
|
|
|
Modular reductions are normally used to create either finite groups, rings or fields. The most common usage for performance driven modular reductions
|
|
is in modular exponentiation algorithms. That is to compute $d = a^b \mbox{ (mod }c\mbox{)}$ as fast as possible. This operation is used in the
|
|
RSA and Diffie-Hellman public key algorithms, for example. Modular multiplication and squaring also appears as a fundamental operation in
|
|
elliptic curve cryptographic algorithms. As will be discussed in the subsequent chapter there exist fast algorithms for computing modular
|
|
exponentiations without having to perform (\textit{in this example}) $b - 1$ multiplications. These algorithms will produce partial results in the
|
|
range $0 \le x < c^2$ which can be taken advantage of to create several efficient algorithms. They have also been used to create redundancy check
|
|
algorithms known as CRCs, error correction codes such as Reed-Solomon and solve a variety of number theoeretic problems.
|
|
|
|
\section{The Barrett Reduction}
|
|
The Barrett reduction algorithm \cite{BARRETT} was inspired by fast division algorithms which multiply by the reciprocal to emulate
|
|
division. Barretts observation was that the residue $c$ of $a$ modulo $b$ is equal to
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
c = a - b \cdot \lfloor a/b \rfloor
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Since algorithms such as modular exponentiation would be using the same modulus extensively, typical DSP\footnote{It is worth noting that Barrett's paper
|
|
targeted the DSP56K processor.} intuition would indicate the next step would be to replace $a/b$ by a multiplication by the reciprocal. However,
|
|
DSP intuition on its own will not work as these numbers are considerably larger than the precision of common DSP floating point data types.
|
|
It would take another common optimization to optimize the algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Fixed Point Arithmetic}
|
|
The trick used to optimize the above equation is based on a technique of emulating floating point data types with fixed precision integers. Fixed
|
|
point arithmetic would become very popular as it greatly optimize the ``3d-shooter'' genre of games in the mid 1990s when floating point units were
|
|
fairly slow if not unavailable. The idea behind fixed point arithmetic is to take a normal $k$-bit integer data type and break it into $p$-bit
|
|
integer and a $q$-bit fraction part (\textit{where $p+q = k$}).
|
|
|
|
In this system a $k$-bit integer $n$ would actually represent $n/2^q$. For example, with $q = 4$ the integer $n = 37$ would actually represent the
|
|
value $2.3125$. To multiply two fixed point numbers the integers are multiplied using traditional arithmetic and subsequently normalized by
|
|
moving the implied decimal point back to where it should be. For example, with $q = 4$ to multiply the integers $9$ and $5$ they must be converted
|
|
to fixed point first by multiplying by $2^q$. Let $a = 9(2^q)$ represent the fixed point representation of $9$ and $b = 5(2^q)$ represent the
|
|
fixed point representation of $5$. The product $ab$ is equal to $45(2^{2q})$ which when normalized by dividing by $2^q$ produces $45(2^q)$.
|
|
|
|
This technique became popular since a normal integer multiplication and logical shift right are the only required operations to perform a multiplication
|
|
of two fixed point numbers. Using fixed point arithmetic, division can be easily approximated by multiplying by the reciprocal. If $2^q$ is
|
|
equivalent to one than $2^q/b$ is equivalent to the fixed point approximation of $1/b$ using real arithmetic. Using this fact dividing an integer
|
|
$a$ by another integer $b$ can be achieved with the following expression.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
\lfloor a / b \rfloor \mbox{ }\approx\mbox{ } \lfloor (a \cdot \lfloor 2^q / b \rfloor)/2^q \rfloor
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
The precision of the division is proportional to the value of $q$. If the divisor $b$ is used frequently as is the case with
|
|
modular exponentiation pre-computing $2^q/b$ will allow a division to be performed with a multiplication and a right shift. Both operations
|
|
are considerably faster than division on most processors.
|
|
|
|
Consider dividing $19$ by $5$. The correct result is $\lfloor 19/5 \rfloor = 3$. With $q = 3$ the reciprocal is $\lfloor 2^q/5 \rfloor = 1$ which
|
|
leads to a product of $19$ which when divided by $2^q$ produces $2$. However, with $q = 4$ the reciprocal is $\lfloor 2^q/5 \rfloor = 3$ and
|
|
the result of the emulated division is $\lfloor 3 \cdot 19 / 2^q \rfloor = 3$ which is correct. The value of $2^q$ must be close to or ideally
|
|
larger than the dividend. In effect if $a$ is the dividend then $q$ should allow $0 \le \lfloor a/2^q \rfloor \le 1$ in order for this approach
|
|
to work correctly. Plugging this form of divison into the original equation the following modular residue equation arises.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
c = a - b \cdot \lfloor (a \cdot \lfloor 2^q / b \rfloor)/2^q \rfloor
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Using the notation from \cite{BARRETT} the value of $\lfloor 2^q / b \rfloor$ will be represented by the $\mu$ symbol. Using the $\mu$
|
|
variable also helps re-inforce the idea that it is meant to be computed once and re-used.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
c = a - b \cdot \lfloor (a \cdot \mu)/2^q \rfloor
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Provided that $2^q \ge a$ this algorithm will produce a quotient that is either exactly correct or off by a value of one. In the context of Barrett
|
|
reduction the value of $a$ is bound by $0 \le a \le (b - 1)^2$ meaning that $2^q \ge b^2$ is sufficient to ensure the reciprocal will have enough
|
|
precision.
|
|
|
|
Let $n$ represent the number of digits in $b$. This algorithm requires approximately $2n^2$ single precision multiplications to produce the quotient and
|
|
another $n^2$ single precision multiplications to find the residue. In total $3n^2$ single precision multiplications are required to
|
|
reduce the number.
|
|
|
|
For example, if $b = 1179677$ and $q = 41$ ($2^q > b^2$), then the reciprocal $\mu$ is equal to $\lfloor 2^q / b \rfloor = 1864089$. Consider reducing
|
|
$a = 180388626447$ modulo $b$ using the above reduction equation. The quotient using the new formula is $\lfloor (a \cdot \mu) / 2^q \rfloor = 152913$.
|
|
By subtracting $152913b$ from $a$ the correct residue $a \equiv 677346 \mbox{ (mod }b\mbox{)}$ is found.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Choosing a Radix Point}
|
|
Using the fixed point representation a modular reduction can be performed with $3n^2$ single precision multiplications. If that were the best
|
|
that could be achieved a full division\footnote{A division requires approximately $O(2cn^2)$ single precision multiplications for a small value of $c$.
|
|
See~\ref{sec:division} for further details.} might as well be used in its place. The key to optimizing the reduction is to reduce the precision of
|
|
the initial multiplication that finds the quotient.
|
|
|
|
Let $a$ represent the number of which the residue is sought. Let $b$ represent the modulus used to find the residue. Let $m$ represent
|
|
the number of digits in $b$. For the purposes of this discussion we will assume that the number of digits in $a$ is $2m$, which is generally true if
|
|
two $m$-digit numbers have been multiplied. Dividing $a$ by $b$ is the same as dividing a $2m$ digit integer by a $m$ digit integer. Digits below the
|
|
$m - 1$'th digit of $a$ will contribute at most a value of $1$ to the quotient because $\beta^k < b$ for any $0 \le k \le m - 1$. Another way to
|
|
express this is by re-writing $a$ as two parts. If $a' \equiv a \mbox{ (mod }b^m\mbox{)}$ and $a'' = a - a'$ then
|
|
${a \over b} \equiv {{a' + a''} \over b}$ which is equivalent to ${a' \over b} + {a'' \over b}$. Since $a'$ is bound to be less than $b$ the quotient
|
|
is bound by $0 \le {a' \over b} < 1$.
|
|
|
|
Since the digits of $a'$ do not contribute much to the quotient the observation is that they might as well be zero. However, if the digits
|
|
``might as well be zero'' they might as well not be there in the first place. Let $q_0 = \lfloor a/\beta^{m-1} \rfloor$ represent the input
|
|
with the irrelevant digits trimmed. Now the modular reduction is trimmed to the almost equivalent equation
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
c = a - b \cdot \lfloor (q_0 \cdot \mu) / \beta^{m+1} \rfloor
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Note that the original divisor $2^q$ has been replaced with $\beta^{m+1}$ where in this case $q$ is a multiple of $lg(\beta)$. Also note that the
|
|
exponent on the divisor when added to the amount $q_0$ was shifted by equals $2m$. If the optimization had not been performed the divisor
|
|
would have the exponent $2m$ so in the end the exponents do ``add up''. Using the above equation the quotient
|
|
$\lfloor (q_0 \cdot \mu) / \beta^{m+1} \rfloor$ can be off from the true quotient by at most two. The original fixed point quotient can be off
|
|
by as much as one (\textit{provided the radix point is chosen suitably}) and now that the lower irrelevent digits have been trimmed the quotient
|
|
can be off by an additional value of one for a total of at most two. This implies that
|
|
$0 \le a - b \cdot \lfloor (q_0 \cdot \mu) / \beta^{m+1} \rfloor < 3b$. By first subtracting $b$ times the quotient and then conditionally subtracting
|
|
$b$ once or twice the residue is found.
|
|
|
|
The quotient is now found using $(m + 1)(m) = m^2 + m$ single precision multiplications and the residue with an additional $m^2$ single
|
|
precision multiplications, ignoring the subtractions required. In total $2m^2 + m$ single precision multiplications are required to find the residue.
|
|
This is considerably faster than the original attempt.
|
|
|
|
For example, let $\beta = 10$ represent the radix of the digits. Let $b = 9999$ represent the modulus which implies $m = 4$. Let $a = 99929878$
|
|
represent the value of which the residue is desired. In this case $q = 8$ since $10^7 < 9999^2$ meaning that $\mu = \lfloor \beta^{q}/b \rfloor = 10001$.
|
|
With the new observation the multiplicand for the quotient is equal to $q_0 = \lfloor a / \beta^{m - 1} \rfloor = 99929$. The quotient is then
|
|
$\lfloor (q_0 \cdot \mu) / \beta^{m+1} \rfloor = 9993$. Subtracting $9993b$ from $a$ and the correct residue $a \equiv 9871 \mbox{ (mod }b\mbox{)}$
|
|
is found.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Trimming the Quotient}
|
|
So far the reduction algorithm has been optimized from $3m^2$ single precision multiplications down to $2m^2 + m$ single precision multiplications. As
|
|
it stands now the algorithm is already fairly fast compared to a full integer division algorithm. However, there is still room for
|
|
optimization.
|
|
|
|
After the first multiplication inside the quotient ($q_0 \cdot \mu$) the value is shifted right by $m + 1$ places effectively nullifying the lower
|
|
half of the product. It would be nice to be able to remove those digits from the product to effectively cut down the number of single precision
|
|
multiplications. If the number of digits in the modulus $m$ is far less than $\beta$ a full product is not required for the algorithm to work properly.
|
|
In fact the lower $m - 2$ digits will not affect the upper half of the product at all and do not need to be computed.
|
|
|
|
The value of $\mu$ is a $m$-digit number and $q_0$ is a $m + 1$ digit number. Using a full multiplier $(m + 1)(m) = m^2 + m$ single precision
|
|
multiplications would be required. Using a multiplier that will only produce digits at and above the $m - 1$'th digit reduces the number
|
|
of single precision multiplications to ${m^2 + m} \over 2$ single precision multiplications.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Trimming the Residue}
|
|
After the quotient has been calculated it is used to reduce the input. As previously noted the algorithm is not exact and it can be off by a small
|
|
multiple of the modulus, that is $0 \le a - b \cdot \lfloor (q_0 \cdot \mu) / \beta^{m+1} \rfloor < 3b$. If $b$ is $m$ digits than the
|
|
result of reduction equation is a value of at most $m + 1$ digits (\textit{provided $3 < \beta$}) implying that the upper $m - 1$ digits are
|
|
implicitly zero.
|
|
|
|
The next optimization arises from this very fact. Instead of computing $b \cdot \lfloor (q_0 \cdot \mu) / \beta^{m+1} \rfloor$ using a full
|
|
$O(m^2)$ multiplication algorithm only the lower $m+1$ digits of the product have to be computed. Similarly the value of $a$ can
|
|
be reduced modulo $\beta^{m+1}$ before the multiple of $b$ is subtracted which simplifes the subtraction as well. A multiplication that produces
|
|
only the lower $m+1$ digits requires ${m^2 + 3m - 2} \over 2$ single precision multiplications.
|
|
|
|
With both optimizations in place the algorithm is the algorithm Barrett proposed. It requires $m^2 + 2m - 1$ single precision multiplications which
|
|
is considerably faster than the straightforward $3m^2$ method.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{The Barrett Algorithm}
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_reduce}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$, mp\_int $b$ and $\mu = \lfloor \beta^{2m}/b \rfloor, m = \lceil lg_{\beta}(b) \rceil, (0 \le a < b^2, b > 1)$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a \mbox{ (mod }b\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
Let $m$ represent the number of digits in $b$. \\
|
|
1. Make a copy of $a$ and store it in $q$. (\textit{mp\_init\_copy}) \\
|
|
2. $q \leftarrow \lfloor q / \beta^{m - 1} \rfloor$ (\textit{mp\_rshd}) \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Produce the quotient. \\
|
|
3. $q \leftarrow q \cdot \mu$ (\textit{note: only produce digits at or above $m-1$}) \\
|
|
4. $q \leftarrow \lfloor q / \beta^{m + 1} \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Subtract the multiple of modulus from the input. \\
|
|
5. $a \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{m+1}\mbox{)}$ (\textit{mp\_mod\_2d}) \\
|
|
6. $q \leftarrow q \cdot b \mbox{ (mod }\beta^{m+1}\mbox{)}$ (\textit{s\_mp\_mul\_digs}) \\
|
|
7. $a \leftarrow a - q$ (\textit{mp\_sub}) \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Add $\beta^{m+1}$ if a carry occured. \\
|
|
8. If $a < 0$ then (\textit{mp\_cmp\_d}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $q \leftarrow 1$ (\textit{mp\_set}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.2 $q \leftarrow q \cdot \beta^{m+1}$ (\textit{mp\_lshd}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.3 $a \leftarrow a + q$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Now subtract the modulus if the residue is too large (e.g. quotient too small). \\
|
|
9. While $a \ge b$ do (\textit{mp\_cmp}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 $c \leftarrow a - b$ \\
|
|
10. Clear $q$. \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_reduce}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_reduce.}
|
|
This algorithm will reduce the input $a$ modulo $b$ in place using the Barrett algorithm. It is loosely based on algorithm 14.42 of HAC
|
|
\cite[pp. 602]{HAC} which is based on the paper from Paul Barrett \cite{BARRETT}. The algorithm has several restrictions and assumptions which must
|
|
be adhered to for the algorithm to work.
|
|
|
|
First the modulus $b$ is assumed to be positive and greater than one. If the modulus were less than or equal to one than subtracting
|
|
a multiple of it would either accomplish nothing or actually enlarge the input. The input $a$ must be in the range $0 \le a < b^2$ in order
|
|
for the quotient to have enough precision. If $a$ is the product of two numbers that were already reduced modulo $b$, this will not be a problem.
|
|
Technically the algorithm will still work if $a \ge b^2$ but it will take much longer to finish. The value of $\mu$ is passed as an argument to this
|
|
algorithm and is assumed to be calculated and stored before the algorithm is used.
|
|
|
|
Recall that the multiplication for the quotient on step 3 must only produce digits at or above the $m-1$'th position. An algorithm called
|
|
$s\_mp\_mul\_high\_digs$ which has not been presented is used to accomplish this task. The algorithm is based on $s\_mp\_mul\_digs$ except that
|
|
instead of stopping at a given level of precision it starts at a given level of precision. This optimal algorithm can only be used if the number
|
|
of digits in $b$ is very much smaller than $\beta$.
|
|
|
|
While it is known that
|
|
$a \ge b \cdot \lfloor (q_0 \cdot \mu) / \beta^{m+1} \rfloor$ only the lower $m+1$ digits are being used to compute the residue, so an implied
|
|
``borrow'' from the higher digits might leave a negative result. After the multiple of the modulus has been subtracted from $a$ the residue must be
|
|
fixed up in case it is negative. The invariant $\beta^{m+1}$ must be added to the residue to make it positive again.
|
|
|
|
The while loop at step 9 will subtract $b$ until the residue is less than $b$. If the algorithm is performed correctly this step is
|
|
performed at most twice, and on average once. However, if $a \ge b^2$ than it will iterate substantially more times than it should.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_reduce.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* reduces x mod m, assumes 0 < x < m**2, mu is
|
|
018 * precomputed via mp_reduce_setup.
|
|
019 * From HAC pp.604 Algorithm 14.42
|
|
020 */
|
|
021 int mp_reduce (mp_int * x, mp_int * m, mp_int * mu)
|
|
022 \{
|
|
023 mp_int q;
|
|
024 int res, um = m->used;
|
|
025
|
|
026 /* q = x */
|
|
027 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&q, x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
028 return res;
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* q1 = x / b**(k-1) */
|
|
032 mp_rshd (&q, um - 1);
|
|
033
|
|
034 /* according to HAC this optimization is ok */
|
|
035 if (((unsigned long) um) > (((mp_digit)1) << (DIGIT_BIT - 1))) \{
|
|
036 if ((res = mp_mul (&q, mu, &q)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
037 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039 \} else \{
|
|
040 #ifdef BN_S_MP_MUL_HIGH_DIGS_C
|
|
041 if ((res = s_mp_mul_high_digs (&q, mu, &q, um)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
042 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044 #elif defined(BN_FAST_S_MP_MUL_HIGH_DIGS_C)
|
|
045 if ((res = fast_s_mp_mul_high_digs (&q, mu, &q, um)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
046 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
047 \}
|
|
048 #else
|
|
049 \{
|
|
050 res = MP_VAL;
|
|
051 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
052 \}
|
|
053 #endif
|
|
054 \}
|
|
055
|
|
056 /* q3 = q2 / b**(k+1) */
|
|
057 mp_rshd (&q, um + 1);
|
|
058
|
|
059 /* x = x mod b**(k+1), quick (no division) */
|
|
060 if ((res = mp_mod_2d (x, DIGIT_BIT * (um + 1), x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
061 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
062 \}
|
|
063
|
|
064 /* q = q * m mod b**(k+1), quick (no division) */
|
|
065 if ((res = s_mp_mul_digs (&q, m, &q, um + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
066 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
067 \}
|
|
068
|
|
069 /* x = x - q */
|
|
070 if ((res = mp_sub (x, &q, x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
071 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073
|
|
074 /* If x < 0, add b**(k+1) to it */
|
|
075 if (mp_cmp_d (x, 0) == MP_LT) \{
|
|
076 mp_set (&q, 1);
|
|
077 if ((res = mp_lshd (&q, um + 1)) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
078 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
079 if ((res = mp_add (x, &q, x)) != MP_OKAY)
|
|
080 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
081 \}
|
|
082
|
|
083 /* Back off if it's too big */
|
|
084 while (mp_cmp (x, m) != MP_LT) \{
|
|
085 if ((res = s_mp_sub (x, m, x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
086 goto CLEANUP;
|
|
087 \}
|
|
088 \}
|
|
089
|
|
090 CLEANUP:
|
|
091 mp_clear (&q);
|
|
092
|
|
093 return res;
|
|
094 \}
|
|
095 #endif
|
|
096
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The first multiplication that determines the quotient can be performed by only producing the digits from $m - 1$ and up. This essentially halves
|
|
the number of single precision multiplications required. However, the optimization is only safe if $\beta$ is much larger than the number of digits
|
|
in the modulus. In the source code this is evaluated on lines 36 to 43 where algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_high\_digs is used when it is
|
|
safe to do so.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{The Barrett Setup Algorithm}
|
|
In order to use algorithm mp\_reduce the value of $\mu$ must be calculated in advance. Ideally this value should be computed once and stored for
|
|
future use so that the Barrett algorithm can be used without delay.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_reduce\_setup}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ ($a > 1$) \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $\mu \leftarrow \lfloor \beta^{2m}/a \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $\mu \leftarrow 2^{2 \cdot lg(\beta) \cdot m}$ (\textit{mp\_2expt}) \\
|
|
2. $\mu \leftarrow \lfloor \mu / b \rfloor$ (\textit{mp\_div}) \\
|
|
3. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_setup}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_setup.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the reciprocal $\mu$ required for Barrett reduction. First $\beta^{2m}$ is calculated as $2^{2 \cdot lg(\beta) \cdot m}$ which
|
|
is equivalent and much faster. The final value is computed by taking the integer quotient of $\lfloor \mu / b \rfloor$.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_reduce\_setup.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* pre-calculate the value required for Barrett reduction
|
|
018 * For a given modulus "b" it calulates the value required in "a"
|
|
019 */
|
|
020 int mp_reduce_setup (mp_int * a, mp_int * b)
|
|
021 \{
|
|
022 int res;
|
|
023
|
|
024 if ((res = mp_2expt (a, b->used * 2 * DIGIT_BIT)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
025 return res;
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027 return mp_div (a, b, a, NULL);
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029 #endif
|
|
030
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This simple routine calculates the reciprocal $\mu$ required by Barrett reduction. Note the extended usage of algorithm mp\_div where the variable
|
|
which would received the remainder is passed as NULL. As will be discussed in~\ref{sec:division} the division routine allows both the quotient and the
|
|
remainder to be passed as NULL meaning to ignore the value.
|
|
|
|
\section{The Montgomery Reduction}
|
|
Montgomery reduction\footnote{Thanks to Niels Ferguson for his insightful explanation of the algorithm.} \cite{MONT} is by far the most interesting
|
|
form of reduction in common use. It computes a modular residue which is not actually equal to the residue of the input yet instead equal to a
|
|
residue times a constant. However, as perplexing as this may sound the algorithm is relatively simple and very efficient.
|
|
|
|
Throughout this entire section the variable $n$ will represent the modulus used to form the residue. As will be discussed shortly the value of
|
|
$n$ must be odd. The variable $x$ will represent the quantity of which the residue is sought. Similar to the Barrett algorithm the input
|
|
is restricted to $0 \le x < n^2$. To begin the description some simple number theory facts must be established.
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Fact 1.} Adding $n$ to $x$ does not change the residue since in effect it adds one to the quotient $\lfloor x / n \rfloor$. Another way
|
|
to explain this is that $n$ is (\textit{or multiples of $n$ are}) congruent to zero modulo $n$. Adding zero will not change the value of the residue.
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Fact 2.} If $x$ is even then performing a division by two in $\Z$ is congruent to $x \cdot 2^{-1} \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$. Actually
|
|
this is an application of the fact that if $x$ is evenly divisible by any $k \in \Z$ then division in $\Z$ will be congruent to
|
|
multiplication by $k^{-1}$ modulo $n$.
|
|
|
|
From these two simple facts the following simple algorithm can be derived.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Montgomery Reduction}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Integer $x$, $n$ and $k$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $2^{-k}x \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. for $t$ from $1$ to $k$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 If $x$ is odd then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}1.1.1 $x \leftarrow x + n$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 $x \leftarrow x/2$ \\
|
|
2. Return $x$. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Montgomery Reduction}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
The algorithm reduces the input one bit at a time using the two congruencies stated previously. Inside the loop $n$, which is odd, is
|
|
added to $x$ if $x$ is odd. This forces $x$ to be even which allows the division by two in $\Z$ to be congruent to a modular division by two. Since
|
|
$x$ is assumed to be initially much larger than $n$ the addition of $n$ will contribute an insignificant magnitude to $x$. Let $r$ represent the
|
|
final result of the Montgomery algorithm. If $k > lg(n)$ and $0 \le x < n^2$ then the final result is limited to
|
|
$0 \le r < \lfloor x/2^k \rfloor + n$. As a result at most a single subtraction is required to get the residue desired.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|l|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Step number ($t$)} & \textbf{Result ($x$)} \\
|
|
\hline $1$ & $x + n = 5812$, $x/2 = 2906$ \\
|
|
\hline $2$ & $x/2 = 1453$ \\
|
|
\hline $3$ & $x + n = 1710$, $x/2 = 855$ \\
|
|
\hline $4$ & $x + n = 1112$, $x/2 = 556$ \\
|
|
\hline $5$ & $x/2 = 278$ \\
|
|
\hline $6$ & $x/2 = 139$ \\
|
|
\hline $7$ & $x + n = 396$, $x/2 = 198$ \\
|
|
\hline $8$ & $x/2 = 99$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Example of Montgomery Reduction (I)}
|
|
\label{fig:MONT1}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Consider the example in figure~\ref{fig:MONT1} which reduces $x = 5555$ modulo $n = 257$ when $k = 8$. The result of the algorithm $r = 99$ is
|
|
congruent to the value of $2^{-8} \cdot 5555 \mbox{ (mod }257\mbox{)}$. When $r$ is multiplied by $2^8$ modulo $257$ the correct residue
|
|
$r \equiv 158$ is produced.
|
|
|
|
Let $k = \lfloor lg(n) \rfloor + 1$ represent the number of bits in $n$. The current algorithm requires $2k^2$ single precision shifts
|
|
and $k^2$ single precision additions. At this rate the algorithm is most certainly slower than Barrett reduction and not terribly useful.
|
|
Fortunately there exists an alternative representation of the algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Montgomery Reduction} (modified I). \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Integer $x$, $n$ and $k$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $2^{-k}x \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. for $t$ from $0$ to $k - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 If the $t$'th bit of $x$ is one then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}1.1.1 $x \leftarrow x + 2^tn$ \\
|
|
2. Return $x/2^k$. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Montgomery Reduction (modified I)}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
This algorithm is equivalent since $2^tn$ is a multiple of $n$ and the lower $k$ bits of $x$ are zero by step 2. The number of single
|
|
precision shifts has now been reduced from $2k^2$ to $k^2 + k$ which is only a small improvement.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|l|r|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Step number ($t$)} & \textbf{Result ($x$)} & \textbf{Result ($x$) in Binary} \\
|
|
\hline -- & $5555$ & $1010110110011$ \\
|
|
\hline $1$ & $x + 2^{0}n = 5812$ & $1011010110100$ \\
|
|
\hline $2$ & $5812$ & $1011010110100$ \\
|
|
\hline $3$ & $x + 2^{2}n = 6840$ & $1101010111000$ \\
|
|
\hline $4$ & $x + 2^{3}n = 8896$ & $10001011000000$ \\
|
|
\hline $5$ & $8896$ & $10001011000000$ \\
|
|
\hline $6$ & $8896$ & $10001011000000$ \\
|
|
\hline $7$ & $x + 2^{6}n = 25344$ & $110001100000000$ \\
|
|
\hline $8$ & $25344$ & $110001100000000$ \\
|
|
\hline -- & $x/2^k = 99$ & \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Example of Montgomery Reduction (II)}
|
|
\label{fig:MONT2}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Figure~\ref{fig:MONT2} demonstrates the modified algorithm reducing $x = 5555$ modulo $n = 257$ with $k = 8$.
|
|
With this algorithm a single shift right at the end is the only right shift required to reduce the input instead of $k$ right shifts inside the
|
|
loop. Note that for the iterations $t = 2, 5, 6$ and $8$ where the result $x$ is not changed. In those iterations the $t$'th bit of $x$ is
|
|
zero and the appropriate multiple of $n$ does not need to be added to force the $t$'th bit of the result to zero.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Digit Based Montgomery Reduction}
|
|
Instead of computing the reduction on a bit-by-bit basis it is actually much faster to compute it on digit-by-digit basis. Consider the
|
|
previous algorithm re-written to compute the Montgomery reduction in this new fashion.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Montgomery Reduction} (modified II). \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Integer $x$, $n$ and $k$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $\beta^{-k}x \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. for $t$ from $0$ to $k - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $x \leftarrow x + \mu n \beta^t$ \\
|
|
2. Return $x/\beta^k$. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Montgomery Reduction (modified II)}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
The value $\mu n \beta^t$ is a multiple of the modulus $n$ meaning that it will not change the residue. If the first digit of
|
|
the value $\mu n \beta^t$ equals the negative (modulo $\beta$) of the $t$'th digit of $x$ then the addition will result in a zero digit. This
|
|
problem breaks down to solving the following congruency.
|
|
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{rcl}
|
|
$x_t + \mu n_0$ & $\equiv$ & $0 \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
$\mu n_0$ & $\equiv$ & $-x_t \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
$\mu$ & $\equiv$ & $-x_t/n_0 \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
In each iteration of the loop on step 1 a new value of $\mu$ must be calculated. The value of $-1/n_0 \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ is used
|
|
extensively in this algorithm and should be precomputed. Let $\rho$ represent the negative of the modular inverse of $n_0$ modulo $\beta$.
|
|
|
|
For example, let $\beta = 10$ represent the radix. Let $n = 17$ represent the modulus which implies $k = 2$ and $\rho \equiv 7$. Let $x = 33$
|
|
represent the value to reduce.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Step ($t$)} & \textbf{Value of $x$} & \textbf{Value of $\mu$} \\
|
|
\hline -- & $33$ & --\\
|
|
\hline $0$ & $33 + \mu n = 50$ & $1$ \\
|
|
\hline $1$ & $50 + \mu n \beta = 900$ & $5$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Example of Montgomery Reduction}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
The final result $900$ is then divided by $\beta^k$ to produce the final result $9$. The first observation is that $9 \nequiv x \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$
|
|
which implies the result is not the modular residue of $x$ modulo $n$. However, recall that the residue is actually multiplied by $\beta^{-k}$ in
|
|
the algorithm. To get the true residue the value must be multiplied by $\beta^k$. In this case $\beta^k \equiv 15 \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ and
|
|
the correct residue is $9 \cdot 15 \equiv 16 \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Baseline Montgomery Reduction}
|
|
The baseline Montgomery reduction algorithm will produce the residue for any size input. It is designed to be a catch-all algororithm for
|
|
Montgomery reductions.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_montgomery\_reduce}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $x$, mp\_int $n$ and a digit $\rho \equiv -1/n_0 \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
\hspace{11.5mm}($0 \le x < n^2, n > 1, (n, \beta) = 1, \beta^k > n$) \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $\beta^{-k}x \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $digs \leftarrow 2n.used + 1$ \\
|
|
2. If $digs < MP\_ARRAY$ and $m.used < \delta$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 Use algorithm fast\_mp\_montgomery\_reduce instead. \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Setup $x$ for the reduction. \\
|
|
3. If $x.alloc < digs$ then grow $x$ to $digs$ digits. \\
|
|
4. $x.used \leftarrow digs$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Eliminate the lower $k$ digits. \\
|
|
5. For $ix$ from $0$ to $k - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $\mu \leftarrow x_{ix} \cdot \rho \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $u \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 For $iy$ from $0$ to $k - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.3.1 $\hat r \leftarrow \mu n_{iy} + x_{ix + iy} + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.3.2 $x_{ix + iy} \leftarrow \hat r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.3.3 $u \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.4 While $u > 0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.1 $iy \leftarrow iy + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.2 $x_{ix + iy} \leftarrow x_{ix + iy} + u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.3 $u \leftarrow \lfloor x_{ix+iy} / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.4.4 $x_{ix + iy} \leftarrow x_{ix+iy} \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Divide by $\beta^k$ and fix up as required. \\
|
|
6. $x \leftarrow \lfloor x / \beta^k \rfloor$ \\
|
|
7. If $x \ge n$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $x \leftarrow x - n$ \\
|
|
8. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_montgomery\_reduce}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_montgomery\_reduce.}
|
|
This algorithm reduces the input $x$ modulo $n$ in place using the Montgomery reduction algorithm. The algorithm is loosely based
|
|
on algorithm 14.32 of \cite[pp.601]{HAC} except it merges the multiplication of $\mu n \beta^t$ with the addition in the inner loop. The
|
|
restrictions on this algorithm are fairly easy to adapt to. First $0 \le x < n^2$ bounds the input to numbers in the same range as
|
|
for the Barrett algorithm. Additionally if $n > 1$ and $n$ is odd there will exist a modular inverse $\rho$. $\rho$ must be calculated in
|
|
advance of this algorithm. Finally the variable $k$ is fixed and a pseudonym for $n.used$.
|
|
|
|
Step 2 decides whether a faster Montgomery algorithm can be used. It is based on the Comba technique meaning that there are limits on
|
|
the size of the input. This algorithm is discussed in sub-section 6.3.3.
|
|
|
|
Step 5 is the main reduction loop of the algorithm. The value of $\mu$ is calculated once per iteration in the outer loop. The inner loop
|
|
calculates $x + \mu n \beta^{ix}$ by multiplying $\mu n$ and adding the result to $x$ shifted by $ix$ digits. Both the addition and
|
|
multiplication are performed in the same loop to save time and memory. Step 5.4 will handle any additional carries that escape the inner loop.
|
|
|
|
Using a quick inspection this algorithm requires $n$ single precision multiplications for the outer loop and $n^2$ single precision multiplications
|
|
in the inner loop. In total $n^2 + n$ single precision multiplications which compares favourably to Barrett at $n^2 + 2n - 1$ single precision
|
|
multiplications.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_montgomery\_reduce.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* computes xR**-1 == x (mod N) via Montgomery Reduction */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_montgomery_reduce (mp_int * x, mp_int * n, mp_digit rho)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int ix, res, digs;
|
|
022 mp_digit mu;
|
|
023
|
|
024 /* can the fast reduction [comba] method be used?
|
|
025 *
|
|
026 * Note that unlike in mul you're safely allowed *less*
|
|
027 * than the available columns [255 per default] since carries
|
|
028 * are fixed up in the inner loop.
|
|
029 */
|
|
030 digs = n->used * 2 + 1;
|
|
031 if ((digs < MP_WARRAY) &&
|
|
032 n->used <
|
|
033 (1 << ((CHAR_BIT * sizeof (mp_word)) - (2 * DIGIT_BIT)))) \{
|
|
034 return fast_mp_montgomery_reduce (x, n, rho);
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* grow the input as required */
|
|
038 if (x->alloc < digs) \{
|
|
039 if ((res = mp_grow (x, digs)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
040 return res;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043 x->used = digs;
|
|
044
|
|
045 for (ix = 0; ix < n->used; ix++) \{
|
|
046 /* mu = ai * rho mod b
|
|
047 *
|
|
048 * The value of rho must be precalculated via
|
|
049 * montgomery_setup() such that
|
|
050 * it equals -1/n0 mod b this allows the
|
|
051 * following inner loop to reduce the
|
|
052 * input one digit at a time
|
|
053 */
|
|
054 mu = (mp_digit) (((mp_word)x->dp[ix]) * ((mp_word)rho) & MP_MASK);
|
|
055
|
|
056 /* a = a + mu * m * b**i */
|
|
057 \{
|
|
058 register int iy;
|
|
059 register mp_digit *tmpn, *tmpx, u;
|
|
060 register mp_word r;
|
|
061
|
|
062 /* alias for digits of the modulus */
|
|
063 tmpn = n->dp;
|
|
064
|
|
065 /* alias for the digits of x [the input] */
|
|
066 tmpx = x->dp + ix;
|
|
067
|
|
068 /* set the carry to zero */
|
|
069 u = 0;
|
|
070
|
|
071 /* Multiply and add in place */
|
|
072 for (iy = 0; iy < n->used; iy++) \{
|
|
073 /* compute product and sum */
|
|
074 r = ((mp_word)mu) * ((mp_word)*tmpn++) +
|
|
075 ((mp_word) u) + ((mp_word) * tmpx);
|
|
076
|
|
077 /* get carry */
|
|
078 u = (mp_digit)(r >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT));
|
|
079
|
|
080 /* fix digit */
|
|
081 *tmpx++ = (mp_digit)(r & ((mp_word) MP_MASK));
|
|
082 \}
|
|
083 /* At this point the ix'th digit of x should be zero */
|
|
084
|
|
085
|
|
086 /* propagate carries upwards as required*/
|
|
087 while (u) \{
|
|
088 *tmpx += u;
|
|
089 u = *tmpx >> DIGIT_BIT;
|
|
090 *tmpx++ &= MP_MASK;
|
|
091 \}
|
|
092 \}
|
|
093 \}
|
|
094
|
|
095 /* at this point the n.used'th least
|
|
096 * significant digits of x are all zero
|
|
097 * which means we can shift x to the
|
|
098 * right by n.used digits and the
|
|
099 * residue is unchanged.
|
|
100 */
|
|
101
|
|
102 /* x = x/b**n.used */
|
|
103 mp_clamp(x);
|
|
104 mp_rshd (x, n->used);
|
|
105
|
|
106 /* if x >= n then x = x - n */
|
|
107 if (mp_cmp_mag (x, n) != MP_LT) \{
|
|
108 return s_mp_sub (x, n, x);
|
|
109 \}
|
|
110
|
|
111 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
112 \}
|
|
113 #endif
|
|
114
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This is the baseline implementation of the Montgomery reduction algorithm. Lines 30 to 35 determine if the Comba based
|
|
routine can be used instead. Line 48 computes the value of $\mu$ for that particular iteration of the outer loop.
|
|
|
|
The multiplication $\mu n \beta^{ix}$ is performed in one step in the inner loop. The alias $tmpx$ refers to the $ix$'th digit of $x$ and
|
|
the alias $tmpn$ refers to the modulus $n$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Faster ``Comba'' Montgomery Reduction}
|
|
|
|
The Montgomery reduction requires fewer single precision multiplications than a Barrett reduction, however it is much slower due to the serial
|
|
nature of the inner loop. The Barrett reduction algorithm requires two slightly modified multipliers which can be implemented with the Comba
|
|
technique. The Montgomery reduction algorithm cannot directly use the Comba technique to any significant advantage since the inner loop calculates
|
|
a $k \times 1$ product $k$ times.
|
|
|
|
The biggest obstacle is that at the $ix$'th iteration of the outer loop the value of $x_{ix}$ is required to calculate $\mu$. This means the
|
|
carries from $0$ to $ix - 1$ must have been propagated upwards to form a valid $ix$'th digit. The solution as it turns out is very simple.
|
|
Perform a Comba like multiplier and inside the outer loop just after the inner loop fix up the $ix + 1$'th digit by forwarding the carry.
|
|
|
|
With this change in place the Montgomery reduction algorithm can be performed with a Comba style multiplication loop which substantially increases
|
|
the speed of the algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{fast\_mp\_montgomery\_reduce}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $x$, mp\_int $n$ and a digit $\rho \equiv -1/n_0 \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
\hspace{11.5mm}($0 \le x < n^2, n > 1, (n, \beta) = 1, \beta^k > n$) \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $\beta^{-k}x \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
Place an array of \textbf{MP\_WARRAY} mp\_word variables called $\hat W$ on the stack. \\
|
|
1. if $x.alloc < n.used + 1$ then grow $x$ to $n.used + 1$ digits. \\
|
|
Copy the digits of $x$ into the array $\hat W$ \\
|
|
2. For $ix$ from $0$ to $x.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $\hat W_{ix} \leftarrow x_{ix}$ \\
|
|
3. For $ix$ from $x.used$ to $2n.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $\hat W_{ix} \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
Elimiate the lower $k$ digits. \\
|
|
4. for $ix$ from $0$ to $n.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $\mu \leftarrow \hat W_{ix} \cdot \rho \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.2 For $iy$ from $0$ to $n.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}4.2.1 $\hat W_{iy + ix} \leftarrow \hat W_{iy + ix} + \mu \cdot n_{iy}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.3 $\hat W_{ix + 1} \leftarrow \hat W_{ix + 1} + \lfloor \hat W_{ix} / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
Propagate carries upwards. \\
|
|
5. for $ix$ from $n.used$ to $2n.used + 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $\hat W_{ix + 1} \leftarrow \hat W_{ix + 1} + \lfloor \hat W_{ix} / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
Shift right and reduce modulo $\beta$ simultaneously. \\
|
|
6. for $ix$ from $0$ to $n.used + 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $x_{ix} \leftarrow \hat W_{ix + n.used} \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
Zero excess digits and fixup $x$. \\
|
|
7. if $x.used > n.used + 1$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 for $ix$ from $n.used + 1$ to $x.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.1.1 $x_{ix} \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
8. $x.used \leftarrow n.used + 1$ \\
|
|
9. Clamp excessive digits of $x$. \\
|
|
10. If $x \ge n$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}10.1 $x \leftarrow x - n$ \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm fast\_mp\_montgomery\_reduce}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm fast\_mp\_montgomery\_reduce.}
|
|
This algorithm will compute the Montgomery reduction of $x$ modulo $n$ using the Comba technique. It is on most computer platforms significantly
|
|
faster than algorithm mp\_montgomery\_reduce and algorithm mp\_reduce (\textit{Barrett reduction}). The algorithm has the same restrictions
|
|
on the input as the baseline reduction algorithm. An additional two restrictions are imposed on this algorithm. The number of digits $k$ in the
|
|
the modulus $n$ must not violate $MP\_WARRAY > 2k +1$ and $n < \delta$. When $\beta = 2^{28}$ this algorithm can be used to reduce modulo
|
|
a modulus of at most $3,556$ bits in length.
|
|
|
|
As in the other Comba reduction algorithms there is a $\hat W$ array which stores the columns of the product. It is initially filled with the
|
|
contents of $x$ with the excess digits zeroed. The reduction loop is very similar the to the baseline loop at heart. The multiplication on step
|
|
4.1 can be single precision only since $ab \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)} \equiv (a \mbox{ mod }\beta)(b \mbox{ mod }\beta)$. Some multipliers such
|
|
as those on the ARM processors take a variable length time to complete depending on the number of bytes of result it must produce. By performing
|
|
a single precision multiplication instead half the amount of time is spent.
|
|
|
|
Also note that digit $\hat W_{ix}$ must have the carry from the $ix - 1$'th digit propagated upwards in order for this to work. That is what step
|
|
4.3 will do. In effect over the $n.used$ iterations of the outer loop the $n.used$'th lower columns all have the their carries propagated forwards. Note
|
|
how the upper bits of those same words are not reduced modulo $\beta$. This is because those values will be discarded shortly and there is no
|
|
point.
|
|
|
|
Step 5 will propagate the remainder of the carries upwards. On step 6 the columns are reduced modulo $\beta$ and shifted simultaneously as they are
|
|
stored in the destination $x$.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_fast\_mp\_montgomery\_reduce.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* computes xR**-1 == x (mod N) via Montgomery Reduction
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * This is an optimized implementation of montgomery_reduce
|
|
020 * which uses the comba method to quickly calculate the columns of the
|
|
021 * reduction.
|
|
022 *
|
|
023 * Based on Algorithm 14.32 on pp.601 of HAC.
|
|
024 */
|
|
025 int fast_mp_montgomery_reduce (mp_int * x, mp_int * n, mp_digit rho)
|
|
026 \{
|
|
027 int ix, res, olduse;
|
|
028 mp_word W[MP_WARRAY];
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* get old used count */
|
|
031 olduse = x->used;
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* grow a as required */
|
|
034 if (x->alloc < n->used + 1) \{
|
|
035 if ((res = mp_grow (x, n->used + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
036 return res;
|
|
037 \}
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039
|
|
040 /* first we have to get the digits of the input into
|
|
041 * an array of double precision words W[...]
|
|
042 */
|
|
043 \{
|
|
044 register mp_word *_W;
|
|
045 register mp_digit *tmpx;
|
|
046
|
|
047 /* alias for the W[] array */
|
|
048 _W = W;
|
|
049
|
|
050 /* alias for the digits of x*/
|
|
051 tmpx = x->dp;
|
|
052
|
|
053 /* copy the digits of a into W[0..a->used-1] */
|
|
054 for (ix = 0; ix < x->used; ix++) \{
|
|
055 *_W++ = *tmpx++;
|
|
056 \}
|
|
057
|
|
058 /* zero the high words of W[a->used..m->used*2] */
|
|
059 for (; ix < n->used * 2 + 1; ix++) \{
|
|
060 *_W++ = 0;
|
|
061 \}
|
|
062 \}
|
|
063
|
|
064 /* now we proceed to zero successive digits
|
|
065 * from the least significant upwards
|
|
066 */
|
|
067 for (ix = 0; ix < n->used; ix++) \{
|
|
068 /* mu = ai * m' mod b
|
|
069 *
|
|
070 * We avoid a double precision multiplication (which isn't required)
|
|
071 * by casting the value down to a mp_digit. Note this requires
|
|
072 * that W[ix-1] have the carry cleared (see after the inner loop)
|
|
073 */
|
|
074 register mp_digit mu;
|
|
075 mu = (mp_digit) (((W[ix] & MP_MASK) * rho) & MP_MASK);
|
|
076
|
|
077 /* a = a + mu * m * b**i
|
|
078 *
|
|
079 * This is computed in place and on the fly. The multiplication
|
|
080 * by b**i is handled by offseting which columns the results
|
|
081 * are added to.
|
|
082 *
|
|
083 * Note the comba method normally doesn't handle carries in the
|
|
084 * inner loop In this case we fix the carry from the previous
|
|
085 * column since the Montgomery reduction requires digits of the
|
|
086 * result (so far) [see above] to work. This is
|
|
087 * handled by fixing up one carry after the inner loop. The
|
|
088 * carry fixups are done in order so after these loops the
|
|
089 * first m->used words of W[] have the carries fixed
|
|
090 */
|
|
091 \{
|
|
092 register int iy;
|
|
093 register mp_digit *tmpn;
|
|
094 register mp_word *_W;
|
|
095
|
|
096 /* alias for the digits of the modulus */
|
|
097 tmpn = n->dp;
|
|
098
|
|
099 /* Alias for the columns set by an offset of ix */
|
|
100 _W = W + ix;
|
|
101
|
|
102 /* inner loop */
|
|
103 for (iy = 0; iy < n->used; iy++) \{
|
|
104 *_W++ += ((mp_word)mu) * ((mp_word)*tmpn++);
|
|
105 \}
|
|
106 \}
|
|
107
|
|
108 /* now fix carry for next digit, W[ix+1] */
|
|
109 W[ix + 1] += W[ix] >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
110 \}
|
|
111
|
|
112 /* now we have to propagate the carries and
|
|
113 * shift the words downward [all those least
|
|
114 * significant digits we zeroed].
|
|
115 */
|
|
116 \{
|
|
117 register mp_digit *tmpx;
|
|
118 register mp_word *_W, *_W1;
|
|
119
|
|
120 /* nox fix rest of carries */
|
|
121
|
|
122 /* alias for current word */
|
|
123 _W1 = W + ix;
|
|
124
|
|
125 /* alias for next word, where the carry goes */
|
|
126 _W = W + ++ix;
|
|
127
|
|
128 for (; ix <= n->used * 2 + 1; ix++) \{
|
|
129 *_W++ += *_W1++ >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
130 \}
|
|
131
|
|
132 /* copy out, A = A/b**n
|
|
133 *
|
|
134 * The result is A/b**n but instead of converting from an
|
|
135 * array of mp_word to mp_digit than calling mp_rshd
|
|
136 * we just copy them in the right order
|
|
137 */
|
|
138
|
|
139 /* alias for destination word */
|
|
140 tmpx = x->dp;
|
|
141
|
|
142 /* alias for shifted double precision result */
|
|
143 _W = W + n->used;
|
|
144
|
|
145 for (ix = 0; ix < n->used + 1; ix++) \{
|
|
146 *tmpx++ = (mp_digit)(*_W++ & ((mp_word) MP_MASK));
|
|
147 \}
|
|
148
|
|
149 /* zero oldused digits, if the input a was larger than
|
|
150 * m->used+1 we'll have to clear the digits
|
|
151 */
|
|
152 for (; ix < olduse; ix++) \{
|
|
153 *tmpx++ = 0;
|
|
154 \}
|
|
155 \}
|
|
156
|
|
157 /* set the max used and clamp */
|
|
158 x->used = n->used + 1;
|
|
159 mp_clamp (x);
|
|
160
|
|
161 /* if A >= m then A = A - m */
|
|
162 if (mp_cmp_mag (x, n) != MP_LT) \{
|
|
163 return s_mp_sub (x, n, x);
|
|
164 \}
|
|
165 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
166 \}
|
|
167 #endif
|
|
168
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The $\hat W$ array is first filled with digits of $x$ on line 50 then the rest of the digits are zeroed on line 54. Both loops share
|
|
the same alias variables to make the code easier to read.
|
|
|
|
The value of $\mu$ is calculated in an interesting fashion. First the value $\hat W_{ix}$ is reduced modulo $\beta$ and cast to a mp\_digit. This
|
|
forces the compiler to use a single precision multiplication and prevents any concerns about loss of precision. Line 109 fixes the carry
|
|
for the next iteration of the loop by propagating the carry from $\hat W_{ix}$ to $\hat W_{ix+1}$.
|
|
|
|
The for loop on line 108 propagates the rest of the carries upwards through the columns. The for loop on line 125 reduces the columns
|
|
modulo $\beta$ and shifts them $k$ places at the same time. The alias $\_ \hat W$ actually refers to the array $\hat W$ starting at the $n.used$'th
|
|
digit, that is $\_ \hat W_{t} = \hat W_{n.used + t}$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Montgomery Setup}
|
|
To calculate the variable $\rho$ a relatively simple algorithm will be required.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_montgomery\_setup}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $n$ ($n > 1$ and $(n, 2) = 1$) \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $\rho \equiv -1/n_0 \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $b \leftarrow n_0$ \\
|
|
2. If $b$ is even return(\textit{MP\_VAL}) \\
|
|
3. $x \leftarrow (((b + 2) \mbox{ AND } 4) << 1) + b$ \\
|
|
4. for $k$ from 0 to $\lceil lg(lg(\beta)) \rceil - 2$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $x \leftarrow x \cdot (2 - bx)$ \\
|
|
5. $\rho \leftarrow \beta - x \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
6. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_montgomery\_setup}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_montgomery\_setup.}
|
|
This algorithm will calculate the value of $\rho$ required within the Montgomery reduction algorithms. It uses a very interesting trick
|
|
to calculate $1/n_0$ when $\beta$ is a power of two.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_montgomery\_setup.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* setups the montgomery reduction stuff */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_montgomery_setup (mp_int * n, mp_digit * rho)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 mp_digit x, b;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* fast inversion mod 2**k
|
|
024 *
|
|
025 * Based on the fact that
|
|
026 *
|
|
027 * XA = 1 (mod 2**n) => (X(2-XA)) A = 1 (mod 2**2n)
|
|
028 * => 2*X*A - X*X*A*A = 1
|
|
029 * => 2*(1) - (1) = 1
|
|
030 */
|
|
031 b = n->dp[0];
|
|
032
|
|
033 if ((b & 1) == 0) \{
|
|
034 return MP_VAL;
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 x = (((b + 2) & 4) << 1) + b; /* here x*a==1 mod 2**4 */
|
|
038 x *= 2 - b * x; /* here x*a==1 mod 2**8 */
|
|
039 #if !defined(MP_8BIT)
|
|
040 x *= 2 - b * x; /* here x*a==1 mod 2**16 */
|
|
041 #endif
|
|
042 #if defined(MP_64BIT) || !(defined(MP_8BIT) || defined(MP_16BIT))
|
|
043 x *= 2 - b * x; /* here x*a==1 mod 2**32 */
|
|
044 #endif
|
|
045 #ifdef MP_64BIT
|
|
046 x *= 2 - b * x; /* here x*a==1 mod 2**64 */
|
|
047 #endif
|
|
048
|
|
049 /* rho = -1/m mod b */
|
|
050 *rho = (((mp_word)1 << ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT)) - x) & MP_MASK;
|
|
051
|
|
052 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
053 \}
|
|
054 #endif
|
|
055
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This source code computes the value of $\rho$ required to perform Montgomery reduction. It has been modified to avoid performing excess
|
|
multiplications when $\beta$ is not the default 28-bits.
|
|
|
|
\section{The Diminished Radix Algorithm}
|
|
The Diminished Radix method of modular reduction \cite{DRMET} is a fairly clever technique which can be more efficient than either the Barrett
|
|
or Montgomery methods for certain forms of moduli. The technique is based on the following simple congruence.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
(x \mbox{ mod } n) + k \lfloor x / n \rfloor \equiv x \mbox{ (mod }(n - k)\mbox{)}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
This observation was used in the MMB \cite{MMB} block cipher to create a diffusion primitive. It used the fact that if $n = 2^{31}$ and $k=1$ that
|
|
then a x86 multiplier could produce the 62-bit product and use the ``shrd'' instruction to perform a double-precision right shift. The proof
|
|
of the above equation is very simple. First write $x$ in the product form.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
x = qn + r
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Now reduce both sides modulo $(n - k)$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
x \equiv qk + r \mbox{ (mod }(n-k)\mbox{)}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
The variable $n$ reduces modulo $n - k$ to $k$. By putting $q = \lfloor x/n \rfloor$ and $r = x \mbox{ mod } n$
|
|
into the equation the original congruence is reproduced, thus concluding the proof. The following algorithm is based on this observation.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Diminished Radix Reduction}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Integer $x$, $n$, $k$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $x \mbox{ mod } (n - k)$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $q \leftarrow \lfloor x / n \rfloor$ \\
|
|
2. $q \leftarrow k \cdot q$ \\
|
|
3. $x \leftarrow x \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
4. $x \leftarrow x + q$ \\
|
|
5. If $x \ge (n - k)$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $x \leftarrow x - (n - k)$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 Goto step 1. \\
|
|
6. Return $x$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Diminished Radix Reduction}
|
|
\label{fig:DR}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
This algorithm will reduce $x$ modulo $n - k$ and return the residue. If $0 \le x < (n - k)^2$ then the algorithm will loop almost always
|
|
once or twice and occasionally three times. For simplicity sake the value of $x$ is bounded by the following simple polynomial.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
0 \le x < n^2 + k^2 - 2nk
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
The true bound is $0 \le x < (n - k - 1)^2$ but this has quite a few more terms. The value of $q$ after step 1 is bounded by the following.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
q < n - 2k - k^2/n
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Since $k^2$ is going to be considerably smaller than $n$ that term will always be zero. The value of $x$ after step 3 is bounded trivially as
|
|
$0 \le x < n$. By step four the sum $x + q$ is bounded by
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
0 \le q + x < (k + 1)n - 2k^2 - 1
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
With a second pass $q$ will be loosely bounded by $0 \le q < k^2$ after step 2 while $x$ will still be loosely bounded by $0 \le x < n$ after step 3. After the second pass it is highly unlike that the
|
|
sum in step 4 will exceed $n - k$. In practice fewer than three passes of the algorithm are required to reduce virtually every input in the
|
|
range $0 \le x < (n - k - 1)^2$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
|
|
\hline
|
|
$x = 123456789, n = 256, k = 3$ \\
|
|
\hline $q \leftarrow \lfloor x/n \rfloor = 482253$ \\
|
|
$q \leftarrow q*k = 1446759$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x \mbox{ mod } n = 21$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x + q = 1446780$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x - (n - k) = 1446527$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
$q \leftarrow \lfloor x/n \rfloor = 5650$ \\
|
|
$q \leftarrow q*k = 16950$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x \mbox{ mod } n = 127$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x + q = 17077$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x - (n - k) = 16824$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
$q \leftarrow \lfloor x/n \rfloor = 65$ \\
|
|
$q \leftarrow q*k = 195$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x \mbox{ mod } n = 184$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x + q = 379$ \\
|
|
$x \leftarrow x - (n - k) = 126$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Example Diminished Radix Reduction}
|
|
\label{fig:EXDR}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Figure~\ref{fig:EXDR} demonstrates the reduction of $x = 123456789$ modulo $n - k = 253$ when $n = 256$ and $k = 3$. Note that even while $x$
|
|
is considerably larger than $(n - k - 1)^2 = 63504$ the algorithm still converges on the modular residue exceedingly fast. In this case only
|
|
three passes were required to find the residue $x \equiv 126$.
|
|
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Choice of Moduli}
|
|
On the surface this algorithm looks like a very expensive algorithm. It requires a couple of subtractions followed by multiplication and other
|
|
modular reductions. The usefulness of this algorithm becomes exceedingly clear when an appropriate modulus is chosen.
|
|
|
|
Division in general is a very expensive operation to perform. The one exception is when the division is by a power of the radix of representation used.
|
|
Division by ten for example is simple for pencil and paper mathematics since it amounts to shifting the decimal place to the right. Similarly division
|
|
by two (\textit{or powers of two}) is very simple for binary computers to perform. It would therefore seem logical to choose $n$ of the form $2^p$
|
|
which would imply that $\lfloor x / n \rfloor$ is a simple shift of $x$ right $p$ bits.
|
|
|
|
However, there is one operation related to division of power of twos that is even faster than this. If $n = \beta^p$ then the division may be
|
|
performed by moving whole digits to the right $p$ places. In practice division by $\beta^p$ is much faster than division by $2^p$ for any $p$.
|
|
Also with the choice of $n = \beta^p$ reducing $x$ modulo $n$ merely requires zeroing the digits above the $p-1$'th digit of $x$.
|
|
|
|
Throughout the next section the term ``restricted modulus'' will refer to a modulus of the form $\beta^p - k$ whereas the term ``unrestricted
|
|
modulus'' will refer to a modulus of the form $2^p - k$. The word ``restricted'' in this case refers to the fact that it is based on the
|
|
$2^p$ logic except $p$ must be a multiple of $lg(\beta)$.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Choice of $k$}
|
|
Now that division and reduction (\textit{step 1 and 3 of figure~\ref{fig:DR}}) have been optimized to simple digit operations the multiplication by $k$
|
|
in step 2 is the most expensive operation. Fortunately the choice of $k$ is not terribly limited. For all intents and purposes it might
|
|
as well be a single digit. The smaller the value of $k$ is the faster the algorithm will be.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Restricted Diminished Radix Reduction}
|
|
The restricted Diminished Radix algorithm can quickly reduce an input modulo a modulus of the form $n = \beta^p - k$. This algorithm can reduce
|
|
an input $x$ within the range $0 \le x < n^2$ using only a couple passes of the algorithm demonstrated in figure~\ref{fig:DR}. The implementation
|
|
of this algorithm has been optimized to avoid additional overhead associated with a division by $\beta^p$, the multiplication by $k$ or the addition
|
|
of $x$ and $q$. The resulting algorithm is very efficient and can lead to substantial improvements over Barrett and Montgomery reduction when modular
|
|
exponentiations are performed.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_dr\_reduce}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $x$, $n$ and a mp\_digit $k = \beta - n_0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{11.5mm}($0 \le x < n^2$, $n > 1$, $0 < k < \beta$) \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $x \mbox{ mod } n$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $m \leftarrow n.used$ \\
|
|
2. If $x.alloc < 2m$ then grow $x$ to $2m$ digits. \\
|
|
3. $\mu \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
4. for $i$ from $0$ to $m - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $\hat r \leftarrow k \cdot x_{m+i} + x_{i} + \mu$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.2 $x_{i} \leftarrow \hat r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.3 $\mu \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
5. $x_{m} \leftarrow \mu$ \\
|
|
6. for $i$ from $m + 1$ to $x.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $x_{i} \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
7. Clamp excess digits of $x$. \\
|
|
8. If $x \ge n$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $x \leftarrow x - n$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.2 Goto step 3. \\
|
|
9. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_dr\_reduce}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_dr\_reduce.}
|
|
This algorithm will perform the Dimished Radix reduction of $x$ modulo $n$. It has similar restrictions to that of the Barrett reduction
|
|
with the addition that $n$ must be of the form $n = \beta^m - k$ where $0 < k <\beta$.
|
|
|
|
This algorithm essentially implements the pseudo-code in figure~\ref{fig:DR} except with a slight optimization. The division by $\beta^m$, multiplication by $k$
|
|
and addition of $x \mbox{ mod }\beta^m$ are all performed simultaneously inside the loop on step 4. The division by $\beta^m$ is emulated by accessing
|
|
the term at the $m+i$'th position which is subsequently multiplied by $k$ and added to the term at the $i$'th position. After the loop the $m$'th
|
|
digit is set to the carry and the upper digits are zeroed. Steps 5 and 6 emulate the reduction modulo $\beta^m$ that should have happend to
|
|
$x$ before the addition of the multiple of the upper half.
|
|
|
|
At step 8 if $x$ is still larger than $n$ another pass of the algorithm is required. First $n$ is subtracted from $x$ and then the algorithm resumes
|
|
at step 3.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_dr\_reduce.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* reduce "x" in place modulo "n" using the Diminished Radix algorithm.
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * Based on algorithm from the paper
|
|
020 *
|
|
021 * "Generating Efficient Primes for Discrete Log Cryptosystems"
|
|
022 * Chae Hoon Lim, Pil Joong Lee,
|
|
023 * POSTECH Information Research Laboratories
|
|
024 *
|
|
025 * The modulus must be of a special format [see manual]
|
|
026 *
|
|
027 * Has been modified to use algorithm 7.10 from the LTM book instead
|
|
028 *
|
|
029 * Input x must be in the range 0 <= x <= (n-1)**2
|
|
030 */
|
|
031 int
|
|
032 mp_dr_reduce (mp_int * x, mp_int * n, mp_digit k)
|
|
033 \{
|
|
034 int err, i, m;
|
|
035 mp_word r;
|
|
036 mp_digit mu, *tmpx1, *tmpx2;
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* m = digits in modulus */
|
|
039 m = n->used;
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* ensure that "x" has at least 2m digits */
|
|
042 if (x->alloc < m + m) \{
|
|
043 if ((err = mp_grow (x, m + m)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
044 return err;
|
|
045 \}
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 /* top of loop, this is where the code resumes if
|
|
049 * another reduction pass is required.
|
|
050 */
|
|
051 top:
|
|
052 /* aliases for digits */
|
|
053 /* alias for lower half of x */
|
|
054 tmpx1 = x->dp;
|
|
055
|
|
056 /* alias for upper half of x, or x/B**m */
|
|
057 tmpx2 = x->dp + m;
|
|
058
|
|
059 /* set carry to zero */
|
|
060 mu = 0;
|
|
061
|
|
062 /* compute (x mod B**m) + k * [x/B**m] inline and inplace */
|
|
063 for (i = 0; i < m; i++) \{
|
|
064 r = ((mp_word)*tmpx2++) * ((mp_word)k) + *tmpx1 + mu;
|
|
065 *tmpx1++ = (mp_digit)(r & MP_MASK);
|
|
066 mu = (mp_digit)(r >> ((mp_word)DIGIT_BIT));
|
|
067 \}
|
|
068
|
|
069 /* set final carry */
|
|
070 *tmpx1++ = mu;
|
|
071
|
|
072 /* zero words above m */
|
|
073 for (i = m + 1; i < x->used; i++) \{
|
|
074 *tmpx1++ = 0;
|
|
075 \}
|
|
076
|
|
077 /* clamp, sub and return */
|
|
078 mp_clamp (x);
|
|
079
|
|
080 /* if x >= n then subtract and reduce again
|
|
081 * Each successive "recursion" makes the input smaller and smaller.
|
|
082 */
|
|
083 if (mp_cmp_mag (x, n) != MP_LT) \{
|
|
084 s_mp_sub(x, n, x);
|
|
085 goto top;
|
|
086 \}
|
|
087 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
088 \}
|
|
089 #endif
|
|
090
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The first step is to grow $x$ as required to $2m$ digits since the reduction is performed in place on $x$. The label on line 51 is where
|
|
the algorithm will resume if further reduction passes are required. In theory it could be placed at the top of the function however, the size of
|
|
the modulus and question of whether $x$ is large enough are invariant after the first pass meaning that it would be a waste of time.
|
|
|
|
The aliases $tmpx1$ and $tmpx2$ refer to the digits of $x$ where the latter is offset by $m$ digits. By reading digits from $x$ offset by $m$ digits
|
|
a division by $\beta^m$ can be simulated virtually for free. The loop on line 63 performs the bulk of the work (\textit{corresponds to step 4 of algorithm 7.11})
|
|
in this algorithm.
|
|
|
|
By line 70 the pointer $tmpx1$ points to the $m$'th digit of $x$ which is where the final carry will be placed. Similarly by line 73 the
|
|
same pointer will point to the $m+1$'th digit where the zeroes will be placed.
|
|
|
|
Since the algorithm is only valid if both $x$ and $n$ are greater than zero an unsigned comparison suffices to determine if another pass is required.
|
|
With the same logic at line 84 the value of $x$ is known to be greater than or equal to $n$ meaning that an unsigned subtraction can be used
|
|
as well. Since the destination of the subtraction is the larger of the inputs the call to algorithm s\_mp\_sub cannot fail and the return code
|
|
does not need to be checked.
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Setup}
|
|
To setup the restricted Diminished Radix algorithm the value $k = \beta - n_0$ is required. This algorithm is not really complicated but provided for
|
|
completeness.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_dr\_setup}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $n$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $k = \beta - n_0$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $k \leftarrow \beta - n_0$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_dr\_setup}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_dr\_setup.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* determines the setup value */
|
|
018 void mp_dr_setup(mp_int *a, mp_digit *d)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 /* the casts are required if DIGIT_BIT is one less than
|
|
021 * the number of bits in a mp_digit [e.g. DIGIT_BIT==31]
|
|
022 */
|
|
023 *d = (mp_digit)((((mp_word)1) << ((mp_word)DIGIT_BIT)) -
|
|
024 ((mp_word)a->dp[0]));
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 #endif
|
|
028
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Modulus Detection}
|
|
Another algorithm which will be useful is the ability to detect a restricted Diminished Radix modulus. An integer is said to be
|
|
of restricted Diminished Radix form if all of the digits are equal to $\beta - 1$ except the trailing digit which may be any value.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_dr\_is\_modulus}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $n$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $1$ if $n$ is in D.R form, $0$ otherwise \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
1. If $n.used < 2$ then return($0$). \\
|
|
2. for $ix$ from $1$ to $n.used - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 If $n_{ix} \ne \beta - 1$ return($0$). \\
|
|
3. Return($1$). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_dr\_is\_modulus}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_dr\_is\_modulus.}
|
|
This algorithm determines if a value is in Diminished Radix form. Step 1 rejects obvious cases where fewer than two digits are
|
|
in the mp\_int. Step 2 tests all but the first digit to see if they are equal to $\beta - 1$. If the algorithm manages to get to
|
|
step 3 then $n$ must be of Diminished Radix form.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_dr\_is\_modulus.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* determines if a number is a valid DR modulus */
|
|
018 int mp_dr_is_modulus(mp_int *a)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int ix;
|
|
021
|
|
022 /* must be at least two digits */
|
|
023 if (a->used < 2) \{
|
|
024 return 0;
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* must be of the form b**k - a [a <= b] so all
|
|
028 * but the first digit must be equal to -1 (mod b).
|
|
029 */
|
|
030 for (ix = 1; ix < a->used; ix++) \{
|
|
031 if (a->dp[ix] != MP_MASK) \{
|
|
032 return 0;
|
|
033 \}
|
|
034 \}
|
|
035 return 1;
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037
|
|
038 #endif
|
|
039
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Unrestricted Diminished Radix Reduction}
|
|
The unrestricted Diminished Radix algorithm allows modular reductions to be performed when the modulus is of the form $2^p - k$. This algorithm
|
|
is a straightforward adaptation of algorithm~\ref{fig:DR}.
|
|
|
|
In general the restricted Diminished Radix reduction algorithm is much faster since it has considerably lower overhead. However, this new
|
|
algorithm is much faster than either Montgomery or Barrett reduction when the moduli are of the appropriate form.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_reduce\_2k}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and $n$. mp\_digit $k$ \\
|
|
\hspace{11.5mm}($a \ge 0$, $n > 1$, $0 < k < \beta$, $n + k$ is a power of two) \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
1. $p \leftarrow \lceil lg(n) \rceil$ (\textit{mp\_count\_bits}) \\
|
|
2. While $a \ge n$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $q \leftarrow \lfloor a / 2^p \rfloor$ (\textit{mp\_div\_2d}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 $a \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }2^p\mbox{)}$ (\textit{mp\_mod\_2d}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.3 $q \leftarrow q \cdot k$ (\textit{mp\_mul\_d}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.4 $a \leftarrow a - q$ (\textit{s\_mp\_sub}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.5 If $a \ge n$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.5.1 $a \leftarrow a - n$ \\
|
|
3. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_2k}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_2k.}
|
|
This algorithm quickly reduces an input $a$ modulo an unrestricted Diminished Radix modulus $n$. Division by $2^p$ is emulated with a right
|
|
shift which makes the algorithm fairly inexpensive to use.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_reduce\_2k.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* reduces a modulo n where n is of the form 2**p - d */
|
|
018 int mp_reduce_2k(mp_int *a, mp_int *n, mp_digit d)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 mp_int q;
|
|
021 int p, res;
|
|
022
|
|
023 if ((res = mp_init(&q)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
024 return res;
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 p = mp_count_bits(n);
|
|
028 top:
|
|
029 /* q = a/2**p, a = a mod 2**p */
|
|
030 if ((res = mp_div_2d(a, p, &q, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
031 goto ERR;
|
|
032 \}
|
|
033
|
|
034 if (d != 1) \{
|
|
035 /* q = q * d */
|
|
036 if ((res = mp_mul_d(&q, d, &q)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
037 goto ERR;
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* a = a + q */
|
|
042 if ((res = s_mp_add(a, &q, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
043 goto ERR;
|
|
044 \}
|
|
045
|
|
046 if (mp_cmp_mag(a, n) != MP_LT) \{
|
|
047 s_mp_sub(a, n, a);
|
|
048 goto top;
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050
|
|
051 ERR:
|
|
052 mp_clear(&q);
|
|
053 return res;
|
|
054 \}
|
|
055
|
|
056 #endif
|
|
057
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The algorithm mp\_count\_bits calculates the number of bits in an mp\_int which is used to find the initial value of $p$. The call to mp\_div\_2d
|
|
on line 30 calculates both the quotient $q$ and the remainder $a$ required. By doing both in a single function call the code size
|
|
is kept fairly small. The multiplication by $k$ is only performed if $k > 1$. This allows reductions modulo $2^p - 1$ to be performed without
|
|
any multiplications.
|
|
|
|
The unsigned s\_mp\_add, mp\_cmp\_mag and s\_mp\_sub are used in place of their full sign counterparts since the inputs are only valid if they are
|
|
positive. By using the unsigned versions the overhead is kept to a minimum.
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Unrestricted Setup}
|
|
To setup this reduction algorithm the value of $k = 2^p - n$ is required.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_reduce\_2k\_setup}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $n$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $k = 2^p - n$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
1. $p \leftarrow \lceil lg(n) \rceil$ (\textit{mp\_count\_bits}) \\
|
|
2. $x \leftarrow 2^p$ (\textit{mp\_2expt}) \\
|
|
3. $x \leftarrow x - n$ (\textit{mp\_sub}) \\
|
|
4. $k \leftarrow x_0$ \\
|
|
5. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_2k\_setup}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_2k\_setup.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the value of $k$ required for the algorithm mp\_reduce\_2k. By making a temporary variable $x$ equal to $2^p$ a subtraction
|
|
is sufficient to solve for $k$. Alternatively if $n$ has more than one digit the value of $k$ is simply $\beta - n_0$.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_reduce\_2k\_setup.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* determines the setup value */
|
|
018 int mp_reduce_2k_setup(mp_int *a, mp_digit *d)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int res, p;
|
|
021 mp_int tmp;
|
|
022
|
|
023 if ((res = mp_init(&tmp)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
024 return res;
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 p = mp_count_bits(a);
|
|
028 if ((res = mp_2expt(&tmp, p)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
029 mp_clear(&tmp);
|
|
030 return res;
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032
|
|
033 if ((res = s_mp_sub(&tmp, a, &tmp)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
034 mp_clear(&tmp);
|
|
035 return res;
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037
|
|
038 *d = tmp.dp[0];
|
|
039 mp_clear(&tmp);
|
|
040 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042 #endif
|
|
043
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Unrestricted Detection}
|
|
An integer $n$ is a valid unrestricted Diminished Radix modulus if either of the following are true.
|
|
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item The number has only one digit.
|
|
\item The number has more than one digit and every bit from the $\beta$'th to the most significant is one.
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
|
|
If either condition is true than there is a power of two $2^p$ such that $0 < 2^p - n < \beta$. If the input is only
|
|
one digit than it will always be of the correct form. Otherwise all of the bits above the first digit must be one. This arises from the fact
|
|
that there will be value of $k$ that when added to the modulus causes a carry in the first digit which propagates all the way to the most
|
|
significant bit. The resulting sum will be a power of two.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_reduce\_is\_2k}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $n$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $1$ if of proper form, $0$ otherwise \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
1. If $n.used = 0$ then return($0$). \\
|
|
2. If $n.used = 1$ then return($1$). \\
|
|
3. $p \leftarrow \lceil lg(n) \rceil$ (\textit{mp\_count\_bits}) \\
|
|
4. for $x$ from $lg(\beta)$ to $p$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 If the ($x \mbox{ mod }lg(\beta)$)'th bit of the $\lfloor x / lg(\beta) \rfloor$ of $n$ is zero then return($0$). \\
|
|
5. Return($1$). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_is\_2k}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_reduce\_is\_2k.}
|
|
This algorithm quickly determines if a modulus is of the form required for algorithm mp\_reduce\_2k to function properly.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_reduce\_is\_2k.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* determines if mp_reduce_2k can be used */
|
|
018 int mp_reduce_is_2k(mp_int *a)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int ix, iy, iw;
|
|
021 mp_digit iz;
|
|
022
|
|
023 if (a->used == 0) \{
|
|
024 return MP_NO;
|
|
025 \} else if (a->used == 1) \{
|
|
026 return MP_YES;
|
|
027 \} else if (a->used > 1) \{
|
|
028 iy = mp_count_bits(a);
|
|
029 iz = 1;
|
|
030 iw = 1;
|
|
031
|
|
032 /* Test every bit from the second digit up, must be 1 */
|
|
033 for (ix = DIGIT_BIT; ix < iy; ix++) \{
|
|
034 if ((a->dp[iw] & iz) == 0) \{
|
|
035 return MP_NO;
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037 iz <<= 1;
|
|
038 if (iz > (mp_digit)MP_MASK) \{
|
|
039 ++iw;
|
|
040 iz = 1;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044 return MP_YES;
|
|
045 \}
|
|
046
|
|
047 #endif
|
|
048
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
\section{Algorithm Comparison}
|
|
So far three very different algorithms for modular reduction have been discussed. Each of the algorithms have their own strengths and weaknesses
|
|
that makes having such a selection very useful. The following table sumarizes the three algorithms along with comparisons of work factors. Since
|
|
all three algorithms have the restriction that $0 \le x < n^2$ and $n > 1$ those limitations are not included in the table.
|
|
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Method} & \textbf{Work Required} & \textbf{Limitations} & \textbf{$m = 8$} & \textbf{$m = 32$} & \textbf{$m = 64$} \\
|
|
\hline Barrett & $m^2 + 2m - 1$ & None & $79$ & $1087$ & $4223$ \\
|
|
\hline Montgomery & $m^2 + m$ & $n$ must be odd & $72$ & $1056$ & $4160$ \\
|
|
\hline D.R. & $2m$ & $n = \beta^m - k$ & $16$ & $64$ & $128$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
In theory Montgomery and Barrett reductions would require roughly the same amount of time to complete. However, in practice since Montgomery
|
|
reduction can be written as a single function with the Comba technique it is much faster. Barrett reduction suffers from the overhead of
|
|
calling the half precision multipliers, addition and division by $\beta$ algorithms.
|
|
|
|
For almost every cryptographic algorithm Montgomery reduction is the algorithm of choice. The one set of algorithms where Diminished Radix reduction truly
|
|
shines are based on the discrete logarithm problem such as Diffie-Hellman \cite{DH} and ElGamal \cite{ELGAMAL}. In these algorithms
|
|
primes of the form $\beta^m - k$ can be found and shared amongst users. These primes will allow the Diminished Radix algorithm to be used in
|
|
modular exponentiation to greatly speed up the operation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
\section*{Exercises}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{cl}
|
|
$\left [ 3 \right ]$ & Prove that the ``trick'' in algorithm mp\_montgomery\_setup actually \\
|
|
& calculates the correct value of $\rho$. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 2 \right ]$ & Devise an algorithm to reduce modulo $n + k$ for small $k$ quickly. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
$\left [ 4 \right ]$ & Prove that the pseudo-code algorithm ``Diminished Radix Reduction'' \\
|
|
& (\textit{figure~\ref{fig:DR}}) terminates. Also prove the probability that it will \\
|
|
& terminate within $1 \le k \le 10$ iterations. \\
|
|
& \\
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Exponentiation}
|
|
Exponentiation is the operation of raising one variable to the power of another, for example, $a^b$. A variant of exponentiation, computed
|
|
in a finite field or ring, is called modular exponentiation. This latter style of operation is typically used in public key
|
|
cryptosystems such as RSA and Diffie-Hellman. The ability to quickly compute modular exponentiations is of great benefit to any
|
|
such cryptosystem and many methods have been sought to speed it up.
|
|
|
|
\section{Exponentiation Basics}
|
|
A trivial algorithm would simply multiply $a$ against itself $b - 1$ times to compute the exponentiation desired. However, as $b$ grows in size
|
|
the number of multiplications becomes prohibitive. Imagine what would happen if $b$ $\approx$ $2^{1024}$ as is the case when computing an RSA signature
|
|
with a $1024$-bit key. Such a calculation could never be completed as it would take simply far too long.
|
|
|
|
Fortunately there is a very simple algorithm based on the laws of exponents. Recall that $lg_a(a^b) = b$ and that $lg_a(a^ba^c) = b + c$ which
|
|
are two trivial relationships between the base and the exponent. Let $b_i$ represent the $i$'th bit of $b$ starting from the least
|
|
significant bit. If $b$ is a $k$-bit integer than the following equation is true.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
a^b = \prod_{i=0}^{k-1} a^{2^i \cdot b_i}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
By taking the base $a$ logarithm of both sides of the equation the following equation is the result.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
b = \sum_{i=0}^{k-1}2^i \cdot b_i
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
The term $a^{2^i}$ can be found from the $i - 1$'th term by squaring the term since $\left ( a^{2^i} \right )^2$ is equal to
|
|
$a^{2^{i+1}}$. This observation forms the basis of essentially all fast exponentiation algorithms. It requires $k$ squarings and on average
|
|
$k \over 2$ multiplications to compute the result. This is indeed quite an improvement over simply multiplying by $a$ a total of $b-1$ times.
|
|
|
|
While this current method is a considerable speed up there are further improvements to be made. For example, the $a^{2^i}$ term does not need to
|
|
be computed in an auxilary variable. Consider the following equivalent algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Left to Right Exponentiation}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Integer $a$, $b$ and $k$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = a^b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $c \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
2. for $i$ from $k - 1$ to $0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $c \leftarrow c^2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 $c \leftarrow c \cdot a^{b_i}$ \\
|
|
3. Return $c$. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Left to Right Exponentiation}
|
|
\label{fig:LTOR}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
This algorithm starts from the most significant bit and works towards the least significant bit. When the $i$'th bit of $b$ is set $a$ is
|
|
multiplied against the current product. In each iteration the product is squared which doubles the exponent of the individual terms of the
|
|
product.
|
|
|
|
For example, let $b = 101100_2 \equiv 44_{10}$. The following chart demonstrates the actions of the algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Value of $i$} & \textbf{Value of $c$} \\
|
|
\hline - & $1$ \\
|
|
\hline $5$ & $a$ \\
|
|
\hline $4$ & $a^2$ \\
|
|
\hline $3$ & $a^4 \cdot a$ \\
|
|
\hline $2$ & $a^8 \cdot a^2 \cdot a$ \\
|
|
\hline $1$ & $a^{16} \cdot a^4 \cdot a^2$ \\
|
|
\hline $0$ & $a^{32} \cdot a^8 \cdot a^4$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Example of Left to Right Exponentiation}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
When the product $a^{32} \cdot a^8 \cdot a^4$ is simplified it is equal $a^{44}$ which is the desired exponentiation. This particular algorithm is
|
|
called ``Left to Right'' because it reads the exponent in that order. All of the exponentiation algorithms that will be presented are of this nature.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Single Digit Exponentiation}
|
|
The first algorithm in the series of exponentiation algorithms will be an unbounded algorithm where the exponent is a single digit. It is intended
|
|
to be used when a small power of an input is required (\textit{e.g. $a^5$}). It is faster than simply multiplying $b - 1$ times for all values of
|
|
$b$ that are greater than three.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_expt\_d}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and mp\_digit $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = a^b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $g \leftarrow a$ (\textit{mp\_init\_copy}) \\
|
|
2. $c \leftarrow 1$ (\textit{mp\_set}) \\
|
|
3. for $x$ from 1 to $lg(\beta)$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $c \leftarrow c^2$ (\textit{mp\_sqr}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.2 If $b$ AND $2^{lg(\beta) - 1} \ne 0$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}3.2.1 $c \leftarrow c \cdot g$ (\textit{mp\_mul}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.3 $b \leftarrow b << 1$ \\
|
|
4. Clear $g$. \\
|
|
5. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_expt\_d}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_expt\_d.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the value of $a$ raised to the power of a single digit $b$. It uses the left to right exponentiation algorithm to
|
|
quickly compute the exponentiation. It is loosely based on algorithm 14.79 of HAC \cite[pp. 615]{HAC} with the difference that the
|
|
exponent is a fixed width.
|
|
|
|
A copy of $a$ is made first to allow destination variable $c$ be the same as the source variable $a$. The result is set to the initial value of
|
|
$1$ in the subsequent step.
|
|
|
|
Inside the loop the exponent is read from the most significant bit first down to the least significant bit. First $c$ is invariably squared
|
|
on step 3.1. In the following step if the most significant bit of $b$ is one the copy of $a$ is multiplied against $c$. The value
|
|
of $b$ is shifted left one bit to make the next bit down from the most signficant bit the new most significant bit. In effect each
|
|
iteration of the loop moves the bits of the exponent $b$ upwards to the most significant location.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_expt\_d.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* calculate c = a**b using a square-multiply algorithm */
|
|
018 int mp_expt_d (mp_int * a, mp_digit b, mp_int * c)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int res, x;
|
|
021 mp_int g;
|
|
022
|
|
023 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&g, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
024 return res;
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* set initial result */
|
|
028 mp_set (c, 1);
|
|
029
|
|
030 for (x = 0; x < (int) DIGIT_BIT; x++) \{
|
|
031 /* square */
|
|
032 if ((res = mp_sqr (c, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
033 mp_clear (&g);
|
|
034 return res;
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* if the bit is set multiply */
|
|
038 if ((b & (mp_digit) (((mp_digit)1) << (DIGIT_BIT - 1))) != 0) \{
|
|
039 if ((res = mp_mul (c, &g, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
040 mp_clear (&g);
|
|
041 return res;
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044
|
|
045 /* shift to next bit */
|
|
046 b <<= 1;
|
|
047 \}
|
|
048
|
|
049 mp_clear (&g);
|
|
050 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
051 \}
|
|
052 #endif
|
|
053
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Line 28 sets the initial value of the result to $1$. Next the loop on line 30 steps through each bit of the exponent starting from
|
|
the most significant down towards the least significant. The invariant squaring operation placed on line 32 is performed first. After
|
|
the squaring the result $c$ is multiplied by the base $g$ if and only if the most significant bit of the exponent is set. The shift on line
|
|
46 moves all of the bits of the exponent upwards towards the most significant location.
|
|
|
|
\section{$k$-ary Exponentiation}
|
|
When calculating an exponentiation the most time consuming bottleneck is the multiplications which are in general a small factor
|
|
slower than squaring. Recall from the previous algorithm that $b_{i}$ refers to the $i$'th bit of the exponent $b$. Suppose instead it referred to
|
|
the $i$'th $k$-bit digit of the exponent of $b$. For $k = 1$ the definitions are synonymous and for $k > 1$ algorithm~\ref{fig:KARY}
|
|
computes the same exponentiation. A group of $k$ bits from the exponent is called a \textit{window}. That is it is a small window on only a
|
|
portion of the entire exponent. Consider the following modification to the basic left to right exponentiation algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{$k$-ary Exponentiation}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Integer $a$, $b$, $k$ and $t$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = a^b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $c \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
2. for $i$ from $t - 1$ to $0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $c \leftarrow c^{2^k} $ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 Extract the $i$'th $k$-bit word from $b$ and store it in $g$. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.3 $c \leftarrow c \cdot a^g$ \\
|
|
3. Return $c$. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{$k$-ary Exponentiation}
|
|
\label{fig:KARY}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
The squaring on step 2.1 can be calculated by squaring the value $c$ successively $k$ times. If the values of $a^g$ for $0 < g < 2^k$ have been
|
|
precomputed this algorithm requires only $t$ multiplications and $tk$ squarings. The table can be generated with $2^{k - 1} - 1$ squarings and
|
|
$2^{k - 1} + 1$ multiplications. This algorithm assumes that the number of bits in the exponent is evenly divisible by $k$.
|
|
However, when it is not the remaining $0 < x \le k - 1$ bits can be handled with algorithm~\ref{fig:LTOR}.
|
|
|
|
Suppose $k = 4$ and $t = 100$. This modified algorithm will require $109$ multiplications and $408$ squarings to compute the exponentiation. The
|
|
original algorithm would on average have required $200$ multiplications and $400$ squrings to compute the same value. The total number of squarings
|
|
has increased slightly but the number of multiplications has nearly halved.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Optimal Values of $k$}
|
|
An optimal value of $k$ will minimize $2^{k} + \lceil n / k \rceil + n - 1$ for a fixed number of bits in the exponent $n$. The simplest
|
|
approach is to brute force search amongst the values $k = 2, 3, \ldots, 8$ for the lowest result. Table~\ref{fig:OPTK} lists optimal values of $k$
|
|
for various exponent sizes and compares the number of multiplication and squarings required against algorithm~\ref{fig:LTOR}.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Exponent (bits)} & \textbf{Optimal $k$} & \textbf{Work at $k$} & \textbf{Work with ~\ref{fig:LTOR}} \\
|
|
\hline $16$ & $2$ & $27$ & $24$ \\
|
|
\hline $32$ & $3$ & $49$ & $48$ \\
|
|
\hline $64$ & $3$ & $92$ & $96$ \\
|
|
\hline $128$ & $4$ & $175$ & $192$ \\
|
|
\hline $256$ & $4$ & $335$ & $384$ \\
|
|
\hline $512$ & $5$ & $645$ & $768$ \\
|
|
\hline $1024$ & $6$ & $1257$ & $1536$ \\
|
|
\hline $2048$ & $6$ & $2452$ & $3072$ \\
|
|
\hline $4096$ & $7$ & $4808$ & $6144$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Optimal Values of $k$ for $k$-ary Exponentiation}
|
|
\label{fig:OPTK}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Sliding-Window Exponentiation}
|
|
A simple modification to the previous algorithm is only generate the upper half of the table in the range $2^{k-1} \le g < 2^k$. Essentially
|
|
this is a table for all values of $g$ where the most significant bit of $g$ is a one. However, in order for this to be allowed in the
|
|
algorithm values of $g$ in the range $0 \le g < 2^{k-1}$ must be avoided.
|
|
|
|
Table~\ref{fig:OPTK2} lists optimal values of $k$ for various exponent sizes and compares the work required against algorithm~\ref{fig:KARY}.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Exponent (bits)} & \textbf{Optimal $k$} & \textbf{Work at $k$} & \textbf{Work with ~\ref{fig:KARY}} \\
|
|
\hline $16$ & $3$ & $24$ & $27$ \\
|
|
\hline $32$ & $3$ & $45$ & $49$ \\
|
|
\hline $64$ & $4$ & $87$ & $92$ \\
|
|
\hline $128$ & $4$ & $167$ & $175$ \\
|
|
\hline $256$ & $5$ & $322$ & $335$ \\
|
|
\hline $512$ & $6$ & $628$ & $645$ \\
|
|
\hline $1024$ & $6$ & $1225$ & $1257$ \\
|
|
\hline $2048$ & $7$ & $2403$ & $2452$ \\
|
|
\hline $4096$ & $8$ & $4735$ & $4808$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Optimal Values of $k$ for Sliding Window Exponentiation}
|
|
\label{fig:OPTK2}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Sliding Window $k$-ary Exponentiation}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Integer $a$, $b$, $k$ and $t$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = a^b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $c \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
2. for $i$ from $t - 1$ to $0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 If the $i$'th bit of $b$ is a zero then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.1.1 $c \leftarrow c^2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 else do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.1 $c \leftarrow c^{2^k}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.2 Extract the $k$ bits from $(b_{i}b_{i-1}\ldots b_{i-(k-1)})$ and store it in $g$. \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.3 $c \leftarrow c \cdot a^g$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}2.2.4 $i \leftarrow i - k$ \\
|
|
3. Return $c$. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Sliding Window $k$-ary Exponentiation}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
Similar to the previous algorithm this algorithm must have a special handler when fewer than $k$ bits are left in the exponent. While this
|
|
algorithm requires the same number of squarings it can potentially have fewer multiplications. The pre-computed table $a^g$ is also half
|
|
the size as the previous table.
|
|
|
|
Consider the exponent $b = 111101011001000_2 \equiv 31432_{10}$ with $k = 3$ using both algorithms. The first algorithm will divide the exponent up as
|
|
the following five $3$-bit words $b \equiv \left ( 111, 101, 011, 001, 000 \right )_{2}$. The second algorithm will break the
|
|
exponent as $b \equiv \left ( 111, 101, 0, 110, 0, 100, 0 \right )_{2}$. The single digit $0$ in the second representation are where
|
|
a single squaring took place instead of a squaring and multiplication. In total the first method requires $10$ multiplications and $18$
|
|
squarings. The second method requires $8$ multiplications and $18$ squarings.
|
|
|
|
In general the sliding window method is never slower than the generic $k$-ary method and often it is slightly faster.
|
|
|
|
\section{Modular Exponentiation}
|
|
|
|
Modular exponentiation is essentially computing the power of a base within a finite field or ring. For example, computing
|
|
$d \equiv a^b \mbox{ (mod }c\mbox{)}$ is a modular exponentiation. Instead of first computing $a^b$ and then reducing it
|
|
modulo $c$ the intermediate result is reduced modulo $c$ after every squaring or multiplication operation.
|
|
|
|
This guarantees that any intermediate result is bounded by $0 \le d \le c^2 - 2c + 1$ and can be reduced modulo $c$ quickly using
|
|
one of the algorithms presented in chapter six.
|
|
|
|
Before the actual modular exponentiation algorithm can be written a wrapper algorithm must be written first. This algorithm
|
|
will allow the exponent $b$ to be negative which is computed as $c \equiv \left (1 / a \right )^{\vert b \vert} \mbox{(mod }d\mbox{)}$. The
|
|
value of $(1/a) \mbox{ mod }c$ is computed using the modular inverse (\textit{see \ref{sec;modinv}}). If no inverse exists the algorithm
|
|
terminates with an error.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_exptmod}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$, $b$ and $c$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $y \equiv g^x \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $c.sign = MP\_NEG$ return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
2. If $b.sign = MP\_NEG$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $g' \leftarrow g^{-1} \mbox{ (mod }c\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 $x' \leftarrow \vert x \vert$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.3 Compute $d \equiv g'^{x'} \mbox{ (mod }c\mbox{)}$ via recursion. \\
|
|
3. if $p$ is odd \textbf{OR} $p$ is a D.R. modulus then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 Compute $y \equiv g^{x} \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ via algorithm mp\_exptmod\_fast. \\
|
|
4. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 Compute $y \equiv g^{x} \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ via algorithm s\_mp\_exptmod. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_exptmod}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_exptmod.}
|
|
The first algorithm which actually performs modular exponentiation is algorithm s\_mp\_exptmod. It is a sliding window $k$-ary algorithm
|
|
which uses Barrett reduction to reduce the product modulo $p$. The second algorithm mp\_exptmod\_fast performs the same operation
|
|
except it uses either Montgomery or Diminished Radix reduction. The two latter reduction algorithms are clumped in the same exponentiation
|
|
algorithm since their arguments are essentially the same (\textit{two mp\_ints and one mp\_digit}).
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_exptmod.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017
|
|
018 /* this is a shell function that calls either the normal or Montgomery
|
|
019 * exptmod functions. Originally the call to the montgomery code was
|
|
020 * embedded in the normal function but that wasted alot of stack space
|
|
021 * for nothing (since 99% of the time the Montgomery code would be called)
|
|
022 */
|
|
023 int mp_exptmod (mp_int * G, mp_int * X, mp_int * P, mp_int * Y)
|
|
024 \{
|
|
025 int dr;
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* modulus P must be positive */
|
|
028 if (P->sign == MP_NEG) \{
|
|
029 return MP_VAL;
|
|
030 \}
|
|
031
|
|
032 /* if exponent X is negative we have to recurse */
|
|
033 if (X->sign == MP_NEG) \{
|
|
034 #ifdef BN_MP_INVMOD_C
|
|
035 mp_int tmpG, tmpX;
|
|
036 int err;
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* first compute 1/G mod P */
|
|
039 if ((err = mp_init(&tmpG)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
040 return err;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042 if ((err = mp_invmod(G, P, &tmpG)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
043 mp_clear(&tmpG);
|
|
044 return err;
|
|
045 \}
|
|
046
|
|
047 /* now get |X| */
|
|
048 if ((err = mp_init(&tmpX)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
049 mp_clear(&tmpG);
|
|
050 return err;
|
|
051 \}
|
|
052 if ((err = mp_abs(X, &tmpX)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
053 mp_clear_multi(&tmpG, &tmpX, NULL);
|
|
054 return err;
|
|
055 \}
|
|
056
|
|
057 /* and now compute (1/G)**|X| instead of G**X [X < 0] */
|
|
058 err = mp_exptmod(&tmpG, &tmpX, P, Y);
|
|
059 mp_clear_multi(&tmpG, &tmpX, NULL);
|
|
060 return err;
|
|
061 #else
|
|
062 /* no invmod */
|
|
063 return MP_VAL;
|
|
064 #endif
|
|
065 \}
|
|
066
|
|
067 /* modified diminished radix reduction */
|
|
068 #if defined(BN_MP_REDUCE_IS_2K_L_C) && defined(BN_MP_REDUCE_2K_L_C) && defin
|
|
ed(BN_S_MP_EXPTMOD_C)
|
|
069 if (mp_reduce_is_2k_l(P) == MP_YES) \{
|
|
070 return s_mp_exptmod(G, X, P, Y, 1);
|
|
071 \}
|
|
072 #endif
|
|
073
|
|
074 #ifdef BN_MP_DR_IS_MODULUS_C
|
|
075 /* is it a DR modulus? */
|
|
076 dr = mp_dr_is_modulus(P);
|
|
077 #else
|
|
078 /* default to no */
|
|
079 dr = 0;
|
|
080 #endif
|
|
081
|
|
082 #ifdef BN_MP_REDUCE_IS_2K_C
|
|
083 /* if not, is it a unrestricted DR modulus? */
|
|
084 if (dr == 0) \{
|
|
085 dr = mp_reduce_is_2k(P) << 1;
|
|
086 \}
|
|
087 #endif
|
|
088
|
|
089 /* if the modulus is odd or dr != 0 use the montgomery method */
|
|
090 #ifdef BN_MP_EXPTMOD_FAST_C
|
|
091 if (mp_isodd (P) == 1 || dr != 0) \{
|
|
092 return mp_exptmod_fast (G, X, P, Y, dr);
|
|
093 \} else \{
|
|
094 #endif
|
|
095 #ifdef BN_S_MP_EXPTMOD_C
|
|
096 /* otherwise use the generic Barrett reduction technique */
|
|
097 return s_mp_exptmod (G, X, P, Y, 0);
|
|
098 #else
|
|
099 /* no exptmod for evens */
|
|
100 return MP_VAL;
|
|
101 #endif
|
|
102 #ifdef BN_MP_EXPTMOD_FAST_C
|
|
103 \}
|
|
104 #endif
|
|
105 \}
|
|
106
|
|
107 #endif
|
|
108
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
In order to keep the algorithms in a known state the first step on line 28 is to reject any negative modulus as input. If the exponent is
|
|
negative the algorithm tries to perform a modular exponentiation with the modular inverse of the base $G$. The temporary variable $tmpG$ is assigned
|
|
the modular inverse of $G$ and $tmpX$ is assigned the absolute value of $X$. The algorithm will recuse with these new values with a positive
|
|
exponent.
|
|
|
|
If the exponent is positive the algorithm resumes the exponentiation. Line 76 determines if the modulus is of the restricted Diminished Radix
|
|
form. If it is not line 69 attempts to determine if it is of a unrestricted Diminished Radix form. The integer $dr$ will take on one
|
|
of three values.
|
|
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item $dr = 0$ means that the modulus is not of either restricted or unrestricted Diminished Radix form.
|
|
\item $dr = 1$ means that the modulus is of restricted Diminished Radix form.
|
|
\item $dr = 2$ means that the modulus is of unrestricted Diminished Radix form.
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
|
|
Line 69 determines if the fast modular exponentiation algorithm can be used. It is allowed if $dr \ne 0$ or if the modulus is odd. Otherwise,
|
|
the slower s\_mp\_exptmod algorithm is used which uses Barrett reduction.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Barrett Modular Exponentiation}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{s\_mp\_exptmod}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$, $b$ and $c$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $y \equiv g^x \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $k \leftarrow lg(x)$ \\
|
|
2. $winsize \leftarrow \left \lbrace \begin{array}{ll}
|
|
2 & \mbox{if }k \le 7 \\
|
|
3 & \mbox{if }7 < k \le 36 \\
|
|
4 & \mbox{if }36 < k \le 140 \\
|
|
5 & \mbox{if }140 < k \le 450 \\
|
|
6 & \mbox{if }450 < k \le 1303 \\
|
|
7 & \mbox{if }1303 < k \le 3529 \\
|
|
8 & \mbox{if }3529 < k \\
|
|
\end{array} \right .$ \\
|
|
3. Initialize $2^{winsize}$ mp\_ints in an array named $M$ and one mp\_int named $\mu$ \\
|
|
4. Calculate the $\mu$ required for Barrett Reduction (\textit{mp\_reduce\_setup}). \\
|
|
5. $M_1 \leftarrow g \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Setup the table of small powers of $g$. First find $g^{2^{winsize}}$ and then all multiples of it. \\
|
|
6. $k \leftarrow 2^{winsize - 1}$ \\
|
|
7. $M_{k} \leftarrow M_1$ \\
|
|
8. for $ix$ from 0 to $winsize - 2$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $M_k \leftarrow \left ( M_k \right )^2$ (\textit{mp\_sqr}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.2 $M_k \leftarrow M_k \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ (\textit{mp\_reduce}) \\
|
|
9. for $ix$ from $2^{winsize - 1} + 1$ to $2^{winsize} - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 $M_{ix} \leftarrow M_{ix - 1} \cdot M_{1}$ (\textit{mp\_mul}) \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.2 $M_{ix} \leftarrow M_{ix} \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ (\textit{mp\_reduce}) \\
|
|
10. $res \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Start Sliding Window. \\
|
|
11. $mode \leftarrow 0, bitcnt \leftarrow 1, buf \leftarrow 0, digidx \leftarrow x.used - 1, bitcpy \leftarrow 0, bitbuf \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
12. Loop \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.1 $bitcnt \leftarrow bitcnt - 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.2 If $bitcnt = 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.2.1 If $digidx = -1$ goto step 13. \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.2.2 $buf \leftarrow x_{digidx}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.2.3 $digidx \leftarrow digidx - 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.2.4 $bitcnt \leftarrow lg(\beta)$ \\
|
|
Continued on next page. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm s\_mp\_exptmod}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{s\_mp\_exptmod} (\textit{continued}). \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$, $b$ and $c$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $y \equiv g^x \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.3 $y \leftarrow (buf >> (lg(\beta) - 1))$ AND $1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.4 $buf \leftarrow buf << 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.5 if $mode = 0$ and $y = 0$ then goto step 12. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.6 if $mode = 1$ and $y = 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.6.1 $res \leftarrow res^2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.6.2 $res \leftarrow res \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.6.3 Goto step 12. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.7 $bitcpy \leftarrow bitcpy + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.8 $bitbuf \leftarrow bitbuf + (y << (winsize - bitcpy))$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.9 $mode \leftarrow 2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.10 If $bitcpy = winsize$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}Window is full so perform the squarings and single multiplication. \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.10.1 for $ix$ from $0$ to $winsize -1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{9mm}12.10.1.1 $res \leftarrow res^2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{9mm}12.10.1.2 $res \leftarrow res \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.10.2 $res \leftarrow res \cdot M_{bitbuf}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.10.3 $res \leftarrow res \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}Reset the window. \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}12.10.4 $bitcpy \leftarrow 0, bitbuf \leftarrow 0, mode \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
No more windows left. Check for residual bits of exponent. \\
|
|
13. If $mode = 2$ and $bitcpy > 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.1 for $ix$ form $0$ to $bitcpy - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.1.1 $res \leftarrow res^2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.1.2 $res \leftarrow res \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.1.3 $bitbuf \leftarrow bitbuf << 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.1.4 If $bitbuf$ AND $2^{winsize} \ne 0$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{9mm}13.1.4.1 $res \leftarrow res \cdot M_{1}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{9mm}13.1.4.2 $res \leftarrow res \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
14. $y \leftarrow res$ \\
|
|
15. Clear $res$, $mu$ and the $M$ array. \\
|
|
16. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm s\_mp\_exptmod (continued)}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm s\_mp\_exptmod.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the $x$'th power of $g$ modulo $p$ and stores the result in $y$. It takes advantage of the Barrett reduction
|
|
algorithm to keep the product small throughout the algorithm.
|
|
|
|
The first two steps determine the optimal window size based on the number of bits in the exponent. The larger the exponent the
|
|
larger the window size becomes. After a window size $winsize$ has been chosen an array of $2^{winsize}$ mp\_int variables is allocated. This
|
|
table will hold the values of $g^x \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ for $2^{winsize - 1} \le x < 2^{winsize}$.
|
|
|
|
After the table is allocated the first power of $g$ is found. Since $g \ge p$ is allowed it must be first reduced modulo $p$ to make
|
|
the rest of the algorithm more efficient. The first element of the table at $2^{winsize - 1}$ is found by squaring $M_1$ successively $winsize - 2$
|
|
times. The rest of the table elements are found by multiplying the previous element by $M_1$ modulo $p$.
|
|
|
|
Now that the table is available the sliding window may begin. The following list describes the functions of all the variables in the window.
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item The variable $mode$ dictates how the bits of the exponent are interpreted.
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item When $mode = 0$ the bits are ignored since no non-zero bit of the exponent has been seen yet. For example, if the exponent were simply
|
|
$1$ then there would be $lg(\beta) - 1$ zero bits before the first non-zero bit. In this case bits are ignored until a non-zero bit is found.
|
|
\item When $mode = 1$ a non-zero bit has been seen before and a new $winsize$-bit window has not been formed yet. In this mode leading $0$ bits
|
|
are read and a single squaring is performed. If a non-zero bit is read a new window is created.
|
|
\item When $mode = 2$ the algorithm is in the middle of forming a window and new bits are appended to the window from the most significant bit
|
|
downwards.
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
\item The variable $bitcnt$ indicates how many bits are left in the current digit of the exponent left to be read. When it reaches zero a new digit
|
|
is fetched from the exponent.
|
|
\item The variable $buf$ holds the currently read digit of the exponent.
|
|
\item The variable $digidx$ is an index into the exponents digits. It starts at the leading digit $x.used - 1$ and moves towards the trailing digit.
|
|
\item The variable $bitcpy$ indicates how many bits are in the currently formed window. When it reaches $winsize$ the window is flushed and
|
|
the appropriate operations performed.
|
|
\item The variable $bitbuf$ holds the current bits of the window being formed.
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
|
|
All of step 12 is the window processing loop. It will iterate while there are digits available form the exponent to read. The first step
|
|
inside this loop is to extract a new digit if no more bits are available in the current digit. If there are no bits left a new digit is
|
|
read and if there are no digits left than the loop terminates.
|
|
|
|
After a digit is made available step 12.3 will extract the most significant bit of the current digit and move all other bits in the digit
|
|
upwards. In effect the digit is read from most significant bit to least significant bit and since the digits are read from leading to
|
|
trailing edges the entire exponent is read from most significant bit to least significant bit.
|
|
|
|
At step 12.5 if the $mode$ and currently extracted bit $y$ are both zero the bit is ignored and the next bit is read. This prevents the
|
|
algorithm from having to perform trivial squaring and reduction operations before the first non-zero bit is read. Step 12.6 and 12.7-10 handle
|
|
the two cases of $mode = 1$ and $mode = 2$ respectively.
|
|
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\includegraphics{pics/expt_state.ps}
|
|
\caption{Sliding Window State Diagram}
|
|
\label{pic:expt_state}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
|
|
By step 13 there are no more digits left in the exponent. However, there may be partial bits in the window left. If $mode = 2$ then
|
|
a Left-to-Right algorithm is used to process the remaining few bits.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_s\_mp\_exptmod.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016 #ifdef MP_LOW_MEM
|
|
017 #define TAB_SIZE 32
|
|
018 #else
|
|
019 #define TAB_SIZE 256
|
|
020 #endif
|
|
021
|
|
022 int s_mp_exptmod (mp_int * G, mp_int * X, mp_int * P, mp_int * Y, int redmod
|
|
e)
|
|
023 \{
|
|
024 mp_int M[TAB_SIZE], res, mu;
|
|
025 mp_digit buf;
|
|
026 int err, bitbuf, bitcpy, bitcnt, mode, digidx, x, y, winsize;
|
|
027 int (*redux)(mp_int*,mp_int*,mp_int*);
|
|
028
|
|
029 /* find window size */
|
|
030 x = mp_count_bits (X);
|
|
031 if (x <= 7) \{
|
|
032 winsize = 2;
|
|
033 \} else if (x <= 36) \{
|
|
034 winsize = 3;
|
|
035 \} else if (x <= 140) \{
|
|
036 winsize = 4;
|
|
037 \} else if (x <= 450) \{
|
|
038 winsize = 5;
|
|
039 \} else if (x <= 1303) \{
|
|
040 winsize = 6;
|
|
041 \} else if (x <= 3529) \{
|
|
042 winsize = 7;
|
|
043 \} else \{
|
|
044 winsize = 8;
|
|
045 \}
|
|
046
|
|
047 #ifdef MP_LOW_MEM
|
|
048 if (winsize > 5) \{
|
|
049 winsize = 5;
|
|
050 \}
|
|
051 #endif
|
|
052
|
|
053 /* init M array */
|
|
054 /* init first cell */
|
|
055 if ((err = mp_init(&M[1])) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
056 return err;
|
|
057 \}
|
|
058
|
|
059 /* now init the second half of the array */
|
|
060 for (x = 1<<(winsize-1); x < (1 << winsize); x++) \{
|
|
061 if ((err = mp_init(&M[x])) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
062 for (y = 1<<(winsize-1); y < x; y++) \{
|
|
063 mp_clear (&M[y]);
|
|
064 \}
|
|
065 mp_clear(&M[1]);
|
|
066 return err;
|
|
067 \}
|
|
068 \}
|
|
069
|
|
070 /* create mu, used for Barrett reduction */
|
|
071 if ((err = mp_init (&mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
072 goto LBL_M;
|
|
073 \}
|
|
074
|
|
075 if (redmode == 0) \{
|
|
076 if ((err = mp_reduce_setup (&mu, P)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
077 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
078 \}
|
|
079 redux = mp_reduce;
|
|
080 \} else \{
|
|
081 if ((err = mp_reduce_2k_setup_l (P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
082 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
083 \}
|
|
084 redux = mp_reduce_2k_l;
|
|
085 \}
|
|
086
|
|
087 /* create M table
|
|
088 *
|
|
089 * The M table contains powers of the base,
|
|
090 * e.g. M[x] = G**x mod P
|
|
091 *
|
|
092 * The first half of the table is not
|
|
093 * computed though accept for M[0] and M[1]
|
|
094 */
|
|
095 if ((err = mp_mod (G, P, &M[1])) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
096 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
097 \}
|
|
098
|
|
099 /* compute the value at M[1<<(winsize-1)] by squaring
|
|
100 * M[1] (winsize-1) times
|
|
101 */
|
|
102 if ((err = mp_copy (&M[1], &M[1 << (winsize - 1)])) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
103 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
104 \}
|
|
105
|
|
106 for (x = 0; x < (winsize - 1); x++) \{
|
|
107 /* square it */
|
|
108 if ((err = mp_sqr (&M[1 << (winsize - 1)],
|
|
109 &M[1 << (winsize - 1)])) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
110 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
111 \}
|
|
112
|
|
113 /* reduce modulo P */
|
|
114 if ((err = redux (&M[1 << (winsize - 1)], P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
115 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
116 \}
|
|
117 \}
|
|
118
|
|
119 /* create upper table, that is M[x] = M[x-1] * M[1] (mod P)
|
|
120 * for x = (2**(winsize - 1) + 1) to (2**winsize - 1)
|
|
121 */
|
|
122 for (x = (1 << (winsize - 1)) + 1; x < (1 << winsize); x++) \{
|
|
123 if ((err = mp_mul (&M[x - 1], &M[1], &M[x])) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
124 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
125 \}
|
|
126 if ((err = redux (&M[x], P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
127 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
128 \}
|
|
129 \}
|
|
130
|
|
131 /* setup result */
|
|
132 if ((err = mp_init (&res)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
133 goto LBL_MU;
|
|
134 \}
|
|
135 mp_set (&res, 1);
|
|
136
|
|
137 /* set initial mode and bit cnt */
|
|
138 mode = 0;
|
|
139 bitcnt = 1;
|
|
140 buf = 0;
|
|
141 digidx = X->used - 1;
|
|
142 bitcpy = 0;
|
|
143 bitbuf = 0;
|
|
144
|
|
145 for (;;) \{
|
|
146 /* grab next digit as required */
|
|
147 if (--bitcnt == 0) \{
|
|
148 /* if digidx == -1 we are out of digits */
|
|
149 if (digidx == -1) \{
|
|
150 break;
|
|
151 \}
|
|
152 /* read next digit and reset the bitcnt */
|
|
153 buf = X->dp[digidx--];
|
|
154 bitcnt = (int) DIGIT_BIT;
|
|
155 \}
|
|
156
|
|
157 /* grab the next msb from the exponent */
|
|
158 y = (buf >> (mp_digit)(DIGIT_BIT - 1)) & 1;
|
|
159 buf <<= (mp_digit)1;
|
|
160
|
|
161 /* if the bit is zero and mode == 0 then we ignore it
|
|
162 * These represent the leading zero bits before the first 1 bit
|
|
163 * in the exponent. Technically this opt is not required but it
|
|
164 * does lower the # of trivial squaring/reductions used
|
|
165 */
|
|
166 if (mode == 0 && y == 0) \{
|
|
167 continue;
|
|
168 \}
|
|
169
|
|
170 /* if the bit is zero and mode == 1 then we square */
|
|
171 if (mode == 1 && y == 0) \{
|
|
172 if ((err = mp_sqr (&res, &res)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
173 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
174 \}
|
|
175 if ((err = redux (&res, P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
176 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
177 \}
|
|
178 continue;
|
|
179 \}
|
|
180
|
|
181 /* else we add it to the window */
|
|
182 bitbuf |= (y << (winsize - ++bitcpy));
|
|
183 mode = 2;
|
|
184
|
|
185 if (bitcpy == winsize) \{
|
|
186 /* ok window is filled so square as required and multiply */
|
|
187 /* square first */
|
|
188 for (x = 0; x < winsize; x++) \{
|
|
189 if ((err = mp_sqr (&res, &res)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
190 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
191 \}
|
|
192 if ((err = redux (&res, P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
193 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
194 \}
|
|
195 \}
|
|
196
|
|
197 /* then multiply */
|
|
198 if ((err = mp_mul (&res, &M[bitbuf], &res)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
199 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
200 \}
|
|
201 if ((err = redux (&res, P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
202 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
203 \}
|
|
204
|
|
205 /* empty window and reset */
|
|
206 bitcpy = 0;
|
|
207 bitbuf = 0;
|
|
208 mode = 1;
|
|
209 \}
|
|
210 \}
|
|
211
|
|
212 /* if bits remain then square/multiply */
|
|
213 if (mode == 2 && bitcpy > 0) \{
|
|
214 /* square then multiply if the bit is set */
|
|
215 for (x = 0; x < bitcpy; x++) \{
|
|
216 if ((err = mp_sqr (&res, &res)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
217 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
218 \}
|
|
219 if ((err = redux (&res, P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
220 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
221 \}
|
|
222
|
|
223 bitbuf <<= 1;
|
|
224 if ((bitbuf & (1 << winsize)) != 0) \{
|
|
225 /* then multiply */
|
|
226 if ((err = mp_mul (&res, &M[1], &res)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
227 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
228 \}
|
|
229 if ((err = redux (&res, P, &mu)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
230 goto LBL_RES;
|
|
231 \}
|
|
232 \}
|
|
233 \}
|
|
234 \}
|
|
235
|
|
236 mp_exch (&res, Y);
|
|
237 err = MP_OKAY;
|
|
238 LBL_RES:mp_clear (&res);
|
|
239 LBL_MU:mp_clear (&mu);
|
|
240 LBL_M:
|
|
241 mp_clear(&M[1]);
|
|
242 for (x = 1<<(winsize-1); x < (1 << winsize); x++) \{
|
|
243 mp_clear (&M[x]);
|
|
244 \}
|
|
245 return err;
|
|
246 \}
|
|
247 #endif
|
|
248
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Lines 31 through 41 determine the optimal window size based on the length of the exponent in bits. The window divisions are sorted
|
|
from smallest to greatest so that in each \textbf{if} statement only one condition must be tested. For example, by the \textbf{if} statement
|
|
on line 33 the value of $x$ is already known to be greater than $140$.
|
|
|
|
The conditional piece of code beginning on line 47 allows the window size to be restricted to five bits. This logic is used to ensure
|
|
the table of precomputed powers of $G$ remains relatively small.
|
|
|
|
The for loop on line 60 initializes the $M$ array while lines 61 and 76 compute the value of $\mu$ required for
|
|
Barrett reduction.
|
|
|
|
-- More later.
|
|
|
|
\section{Quick Power of Two}
|
|
Calculating $b = 2^a$ can be performed much quicker than with any of the previous algorithms. Recall that a logical shift left $m << k$ is
|
|
equivalent to $m \cdot 2^k$. By this logic when $m = 1$ a quick power of two can be achieved.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_2expt}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $a \leftarrow 2^b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $a \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
2. If $a.alloc < \lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor + 1$ then grow $a$ appropriately. \\
|
|
3. $a.used \leftarrow \lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor + 1$ \\
|
|
4. $a_{\lfloor b / lg(\beta) \rfloor} \leftarrow 1 << (b \mbox{ mod } lg(\beta))$ \\
|
|
5. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_2expt}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_2expt.}
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_2expt.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* computes a = 2**b
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * Simple algorithm which zeroes the int, grows it then just sets one bit
|
|
020 * as required.
|
|
021 */
|
|
022 int
|
|
023 mp_2expt (mp_int * a, int b)
|
|
024 \{
|
|
025 int res;
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* zero a as per default */
|
|
028 mp_zero (a);
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* grow a to accomodate the single bit */
|
|
031 if ((res = mp_grow (a, b / DIGIT_BIT + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
032 return res;
|
|
033 \}
|
|
034
|
|
035 /* set the used count of where the bit will go */
|
|
036 a->used = b / DIGIT_BIT + 1;
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* put the single bit in its place */
|
|
039 a->dp[b / DIGIT_BIT] = ((mp_digit)1) << (b % DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
040
|
|
041 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043 #endif
|
|
044
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Higher Level Algorithms}
|
|
|
|
This chapter discusses the various higher level algorithms that are required to complete a well rounded multiple precision integer package. These
|
|
routines are less performance oriented than the algorithms of chapters five, six and seven but are no less important.
|
|
|
|
The first section describes a method of integer division with remainder that is universally well known. It provides the signed division logic
|
|
for the package. The subsequent section discusses a set of algorithms which allow a single digit to be the 2nd operand for a variety of operations.
|
|
These algorithms serve mostly to simplify other algorithms where small constants are required. The last two sections discuss how to manipulate
|
|
various representations of integers. For example, converting from an mp\_int to a string of character.
|
|
|
|
\section{Integer Division with Remainder}
|
|
\label{sec:division}
|
|
|
|
Integer division aside from modular exponentiation is the most intensive algorithm to compute. Like addition, subtraction and multiplication
|
|
the basis of this algorithm is the long-hand division algorithm taught to school children. Throughout this discussion several common variables
|
|
will be used. Let $x$ represent the divisor and $y$ represent the dividend. Let $q$ represent the integer quotient $\lfloor y / x \rfloor$ and
|
|
let $r$ represent the remainder $r = y - x \lfloor y / x \rfloor$. The following simple algorithm will be used to start the discussion.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Radix-$\beta$ Integer Division}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. integer $x$ and $y$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $q = \lfloor y/x\rfloor, r = y - xq$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $q \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
2. $n \leftarrow \vert \vert y \vert \vert - \vert \vert x \vert \vert$ \\
|
|
3. for $t$ from $n$ down to $0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 Maximize $k$ such that $kx\beta^t$ is less than or equal to $y$ and $(k + 1)x\beta^t$ is greater. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.2 $q \leftarrow q + k\beta^t$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.3 $y \leftarrow y - kx\beta^t$ \\
|
|
4. $r \leftarrow y$ \\
|
|
5. Return($q, r$) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Radix-$\beta$ Integer Division}
|
|
\label{fig:raddiv}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
As children we are taught this very simple algorithm for the case of $\beta = 10$. Almost instinctively several optimizations are taught for which
|
|
their reason of existing are never explained. For this example let $y = 5471$ represent the dividend and $x = 23$ represent the divisor.
|
|
|
|
To find the first digit of the quotient the value of $k$ must be maximized such that $kx\beta^t$ is less than or equal to $y$ and
|
|
simultaneously $(k + 1)x\beta^t$ is greater than $y$. Implicitly $k$ is the maximum value the $t$'th digit of the quotient may have. The habitual method
|
|
used to find the maximum is to ``eyeball'' the two numbers, typically only the leading digits and quickly estimate a quotient. By only using leading
|
|
digits a much simpler division may be used to form an educated guess at what the value must be. In this case $k = \lfloor 54/23\rfloor = 2$ quickly
|
|
arises as a possible solution. Indeed $2x\beta^2 = 4600$ is less than $y = 5471$ and simultaneously $(k + 1)x\beta^2 = 6900$ is larger than $y$.
|
|
As a result $k\beta^2$ is added to the quotient which now equals $q = 200$ and $4600$ is subtracted from $y$ to give a remainder of $y = 841$.
|
|
|
|
Again this process is repeated to produce the quotient digit $k = 3$ which makes the quotient $q = 200 + 3\beta = 230$ and the remainder
|
|
$y = 841 - 3x\beta = 181$. Finally the last iteration of the loop produces $k = 7$ which leads to the quotient $q = 230 + 7 = 237$ and the
|
|
remainder $y = 181 - 7x = 20$. The final quotient and remainder found are $q = 237$ and $r = y = 20$ which are indeed correct since
|
|
$237 \cdot 23 + 20 = 5471$ is true.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Quotient Estimation}
|
|
\label{sec:divest}
|
|
As alluded to earlier the quotient digit $k$ can be estimated from only the leading digits of both the divisor and dividend. When $p$ leading
|
|
digits are used from both the divisor and dividend to form an estimation the accuracy of the estimation rises as $p$ grows. Technically
|
|
speaking the estimation is based on assuming the lower $\vert \vert y \vert \vert - p$ and $\vert \vert x \vert \vert - p$ lower digits of the
|
|
dividend and divisor are zero.
|
|
|
|
The value of the estimation may off by a few values in either direction and in general is fairly correct. A simplification \cite[pp. 271]{TAOCPV2}
|
|
of the estimation technique is to use $t + 1$ digits of the dividend and $t$ digits of the divisor, in particularly when $t = 1$. The estimate
|
|
using this technique is never too small. For the following proof let $t = \vert \vert y \vert \vert - 1$ and $s = \vert \vert x \vert \vert - 1$
|
|
represent the most significant digits of the dividend and divisor respectively.
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Proof.}\textit{ The quotient $\hat k = \lfloor (y_t\beta + y_{t-1}) / x_s \rfloor$ is greater than or equal to
|
|
$k = \lfloor y / (x \cdot \beta^{\vert \vert y \vert \vert - \vert \vert x \vert \vert - 1}) \rfloor$. }
|
|
The first obvious case is when $\hat k = \beta - 1$ in which case the proof is concluded since the real quotient cannot be larger. For all other
|
|
cases $\hat k = \lfloor (y_t\beta + y_{t-1}) / x_s \rfloor$ and $\hat k x_s \ge y_t\beta + y_{t-1} - x_s + 1$. The latter portion of the inequalility
|
|
$-x_s + 1$ arises from the fact that a truncated integer division will give the same quotient for at most $x_s - 1$ values. Next a series of
|
|
inequalities will prove the hypothesis.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
y - \hat k x \le y - \hat k x_s\beta^s
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
This is trivially true since $x \ge x_s\beta^s$. Next we replace $\hat kx_s\beta^s$ by the previous inequality for $\hat kx_s$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
y - \hat k x \le y_t\beta^t + \ldots + y_0 - (y_t\beta^t + y_{t-1}\beta^{t-1} - x_s\beta^t + \beta^s)
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
By simplifying the previous inequality the following inequality is formed.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
y - \hat k x \le y_{t-2}\beta^{t-2} + \ldots + y_0 + x_s\beta^s - \beta^s
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Subsequently,
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
y_{t-2}\beta^{t-2} + \ldots + y_0 + x_s\beta^s - \beta^s < x_s\beta^s \le x
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Which proves that $y - \hat kx \le x$ and by consequence $\hat k \ge k$ which concludes the proof. \textbf{QED}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Normalized Integers}
|
|
For the purposes of division a normalized input is when the divisors leading digit $x_n$ is greater than or equal to $\beta / 2$. By multiplying both
|
|
$x$ and $y$ by $j = \lfloor (\beta / 2) / x_n \rfloor$ the quotient remains unchanged and the remainder is simply $j$ times the original
|
|
remainder. The purpose of normalization is to ensure the leading digit of the divisor is sufficiently large such that the estimated quotient will
|
|
lie in the domain of a single digit. Consider the maximum dividend $(\beta - 1) \cdot \beta + (\beta - 1)$ and the minimum divisor $\beta / 2$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
{{\beta^2 - 1} \over { \beta / 2}} \le 2\beta - {2 \over \beta}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
At most the quotient approaches $2\beta$, however, in practice this will not occur since that would imply the previous quotient digit was too small.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Radix-$\beta$ Division with Remainder}
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_div}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a, b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = \lfloor a/b \rfloor$, $d = a - bc$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b = 0$ return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
2. If $\vert a \vert < \vert b \vert$ then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $d \leftarrow a$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 $c \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.3 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Setup the quotient to receive the digits. \\
|
|
3. Grow $q$ to $a.used + 2$ digits. \\
|
|
4. $q \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
5. $x \leftarrow \vert a \vert , y \leftarrow \vert b \vert$ \\
|
|
6. $sign \leftarrow \left \lbrace \begin{array}{ll}
|
|
MP\_ZPOS & \mbox{if }a.sign = b.sign \\
|
|
MP\_NEG & \mbox{otherwise} \\
|
|
\end{array} \right .$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Normalize the inputs such that the leading digit of $y$ is greater than or equal to $\beta / 2$. \\
|
|
7. $norm \leftarrow (lg(\beta) - 1) - (\lceil lg(y) \rceil \mbox{ (mod }lg(\beta)\mbox{)})$ \\
|
|
8. $x \leftarrow x \cdot 2^{norm}, y \leftarrow y \cdot 2^{norm}$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Find the leading digit of the quotient. \\
|
|
9. $n \leftarrow x.used - 1, t \leftarrow y.used - 1$ \\
|
|
10. $y \leftarrow y \cdot \beta^{n - t}$ \\
|
|
11. While ($x \ge y$) do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}11.1 $q_{n - t} \leftarrow q_{n - t} + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}11.2 $x \leftarrow x - y$ \\
|
|
12. $y \leftarrow \lfloor y / \beta^{n-t} \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Continued on the next page. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_div}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_div} (continued). \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a, b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = \lfloor a/b \rfloor$, $d = a - bc$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
Now find the remainder fo the digits. \\
|
|
13. for $i$ from $n$ down to $(t + 1)$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.1 If $i > x.used$ then jump to the next iteration of this loop. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.2 If $x_{i} = y_{t}$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.2.1 $q_{i - t - 1} \leftarrow \beta - 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.3 else \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.3.1 $\hat r \leftarrow x_{i} \cdot \beta + x_{i - 1}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.3.2 $\hat r \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / y_{t} \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.3.3 $q_{i - t - 1} \leftarrow \hat r$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.4 $q_{i - t - 1} \leftarrow q_{i - t - 1} + 1$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Fixup quotient estimation. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.5 Loop \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.5.1 $q_{i - t - 1} \leftarrow q_{i - t - 1} - 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.5.2 t$1 \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.5.3 t$1_0 \leftarrow y_{t - 1}, $ t$1_1 \leftarrow y_t,$ t$1.used \leftarrow 2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.5.4 $t1 \leftarrow t1 \cdot q_{i - t - 1}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.5.5 t$2_0 \leftarrow x_{i - 2}, $ t$2_1 \leftarrow x_{i - 1}, $ t$2_2 \leftarrow x_i, $ t$2.used \leftarrow 3$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.5.6 If $\vert t1 \vert > \vert t2 \vert$ then goto step 13.5. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.6 t$1 \leftarrow y \cdot q_{i - t - 1}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.7 t$1 \leftarrow $ t$1 \cdot \beta^{i - t - 1}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.8 $x \leftarrow x - $ t$1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.9 If $x.sign = MP\_NEG$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.10 t$1 \leftarrow y$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.11 t$1 \leftarrow $ t$1 \cdot \beta^{i - t - 1}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.12 $x \leftarrow x + $ t$1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}13.13 $q_{i - t - 1} \leftarrow q_{i - t - 1} - 1$ \\
|
|
\\
|
|
Finalize the result. \\
|
|
14. Clamp excess digits of $q$ \\
|
|
15. $c \leftarrow q, c.sign \leftarrow sign$ \\
|
|
16. $x.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
17. $d \leftarrow \lfloor x / 2^{norm} \rfloor$ \\
|
|
18. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_div (continued)}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_div.}
|
|
This algorithm will calculate quotient and remainder from an integer division given a dividend and divisor. The algorithm is a signed
|
|
division and will produce a fully qualified quotient and remainder.
|
|
|
|
First the divisor $b$ must be non-zero which is enforced in step one. If the divisor is larger than the dividend than the quotient is implicitly
|
|
zero and the remainder is the dividend.
|
|
|
|
After the first two trivial cases of inputs are handled the variable $q$ is setup to receive the digits of the quotient. Two unsigned copies of the
|
|
divisor $y$ and dividend $x$ are made as well. The core of the division algorithm is an unsigned division and will only work if the values are
|
|
positive. Now the two values $x$ and $y$ must be normalized such that the leading digit of $y$ is greater than or equal to $\beta / 2$.
|
|
This is performed by shifting both to the left by enough bits to get the desired normalization.
|
|
|
|
At this point the division algorithm can begin producing digits of the quotient. Recall that maximum value of the estimation used is
|
|
$2\beta - {2 \over \beta}$ which means that a digit of the quotient must be first produced by another means. In this case $y$ is shifted
|
|
to the left (\textit{step ten}) so that it has the same number of digits as $x$. The loop on step eleven will subtract multiples of the
|
|
shifted copy of $y$ until $x$ is smaller. Since the leading digit of $y$ is greater than or equal to $\beta/2$ this loop will iterate at most two
|
|
times to produce the desired leading digit of the quotient.
|
|
|
|
Now the remainder of the digits can be produced. The equation $\hat q = \lfloor {{x_i \beta + x_{i-1}}\over y_t} \rfloor$ is used to fairly
|
|
accurately approximate the true quotient digit. The estimation can in theory produce an estimation as high as $2\beta - {2 \over \beta}$ but by
|
|
induction the upper quotient digit is correct (\textit{as established on step eleven}) and the estimate must be less than $\beta$.
|
|
|
|
Recall from section~\ref{sec:divest} that the estimation is never too low but may be too high. The next step of the estimation process is
|
|
to refine the estimation. The loop on step 13.5 uses $x_i\beta^2 + x_{i-1}\beta + x_{i-2}$ and $q_{i - t - 1}(y_t\beta + y_{t-1})$ as a higher
|
|
order approximation to adjust the quotient digit.
|
|
|
|
After both phases of estimation the quotient digit may still be off by a value of one\footnote{This is similar to the error introduced
|
|
by optimizing Barrett reduction.}. Steps 13.6 and 13.7 subtract the multiple of the divisor from the dividend (\textit{Similar to step 3.3 of
|
|
algorithm~\ref{fig:raddiv}} and then subsequently add a multiple of the divisor if the quotient was too large.
|
|
|
|
Now that the quotient has been determine finializing the result is a matter of clamping the quotient, fixing the sizes and de-normalizing the
|
|
remainder. An important aspect of this algorithm seemingly overlooked in other descriptions such as that of Algorithm 14.20 HAC \cite[pp. 598]{HAC}
|
|
is that when the estimations are being made (\textit{inside the loop on step 13.5}) that the digits $y_{t-1}$, $x_{i-2}$ and $x_{i-1}$ may lie
|
|
outside their respective boundaries. For example, if $t = 0$ or $i \le 1$ then the digits would be undefined. In those cases the digits should
|
|
respectively be replaced with a zero.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_div.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 #ifdef BN_MP_DIV_SMALL
|
|
018
|
|
019 /* slower bit-bang division... also smaller */
|
|
020 int mp_div(mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c, mp_int * d)
|
|
021 \{
|
|
022 mp_int ta, tb, tq, q;
|
|
023 int res, n, n2;
|
|
024
|
|
025 /* is divisor zero ? */
|
|
026 if (mp_iszero (b) == 1) \{
|
|
027 return MP_VAL;
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* if a < b then q=0, r = a */
|
|
031 if (mp_cmp_mag (a, b) == MP_LT) \{
|
|
032 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
033 res = mp_copy (a, d);
|
|
034 \} else \{
|
|
035 res = MP_OKAY;
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037 if (c != NULL) \{
|
|
038 mp_zero (c);
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040 return res;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* init our temps */
|
|
044 if ((res = mp_init_multi(&ta, &tb, &tq, &q, NULL) != MP_OKAY)) \{
|
|
045 return res;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048
|
|
049 mp_set(&tq, 1);
|
|
050 n = mp_count_bits(a) - mp_count_bits(b);
|
|
051 if (((res = mp_abs(a, &ta)) != MP_OKAY) ||
|
|
052 ((res = mp_abs(b, &tb)) != MP_OKAY) ||
|
|
053 ((res = mp_mul_2d(&tb, n, &tb)) != MP_OKAY) ||
|
|
054 ((res = mp_mul_2d(&tq, n, &tq)) != MP_OKAY)) \{
|
|
055 goto LBL_ERR;
|
|
056 \}
|
|
057
|
|
058 while (n-- >= 0) \{
|
|
059 if (mp_cmp(&tb, &ta) != MP_GT) \{
|
|
060 if (((res = mp_sub(&ta, &tb, &ta)) != MP_OKAY) ||
|
|
061 ((res = mp_add(&q, &tq, &q)) != MP_OKAY)) \{
|
|
062 goto LBL_ERR;
|
|
063 \}
|
|
064 \}
|
|
065 if (((res = mp_div_2d(&tb, 1, &tb, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) ||
|
|
066 ((res = mp_div_2d(&tq, 1, &tq, NULL)) != MP_OKAY)) \{
|
|
067 goto LBL_ERR;
|
|
068 \}
|
|
069 \}
|
|
070
|
|
071 /* now q == quotient and ta == remainder */
|
|
072 n = a->sign;
|
|
073 n2 = (a->sign == b->sign ? MP_ZPOS : MP_NEG);
|
|
074 if (c != NULL) \{
|
|
075 mp_exch(c, &q);
|
|
076 c->sign = (mp_iszero(c) == MP_YES) ? MP_ZPOS : n2;
|
|
077 \}
|
|
078 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
079 mp_exch(d, &ta);
|
|
080 d->sign = (mp_iszero(d) == MP_YES) ? MP_ZPOS : n;
|
|
081 \}
|
|
082 LBL_ERR:
|
|
083 mp_clear_multi(&ta, &tb, &tq, &q, NULL);
|
|
084 return res;
|
|
085 \}
|
|
086
|
|
087 #else
|
|
088
|
|
089 /* integer signed division.
|
|
090 * c*b + d == a [e.g. a/b, c=quotient, d=remainder]
|
|
091 * HAC pp.598 Algorithm 14.20
|
|
092 *
|
|
093 * Note that the description in HAC is horribly
|
|
094 * incomplete. For example, it doesn't consider
|
|
095 * the case where digits are removed from 'x' in
|
|
096 * the inner loop. It also doesn't consider the
|
|
097 * case that y has fewer than three digits, etc..
|
|
098 *
|
|
099 * The overall algorithm is as described as
|
|
100 * 14.20 from HAC but fixed to treat these cases.
|
|
101 */
|
|
102 int mp_div (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c, mp_int * d)
|
|
103 \{
|
|
104 mp_int q, x, y, t1, t2;
|
|
105 int res, n, t, i, norm, neg;
|
|
106
|
|
107 /* is divisor zero ? */
|
|
108 if (mp_iszero (b) == 1) \{
|
|
109 return MP_VAL;
|
|
110 \}
|
|
111
|
|
112 /* if a < b then q=0, r = a */
|
|
113 if (mp_cmp_mag (a, b) == MP_LT) \{
|
|
114 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
115 res = mp_copy (a, d);
|
|
116 \} else \{
|
|
117 res = MP_OKAY;
|
|
118 \}
|
|
119 if (c != NULL) \{
|
|
120 mp_zero (c);
|
|
121 \}
|
|
122 return res;
|
|
123 \}
|
|
124
|
|
125 if ((res = mp_init_size (&q, a->used + 2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
126 return res;
|
|
127 \}
|
|
128 q.used = a->used + 2;
|
|
129
|
|
130 if ((res = mp_init (&t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
131 goto LBL_Q;
|
|
132 \}
|
|
133
|
|
134 if ((res = mp_init (&t2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
135 goto LBL_T1;
|
|
136 \}
|
|
137
|
|
138 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&x, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
139 goto LBL_T2;
|
|
140 \}
|
|
141
|
|
142 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&y, b)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
143 goto LBL_X;
|
|
144 \}
|
|
145
|
|
146 /* fix the sign */
|
|
147 neg = (a->sign == b->sign) ? MP_ZPOS : MP_NEG;
|
|
148 x.sign = y.sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
149
|
|
150 /* normalize both x and y, ensure that y >= b/2, [b == 2**DIGIT_BIT] */
|
|
151 norm = mp_count_bits(&y) % DIGIT_BIT;
|
|
152 if (norm < (int)(DIGIT_BIT-1)) \{
|
|
153 norm = (DIGIT_BIT-1) - norm;
|
|
154 if ((res = mp_mul_2d (&x, norm, &x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
155 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
156 \}
|
|
157 if ((res = mp_mul_2d (&y, norm, &y)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
158 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
159 \}
|
|
160 \} else \{
|
|
161 norm = 0;
|
|
162 \}
|
|
163
|
|
164 /* note hac does 0 based, so if used==5 then its 0,1,2,3,4, e.g. use 4 */
|
|
165 n = x.used - 1;
|
|
166 t = y.used - 1;
|
|
167
|
|
168 /* while (x >= y*b**n-t) do \{ q[n-t] += 1; x -= y*b**\{n-t\} \} */
|
|
169 if ((res = mp_lshd (&y, n - t)) != MP_OKAY) \{ /* y = y*b**\{n-t\} */
|
|
170 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
171 \}
|
|
172
|
|
173 while (mp_cmp (&x, &y) != MP_LT) \{
|
|
174 ++(q.dp[n - t]);
|
|
175 if ((res = mp_sub (&x, &y, &x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
176 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
177 \}
|
|
178 \}
|
|
179
|
|
180 /* reset y by shifting it back down */
|
|
181 mp_rshd (&y, n - t);
|
|
182
|
|
183 /* step 3. for i from n down to (t + 1) */
|
|
184 for (i = n; i >= (t + 1); i--) \{
|
|
185 if (i > x.used) \{
|
|
186 continue;
|
|
187 \}
|
|
188
|
|
189 /* step 3.1 if xi == yt then set q\{i-t-1\} to b-1,
|
|
190 * otherwise set q\{i-t-1\} to (xi*b + x\{i-1\})/yt */
|
|
191 if (x.dp[i] == y.dp[t]) \{
|
|
192 q.dp[i - t - 1] = ((((mp_digit)1) << DIGIT_BIT) - 1);
|
|
193 \} else \{
|
|
194 mp_word tmp;
|
|
195 tmp = ((mp_word) x.dp[i]) << ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT);
|
|
196 tmp |= ((mp_word) x.dp[i - 1]);
|
|
197 tmp /= ((mp_word) y.dp[t]);
|
|
198 if (tmp > (mp_word) MP_MASK)
|
|
199 tmp = MP_MASK;
|
|
200 q.dp[i - t - 1] = (mp_digit) (tmp & (mp_word) (MP_MASK));
|
|
201 \}
|
|
202
|
|
203 /* while (q\{i-t-1\} * (yt * b + y\{t-1\})) >
|
|
204 xi * b**2 + xi-1 * b + xi-2
|
|
205
|
|
206 do q\{i-t-1\} -= 1;
|
|
207 */
|
|
208 q.dp[i - t - 1] = (q.dp[i - t - 1] + 1) & MP_MASK;
|
|
209 do \{
|
|
210 q.dp[i - t - 1] = (q.dp[i - t - 1] - 1) & MP_MASK;
|
|
211
|
|
212 /* find left hand */
|
|
213 mp_zero (&t1);
|
|
214 t1.dp[0] = (t - 1 < 0) ? 0 : y.dp[t - 1];
|
|
215 t1.dp[1] = y.dp[t];
|
|
216 t1.used = 2;
|
|
217 if ((res = mp_mul_d (&t1, q.dp[i - t - 1], &t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
218 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
219 \}
|
|
220
|
|
221 /* find right hand */
|
|
222 t2.dp[0] = (i - 2 < 0) ? 0 : x.dp[i - 2];
|
|
223 t2.dp[1] = (i - 1 < 0) ? 0 : x.dp[i - 1];
|
|
224 t2.dp[2] = x.dp[i];
|
|
225 t2.used = 3;
|
|
226 \} while (mp_cmp_mag(&t1, &t2) == MP_GT);
|
|
227
|
|
228 /* step 3.3 x = x - q\{i-t-1\} * y * b**\{i-t-1\} */
|
|
229 if ((res = mp_mul_d (&y, q.dp[i - t - 1], &t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
230 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
231 \}
|
|
232
|
|
233 if ((res = mp_lshd (&t1, i - t - 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
234 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
235 \}
|
|
236
|
|
237 if ((res = mp_sub (&x, &t1, &x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
238 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
239 \}
|
|
240
|
|
241 /* if x < 0 then \{ x = x + y*b**\{i-t-1\}; q\{i-t-1\} -= 1; \} */
|
|
242 if (x.sign == MP_NEG) \{
|
|
243 if ((res = mp_copy (&y, &t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
244 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
245 \}
|
|
246 if ((res = mp_lshd (&t1, i - t - 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
247 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
248 \}
|
|
249 if ((res = mp_add (&x, &t1, &x)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
250 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
251 \}
|
|
252
|
|
253 q.dp[i - t - 1] = (q.dp[i - t - 1] - 1UL) & MP_MASK;
|
|
254 \}
|
|
255 \}
|
|
256
|
|
257 /* now q is the quotient and x is the remainder
|
|
258 * [which we have to normalize]
|
|
259 */
|
|
260
|
|
261 /* get sign before writing to c */
|
|
262 x.sign = x.used == 0 ? MP_ZPOS : a->sign;
|
|
263
|
|
264 if (c != NULL) \{
|
|
265 mp_clamp (&q);
|
|
266 mp_exch (&q, c);
|
|
267 c->sign = neg;
|
|
268 \}
|
|
269
|
|
270 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
271 mp_div_2d (&x, norm, &x, NULL);
|
|
272 mp_exch (&x, d);
|
|
273 \}
|
|
274
|
|
275 res = MP_OKAY;
|
|
276
|
|
277 LBL_Y:mp_clear (&y);
|
|
278 LBL_X:mp_clear (&x);
|
|
279 LBL_T2:mp_clear (&t2);
|
|
280 LBL_T1:mp_clear (&t1);
|
|
281 LBL_Q:mp_clear (&q);
|
|
282 return res;
|
|
283 \}
|
|
284
|
|
285 #endif
|
|
286
|
|
287 #endif
|
|
288
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The implementation of this algorithm differs slightly from the pseudo code presented previously. In this algorithm either of the quotient $c$ or
|
|
remainder $d$ may be passed as a \textbf{NULL} pointer which indicates their value is not desired. For example, the C code to call the division
|
|
algorithm with only the quotient is
|
|
|
|
\begin{verbatim}
|
|
mp_div(&a, &b, &c, NULL); /* c = [a/b] */
|
|
\end{verbatim}
|
|
|
|
Lines 37 and 44 handle the two trivial cases of inputs which are division by zero and dividend smaller than the divisor
|
|
respectively. After the two trivial cases all of the temporary variables are initialized. Line 105 determines the sign of
|
|
the quotient and line 76 ensures that both $x$ and $y$ are positive.
|
|
|
|
The number of bits in the leading digit is calculated on line 105. Implictly an mp\_int with $r$ digits will require $lg(\beta)(r-1) + k$ bits
|
|
of precision which when reduced modulo $lg(\beta)$ produces the value of $k$. In this case $k$ is the number of bits in the leading digit which is
|
|
exactly what is required. For the algorithm to operate $k$ must equal $lg(\beta) - 1$ and when it does not the inputs must be normalized by shifting
|
|
them to the left by $lg(\beta) - 1 - k$ bits.
|
|
|
|
Throughout the variables $n$ and $t$ will represent the highest digit of $x$ and $y$ respectively. These are first used to produce the
|
|
leading digit of the quotient. The loop beginning on line 183 will produce the remainder of the quotient digits.
|
|
|
|
The conditional ``continue'' on line 114 is used to prevent the algorithm from reading past the leading edge of $x$ which can occur when the
|
|
algorithm eliminates multiple non-zero digits in a single iteration. This ensures that $x_i$ is always non-zero since by definition the digits
|
|
above the $i$'th position $x$ must be zero in order for the quotient to be precise\footnote{Precise as far as integer division is concerned.}.
|
|
|
|
Lines 130, 130 and 134 through 134 manually construct the high accuracy estimations by setting the digits of the two mp\_int
|
|
variables directly.
|
|
|
|
\section{Single Digit Helpers}
|
|
|
|
This section briefly describes a series of single digit helper algorithms which come in handy when working with small constants. All of
|
|
the helper functions assume the single digit input is positive and will treat them as such.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Single Digit Addition and Subtraction}
|
|
|
|
Both addition and subtraction are performed by ``cheating'' and using mp\_set followed by the higher level addition or subtraction
|
|
algorithms. As a result these algorithms are subtantially simpler with a slight cost in performance.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_add\_d}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and a mp\_digit $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = a + b$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $t \leftarrow b$ (\textit{mp\_set}) \\
|
|
2. $c \leftarrow a + t$ \\
|
|
3. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_add\_d}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_add\_d.}
|
|
This algorithm initiates a temporary mp\_int with the value of the single digit and uses algorithm mp\_add to add the two values together.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_add\_d.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* single digit addition */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_add_d (mp_int * a, mp_digit b, mp_int * c)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int res, ix, oldused;
|
|
022 mp_digit *tmpa, *tmpc, mu;
|
|
023
|
|
024 /* grow c as required */
|
|
025 if (c->alloc < a->used + 1) \{
|
|
026 if ((res = mp_grow(c, a->used + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
027 return res;
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* if a is negative and |a| >= b, call c = |a| - b */
|
|
032 if (a->sign == MP_NEG && (a->used > 1 || a->dp[0] >= b)) \{
|
|
033 /* temporarily fix sign of a */
|
|
034 a->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
035
|
|
036 /* c = |a| - b */
|
|
037 res = mp_sub_d(a, b, c);
|
|
038
|
|
039 /* fix sign */
|
|
040 a->sign = c->sign = MP_NEG;
|
|
041
|
|
042 /* clamp */
|
|
043 mp_clamp(c);
|
|
044
|
|
045 return res;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 /* old number of used digits in c */
|
|
049 oldused = c->used;
|
|
050
|
|
051 /* sign always positive */
|
|
052 c->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
053
|
|
054 /* source alias */
|
|
055 tmpa = a->dp;
|
|
056
|
|
057 /* destination alias */
|
|
058 tmpc = c->dp;
|
|
059
|
|
060 /* if a is positive */
|
|
061 if (a->sign == MP_ZPOS) \{
|
|
062 /* add digit, after this we're propagating
|
|
063 * the carry.
|
|
064 */
|
|
065 *tmpc = *tmpa++ + b;
|
|
066 mu = *tmpc >> DIGIT_BIT;
|
|
067 *tmpc++ &= MP_MASK;
|
|
068
|
|
069 /* now handle rest of the digits */
|
|
070 for (ix = 1; ix < a->used; ix++) \{
|
|
071 *tmpc = *tmpa++ + mu;
|
|
072 mu = *tmpc >> DIGIT_BIT;
|
|
073 *tmpc++ &= MP_MASK;
|
|
074 \}
|
|
075 /* set final carry */
|
|
076 ix++;
|
|
077 *tmpc++ = mu;
|
|
078
|
|
079 /* setup size */
|
|
080 c->used = a->used + 1;
|
|
081 \} else \{
|
|
082 /* a was negative and |a| < b */
|
|
083 c->used = 1;
|
|
084
|
|
085 /* the result is a single digit */
|
|
086 if (a->used == 1) \{
|
|
087 *tmpc++ = b - a->dp[0];
|
|
088 \} else \{
|
|
089 *tmpc++ = b;
|
|
090 \}
|
|
091
|
|
092 /* setup count so the clearing of oldused
|
|
093 * can fall through correctly
|
|
094 */
|
|
095 ix = 1;
|
|
096 \}
|
|
097
|
|
098 /* now zero to oldused */
|
|
099 while (ix++ < oldused) \{
|
|
100 *tmpc++ = 0;
|
|
101 \}
|
|
102 mp_clamp(c);
|
|
103
|
|
104 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
105 \}
|
|
106
|
|
107 #endif
|
|
108
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Clever use of the letter 't'.
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Subtraction}
|
|
The single digit subtraction algorithm mp\_sub\_d is essentially the same except it uses mp\_sub to subtract the digit from the mp\_int.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Single Digit Multiplication}
|
|
Single digit multiplication arises enough in division and radix conversion that it ought to be implement as a special case of the baseline
|
|
multiplication algorithm. Essentially this algorithm is a modified version of algorithm s\_mp\_mul\_digs where one of the multiplicands
|
|
only has one digit.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_mul\_d}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and a mp\_digit $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = ab$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $pa \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
2. Grow $c$ to at least $pa + 1$ digits. \\
|
|
3. $oldused \leftarrow c.used$ \\
|
|
4. $c.used \leftarrow pa + 1$ \\
|
|
5. $c.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
6. $\mu \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
7. for $ix$ from $0$ to $pa - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $\hat r \leftarrow \mu + a_{ix}b$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.2 $c_{ix} \leftarrow \hat r \mbox{ (mod }\beta\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.3 $\mu \leftarrow \lfloor \hat r / \beta \rfloor$ \\
|
|
8. $c_{pa} \leftarrow \mu$ \\
|
|
9. for $ix$ from $pa + 1$ to $oldused$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 $c_{ix} \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
10. Clamp excess digits of $c$. \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_mul\_d}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_mul\_d.}
|
|
This algorithm quickly multiplies an mp\_int by a small single digit value. It is specially tailored to the job and has a minimal of overhead.
|
|
Unlike the full multiplication algorithms this algorithm does not require any significnat temporary storage or memory allocations.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_mul\_d.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* multiply by a digit */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_mul_d (mp_int * a, mp_digit b, mp_int * c)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 mp_digit u, *tmpa, *tmpc;
|
|
022 mp_word r;
|
|
023 int ix, res, olduse;
|
|
024
|
|
025 /* make sure c is big enough to hold a*b */
|
|
026 if (c->alloc < a->used + 1) \{
|
|
027 if ((res = mp_grow (c, a->used + 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
028 return res;
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030 \}
|
|
031
|
|
032 /* get the original destinations used count */
|
|
033 olduse = c->used;
|
|
034
|
|
035 /* set the sign */
|
|
036 c->sign = a->sign;
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* alias for a->dp [source] */
|
|
039 tmpa = a->dp;
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* alias for c->dp [dest] */
|
|
042 tmpc = c->dp;
|
|
043
|
|
044 /* zero carry */
|
|
045 u = 0;
|
|
046
|
|
047 /* compute columns */
|
|
048 for (ix = 0; ix < a->used; ix++) \{
|
|
049 /* compute product and carry sum for this term */
|
|
050 r = ((mp_word) u) + ((mp_word)*tmpa++) * ((mp_word)b);
|
|
051
|
|
052 /* mask off higher bits to get a single digit */
|
|
053 *tmpc++ = (mp_digit) (r & ((mp_word) MP_MASK));
|
|
054
|
|
055 /* send carry into next iteration */
|
|
056 u = (mp_digit) (r >> ((mp_word) DIGIT_BIT));
|
|
057 \}
|
|
058
|
|
059 /* store final carry [if any] and increment ix offset */
|
|
060 *tmpc++ = u;
|
|
061 ++ix;
|
|
062
|
|
063 /* now zero digits above the top */
|
|
064 while (ix++ < olduse) \{
|
|
065 *tmpc++ = 0;
|
|
066 \}
|
|
067
|
|
068 /* set used count */
|
|
069 c->used = a->used + 1;
|
|
070 mp_clamp(c);
|
|
071
|
|
072 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
073 \}
|
|
074 #endif
|
|
075
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
In this implementation the destination $c$ may point to the same mp\_int as the source $a$ since the result is written after the digit is
|
|
read from the source. This function uses pointer aliases $tmpa$ and $tmpc$ for the digits of $a$ and $c$ respectively.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Single Digit Division}
|
|
Like the single digit multiplication algorithm, single digit division is also a fairly common algorithm used in radix conversion. Since the
|
|
divisor is only a single digit a specialized variant of the division algorithm can be used to compute the quotient.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_div\_d}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and a mp\_digit $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = \lfloor a / b \rfloor, d = a - cb$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b = 0$ then return(\textit{MP\_VAL}).\\
|
|
2. If $b = 3$ then use algorithm mp\_div\_3 instead. \\
|
|
3. Init $q$ to $a.used$ digits. \\
|
|
4. $q.used \leftarrow a.used$ \\
|
|
5. $q.sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
6. $\hat w \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
7. for $ix$ from $a.used - 1$ down to $0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $\hat w \leftarrow \hat w \beta + a_{ix}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.2 If $\hat w \ge b$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.2.1 $t \leftarrow \lfloor \hat w / b \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.2.2 $\hat w \leftarrow \hat w \mbox{ (mod }b\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.3 else\\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.3.1 $t \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.4 $q_{ix} \leftarrow t$ \\
|
|
8. $d \leftarrow \hat w$ \\
|
|
9. Clamp excess digits of $q$. \\
|
|
10. $c \leftarrow q$ \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_div\_d}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_div\_d.}
|
|
This algorithm divides the mp\_int $a$ by the single mp\_digit $b$ using an optimized approach. Essentially in every iteration of the
|
|
algorithm another digit of the dividend is reduced and another digit of quotient produced. Provided $b < \beta$ the value of $\hat w$
|
|
after step 7.1 will be limited such that $0 \le \lfloor \hat w / b \rfloor < \beta$.
|
|
|
|
If the divisor $b$ is equal to three a variant of this algorithm is used which is called mp\_div\_3. It replaces the division by three with
|
|
a multiplication by $\lfloor \beta / 3 \rfloor$ and the appropriate shift and residual fixup. In essence it is much like the Barrett reduction
|
|
from chapter seven.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_div\_d.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 static int s_is_power_of_two(mp_digit b, int *p)
|
|
018 \{
|
|
019 int x;
|
|
020
|
|
021 for (x = 1; x < DIGIT_BIT; x++) \{
|
|
022 if (b == (((mp_digit)1)<<x)) \{
|
|
023 *p = x;
|
|
024 return 1;
|
|
025 \}
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027 return 0;
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* single digit division (based on routine from MPI) */
|
|
031 int mp_div_d (mp_int * a, mp_digit b, mp_int * c, mp_digit * d)
|
|
032 \{
|
|
033 mp_int q;
|
|
034 mp_word w;
|
|
035 mp_digit t;
|
|
036 int res, ix;
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* cannot divide by zero */
|
|
039 if (b == 0) \{
|
|
040 return MP_VAL;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* quick outs */
|
|
044 if (b == 1 || mp_iszero(a) == 1) \{
|
|
045 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
046 *d = 0;
|
|
047 \}
|
|
048 if (c != NULL) \{
|
|
049 return mp_copy(a, c);
|
|
050 \}
|
|
051 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
052 \}
|
|
053
|
|
054 /* power of two ? */
|
|
055 if (s_is_power_of_two(b, &ix) == 1) \{
|
|
056 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
057 *d = a->dp[0] & ((((mp_digit)1)<<ix) - 1);
|
|
058 \}
|
|
059 if (c != NULL) \{
|
|
060 return mp_div_2d(a, ix, c, NULL);
|
|
061 \}
|
|
062 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
063 \}
|
|
064
|
|
065 #ifdef BN_MP_DIV_3_C
|
|
066 /* three? */
|
|
067 if (b == 3) \{
|
|
068 return mp_div_3(a, c, d);
|
|
069 \}
|
|
070 #endif
|
|
071
|
|
072 /* no easy answer [c'est la vie]. Just division */
|
|
073 if ((res = mp_init_size(&q, a->used)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
074 return res;
|
|
075 \}
|
|
076
|
|
077 q.used = a->used;
|
|
078 q.sign = a->sign;
|
|
079 w = 0;
|
|
080 for (ix = a->used - 1; ix >= 0; ix--) \{
|
|
081 w = (w << ((mp_word)DIGIT_BIT)) | ((mp_word)a->dp[ix]);
|
|
082
|
|
083 if (w >= b) \{
|
|
084 t = (mp_digit)(w / b);
|
|
085 w -= ((mp_word)t) * ((mp_word)b);
|
|
086 \} else \{
|
|
087 t = 0;
|
|
088 \}
|
|
089 q.dp[ix] = (mp_digit)t;
|
|
090 \}
|
|
091
|
|
092 if (d != NULL) \{
|
|
093 *d = (mp_digit)w;
|
|
094 \}
|
|
095
|
|
096 if (c != NULL) \{
|
|
097 mp_clamp(&q);
|
|
098 mp_exch(&q, c);
|
|
099 \}
|
|
100 mp_clear(&q);
|
|
101
|
|
102 return res;
|
|
103 \}
|
|
104
|
|
105 #endif
|
|
106
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Like the implementation of algorithm mp\_div this algorithm allows either of the quotient or remainder to be passed as a \textbf{NULL} pointer to
|
|
indicate the respective value is not required. This allows a trivial single digit modular reduction algorithm, mp\_mod\_d to be created.
|
|
|
|
The division and remainder on lines 43 and @45,%@ can be replaced often by a single division on most processors. For example, the 32-bit x86 based
|
|
processors can divide a 64-bit quantity by a 32-bit quantity and produce the quotient and remainder simultaneously. Unfortunately the GCC
|
|
compiler does not recognize that optimization and will actually produce two function calls to find the quotient and remainder respectively.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Single Digit Root Extraction}
|
|
|
|
Finding the $n$'th root of an integer is fairly easy as far as numerical analysis is concerned. Algorithms such as the Newton-Raphson approximation
|
|
(\ref{eqn:newton}) series will converge very quickly to a root for any continuous function $f(x)$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
x_{i+1} = x_i - {f(x_i) \over f'(x_i)}
|
|
\label{eqn:newton}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
In this case the $n$'th root is desired and $f(x) = x^n - a$ where $a$ is the integer of which the root is desired. The derivative of $f(x)$ is
|
|
simply $f'(x) = nx^{n - 1}$. Of particular importance is that this algorithm will be used over the integers not over the a more continuous domain
|
|
such as the real numbers. As a result the root found can be above the true root by few and must be manually adjusted. Ideally at the end of the
|
|
algorithm the $n$'th root $b$ of an integer $a$ is desired such that $b^n \le a$.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_n\_root}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and a mp\_digit $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c^b \le a$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b$ is even and $a.sign = MP\_NEG$ return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
2. $sign \leftarrow a.sign$ \\
|
|
3. $a.sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
4. t$2 \leftarrow 2$ \\
|
|
5. Loop \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 t$1 \leftarrow $ t$2$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 t$3 \leftarrow $ t$1^{b - 1}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 t$2 \leftarrow $ t$3 $ $\cdot$ t$1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.4 t$2 \leftarrow $ t$2 - a$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.5 t$3 \leftarrow $ t$3 \cdot b$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.6 t$3 \leftarrow \lfloor $t$2 / $t$3 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.7 t$2 \leftarrow $ t$1 - $ t$3$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.8 If t$1 \ne $ t$2$ then goto step 5. \\
|
|
6. Loop \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 t$2 \leftarrow $ t$1^b$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 If t$2 > a$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.2.1 t$1 \leftarrow $ t$1 - 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.2.2 Goto step 6. \\
|
|
7. $a.sign \leftarrow sign$ \\
|
|
8. $c \leftarrow $ t$1$ \\
|
|
9. $c.sign \leftarrow sign$ \\
|
|
10. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_n\_root}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_n\_root.}
|
|
This algorithm finds the integer $n$'th root of an input using the Newton-Raphson approach. It is partially optimized based on the observation
|
|
that the numerator of ${f(x) \over f'(x)}$ can be derived from a partial denominator. That is at first the denominator is calculated by finding
|
|
$x^{b - 1}$. This value can then be multiplied by $x$ and have $a$ subtracted from it to find the numerator. This saves a total of $b - 1$
|
|
multiplications by t$1$ inside the loop.
|
|
|
|
The initial value of the approximation is t$2 = 2$ which allows the algorithm to start with very small values and quickly converge on the
|
|
root. Ideally this algorithm is meant to find the $n$'th root of an input where $n$ is bounded by $2 \le n \le 5$.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_n\_root.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* find the n'th root of an integer
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * Result found such that (c)**b <= a and (c+1)**b > a
|
|
020 *
|
|
021 * This algorithm uses Newton's approximation
|
|
022 * x[i+1] = x[i] - f(x[i])/f'(x[i])
|
|
023 * which will find the root in log(N) time where
|
|
024 * each step involves a fair bit. This is not meant to
|
|
025 * find huge roots [square and cube, etc].
|
|
026 */
|
|
027 int mp_n_root (mp_int * a, mp_digit b, mp_int * c)
|
|
028 \{
|
|
029 mp_int t1, t2, t3;
|
|
030 int res, neg;
|
|
031
|
|
032 /* input must be positive if b is even */
|
|
033 if ((b & 1) == 0 && a->sign == MP_NEG) \{
|
|
034 return MP_VAL;
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 if ((res = mp_init (&t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
038 return res;
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040
|
|
041 if ((res = mp_init (&t2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
042 goto LBL_T1;
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044
|
|
045 if ((res = mp_init (&t3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
046 goto LBL_T2;
|
|
047 \}
|
|
048
|
|
049 /* if a is negative fudge the sign but keep track */
|
|
050 neg = a->sign;
|
|
051 a->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
052
|
|
053 /* t2 = 2 */
|
|
054 mp_set (&t2, 2);
|
|
055
|
|
056 do \{
|
|
057 /* t1 = t2 */
|
|
058 if ((res = mp_copy (&t2, &t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
059 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
060 \}
|
|
061
|
|
062 /* t2 = t1 - ((t1**b - a) / (b * t1**(b-1))) */
|
|
063
|
|
064 /* t3 = t1**(b-1) */
|
|
065 if ((res = mp_expt_d (&t1, b - 1, &t3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
066 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
067 \}
|
|
068
|
|
069 /* numerator */
|
|
070 /* t2 = t1**b */
|
|
071 if ((res = mp_mul (&t3, &t1, &t2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
072 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
073 \}
|
|
074
|
|
075 /* t2 = t1**b - a */
|
|
076 if ((res = mp_sub (&t2, a, &t2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
077 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
078 \}
|
|
079
|
|
080 /* denominator */
|
|
081 /* t3 = t1**(b-1) * b */
|
|
082 if ((res = mp_mul_d (&t3, b, &t3)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
083 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
084 \}
|
|
085
|
|
086 /* t3 = (t1**b - a)/(b * t1**(b-1)) */
|
|
087 if ((res = mp_div (&t2, &t3, &t3, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
088 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
089 \}
|
|
090
|
|
091 if ((res = mp_sub (&t1, &t3, &t2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
092 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
093 \}
|
|
094 \} while (mp_cmp (&t1, &t2) != MP_EQ);
|
|
095
|
|
096 /* result can be off by a few so check */
|
|
097 for (;;) \{
|
|
098 if ((res = mp_expt_d (&t1, b, &t2)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
099 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
100 \}
|
|
101
|
|
102 if (mp_cmp (&t2, a) == MP_GT) \{
|
|
103 if ((res = mp_sub_d (&t1, 1, &t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
104 goto LBL_T3;
|
|
105 \}
|
|
106 \} else \{
|
|
107 break;
|
|
108 \}
|
|
109 \}
|
|
110
|
|
111 /* reset the sign of a first */
|
|
112 a->sign = neg;
|
|
113
|
|
114 /* set the result */
|
|
115 mp_exch (&t1, c);
|
|
116
|
|
117 /* set the sign of the result */
|
|
118 c->sign = neg;
|
|
119
|
|
120 res = MP_OKAY;
|
|
121
|
|
122 LBL_T3:mp_clear (&t3);
|
|
123 LBL_T2:mp_clear (&t2);
|
|
124 LBL_T1:mp_clear (&t1);
|
|
125 return res;
|
|
126 \}
|
|
127 #endif
|
|
128
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\section{Random Number Generation}
|
|
|
|
Random numbers come up in a variety of activities from public key cryptography to simple simulations and various randomized algorithms. Pollard-Rho
|
|
factoring for example, can make use of random values as starting points to find factors of a composite integer. In this case the algorithm presented
|
|
is solely for simulations and not intended for cryptographic use.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_rand}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. An integer $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. A pseudo-random number of $b$ digits \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $a \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
2. If $b \le 0$ return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}) \\
|
|
3. Pick a non-zero random digit $d$. \\
|
|
4. $a \leftarrow a + d$ \\
|
|
5. for $ix$ from 1 to $d - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $a \leftarrow a \cdot \beta$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 Pick a random digit $d$. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 $a \leftarrow a + d$ \\
|
|
6. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_rand}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_rand.}
|
|
This algorithm produces a pseudo-random integer of $b$ digits. By ensuring that the first digit is non-zero the algorithm also guarantees that the
|
|
final result has at least $b$ digits. It relies heavily on a third-part random number generator which should ideally generate uniformly all of
|
|
the integers from $0$ to $\beta - 1$.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_rand.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* makes a pseudo-random int of a given size */
|
|
018 int
|
|
019 mp_rand (mp_int * a, int digits)
|
|
020 \{
|
|
021 int res;
|
|
022 mp_digit d;
|
|
023
|
|
024 mp_zero (a);
|
|
025 if (digits <= 0) \{
|
|
026 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
027 \}
|
|
028
|
|
029 /* first place a random non-zero digit */
|
|
030 do \{
|
|
031 d = ((mp_digit) abs (rand ())) & MP_MASK;
|
|
032 \} while (d == 0);
|
|
033
|
|
034 if ((res = mp_add_d (a, d, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
035 return res;
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037
|
|
038 while (--digits > 0) \{
|
|
039 if ((res = mp_lshd (a, 1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
040 return res;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042
|
|
043 if ((res = mp_add_d (a, ((mp_digit) abs (rand ())), a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
044 return res;
|
|
045 \}
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050 #endif
|
|
051
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\section{Formatted Representations}
|
|
The ability to emit a radix-$n$ textual representation of an integer is useful for interacting with human parties. For example, the ability to
|
|
be given a string of characters such as ``114585'' and turn it into the radix-$\beta$ equivalent would make it easier to enter numbers
|
|
into a program.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Reading Radix-n Input}
|
|
For the purposes of this text we will assume that a simple lower ASCII map (\ref{fig:ASC}) is used for the values of from $0$ to $63$ to
|
|
printable characters. For example, when the character ``N'' is read it represents the integer $23$. The first $16$ characters of the
|
|
map are for the common representations up to hexadecimal. After that they match the ``base64'' encoding scheme which are suitable chosen
|
|
such that they are printable. While outputting as base64 may not be too helpful for human operators it does allow communication via non binary
|
|
mediums.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[here]
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{cc|cc|cc|cc}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Value} & \textbf{Char} & \textbf{Value} & \textbf{Char} & \textbf{Value} & \textbf{Char} & \textbf{Value} & \textbf{Char} \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
0 & 0 & 1 & 1 & 2 & 2 & 3 & 3 \\
|
|
4 & 4 & 5 & 5 & 6 & 6 & 7 & 7 \\
|
|
8 & 8 & 9 & 9 & 10 & A & 11 & B \\
|
|
12 & C & 13 & D & 14 & E & 15 & F \\
|
|
16 & G & 17 & H & 18 & I & 19 & J \\
|
|
20 & K & 21 & L & 22 & M & 23 & N \\
|
|
24 & O & 25 & P & 26 & Q & 27 & R \\
|
|
28 & S & 29 & T & 30 & U & 31 & V \\
|
|
32 & W & 33 & X & 34 & Y & 35 & Z \\
|
|
36 & a & 37 & b & 38 & c & 39 & d \\
|
|
40 & e & 41 & f & 42 & g & 43 & h \\
|
|
44 & i & 45 & j & 46 & k & 47 & l \\
|
|
48 & m & 49 & n & 50 & o & 51 & p \\
|
|
52 & q & 53 & r & 54 & s & 55 & t \\
|
|
56 & u & 57 & v & 58 & w & 59 & x \\
|
|
60 & y & 61 & z & 62 & $+$ & 63 & $/$ \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Lower ASCII Map}
|
|
\label{fig:ASC}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_read\_radix}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. A string $str$ of length $sn$ and radix $r$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The radix-$\beta$ equivalent mp\_int. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $r < 2$ or $r > 64$ return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
2. $ix \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
3. If $str_0 =$ ``-'' then do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $ix \leftarrow ix + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.2 $sign \leftarrow MP\_NEG$ \\
|
|
4. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $sign \leftarrow MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
5. $a \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
6. for $iy$ from $ix$ to $sn - 1$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 Let $y$ denote the position in the map of $str_{iy}$. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 If $str_{iy}$ is not in the map or $y \ge r$ then goto step 7. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 $a \leftarrow a \cdot r$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.4 $a \leftarrow a + y$ \\
|
|
7. If $a \ne 0$ then $a.sign \leftarrow sign$ \\
|
|
8. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_read\_radix}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_read\_radix.}
|
|
This algorithm will read an ASCII string and produce the radix-$\beta$ mp\_int representation of the same integer. A minus symbol ``-'' may precede the
|
|
string to indicate the value is negative, otherwise it is assumed to be positive. The algorithm will read up to $sn$ characters from the input
|
|
and will stop when it reads a character it cannot map the algorithm stops reading characters from the string. This allows numbers to be embedded
|
|
as part of larger input without any significant problem.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_read\_radix.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* read a string [ASCII] in a given radix */
|
|
018 int mp_read_radix (mp_int * a, const char *str, int radix)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int y, res, neg;
|
|
021 char ch;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* zero the digit bignum */
|
|
024 mp_zero(a);
|
|
025
|
|
026 /* make sure the radix is ok */
|
|
027 if (radix < 2 || radix > 64) \{
|
|
028 return MP_VAL;
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* if the leading digit is a
|
|
032 * minus set the sign to negative.
|
|
033 */
|
|
034 if (*str == '-') \{
|
|
035 ++str;
|
|
036 neg = MP_NEG;
|
|
037 \} else \{
|
|
038 neg = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* set the integer to the default of zero */
|
|
042 mp_zero (a);
|
|
043
|
|
044 /* process each digit of the string */
|
|
045 while (*str) \{
|
|
046 /* if the radix < 36 the conversion is case insensitive
|
|
047 * this allows numbers like 1AB and 1ab to represent the same value
|
|
048 * [e.g. in hex]
|
|
049 */
|
|
050 ch = (char) ((radix < 36) ? toupper (*str) : *str);
|
|
051 for (y = 0; y < 64; y++) \{
|
|
052 if (ch == mp_s_rmap[y]) \{
|
|
053 break;
|
|
054 \}
|
|
055 \}
|
|
056
|
|
057 /* if the char was found in the map
|
|
058 * and is less than the given radix add it
|
|
059 * to the number, otherwise exit the loop.
|
|
060 */
|
|
061 if (y < radix) \{
|
|
062 if ((res = mp_mul_d (a, (mp_digit) radix, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
063 return res;
|
|
064 \}
|
|
065 if ((res = mp_add_d (a, (mp_digit) y, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
066 return res;
|
|
067 \}
|
|
068 \} else \{
|
|
069 break;
|
|
070 \}
|
|
071 ++str;
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073
|
|
074 /* set the sign only if a != 0 */
|
|
075 if (mp_iszero(a) != 1) \{
|
|
076 a->sign = neg;
|
|
077 \}
|
|
078 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
079 \}
|
|
080 #endif
|
|
081
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Generating Radix-$n$ Output}
|
|
Generating radix-$n$ output is fairly trivial with a division and remainder algorithm.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_toradix}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. A mp\_int $a$ and an integer $r$\\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The radix-$r$ representation of $a$ \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $r < 2$ or $r > 64$ return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
2. If $a = 0$ then $str = $ ``$0$'' and return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
3. $t \leftarrow a$ \\
|
|
4. $str \leftarrow$ ``'' \\
|
|
5. if $t.sign = MP\_NEG$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $str \leftarrow str + $ ``-'' \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $t.sign = MP\_ZPOS$ \\
|
|
6. While ($t \ne 0$) do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $d \leftarrow t \mbox{ (mod }r\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 $t \leftarrow \lfloor t / r \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 Look up $d$ in the map and store the equivalent character in $y$. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.4 $str \leftarrow str + y$ \\
|
|
7. If $str_0 = $``$-$'' then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 Reverse the digits $str_1, str_2, \ldots str_n$. \\
|
|
8. Otherwise \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 Reverse the digits $str_0, str_1, \ldots str_n$. \\
|
|
9. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}).\\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_toradix}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_toradix.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the radix-$r$ representation of an mp\_int $a$. The ``digits'' of the representation are extracted by reducing
|
|
successive powers of $\lfloor a / r^k \rfloor$ the input modulo $r$ until $r^k > a$. Note that instead of actually dividing by $r^k$ in
|
|
each iteration the quotient $\lfloor a / r \rfloor$ is saved for the next iteration. As a result a series of trivial $n \times 1$ divisions
|
|
are required instead of a series of $n \times k$ divisions. One design flaw of this approach is that the digits are produced in the reverse order
|
|
(see~\ref{fig:mpradix}). To remedy this flaw the digits must be swapped or simply ``reversed''.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
|
|
\hline \textbf{Value of $a$} & \textbf{Value of $d$} & \textbf{Value of $str$} \\
|
|
\hline $1234$ & -- & -- \\
|
|
\hline $123$ & $4$ & ``4'' \\
|
|
\hline $12$ & $3$ & ``43'' \\
|
|
\hline $1$ & $2$ & ``432'' \\
|
|
\hline $0$ & $1$ & ``4321'' \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\caption{Example of Algorithm mp\_toradix.}
|
|
\label{fig:mpradix}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_toradix.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* stores a bignum as a ASCII string in a given radix (2..64) */
|
|
018 int mp_toradix (mp_int * a, char *str, int radix)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int res, digs;
|
|
021 mp_int t;
|
|
022 mp_digit d;
|
|
023 char *_s = str;
|
|
024
|
|
025 /* check range of the radix */
|
|
026 if (radix < 2 || radix > 64) \{
|
|
027 return MP_VAL;
|
|
028 \}
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* quick out if its zero */
|
|
031 if (mp_iszero(a) == 1) \{
|
|
032 *str++ = '0';
|
|
033 *str = '\symbol{92}0';
|
|
034 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&t, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
038 return res;
|
|
039 \}
|
|
040
|
|
041 /* if it is negative output a - */
|
|
042 if (t.sign == MP_NEG) \{
|
|
043 ++_s;
|
|
044 *str++ = '-';
|
|
045 t.sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 digs = 0;
|
|
049 while (mp_iszero (&t) == 0) \{
|
|
050 if ((res = mp_div_d (&t, (mp_digit) radix, &t, &d)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
051 mp_clear (&t);
|
|
052 return res;
|
|
053 \}
|
|
054 *str++ = mp_s_rmap[d];
|
|
055 ++digs;
|
|
056 \}
|
|
057
|
|
058 /* reverse the digits of the string. In this case _s points
|
|
059 * to the first digit [exluding the sign] of the number]
|
|
060 */
|
|
061 bn_reverse ((unsigned char *)_s, digs);
|
|
062
|
|
063 /* append a NULL so the string is properly terminated */
|
|
064 *str = '\symbol{92}0';
|
|
065
|
|
066 mp_clear (&t);
|
|
067 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
068 \}
|
|
069
|
|
070 #endif
|
|
071
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\chapter{Number Theoretic Algorithms}
|
|
This chapter discusses several fundamental number theoretic algorithms such as the greatest common divisor, least common multiple and Jacobi
|
|
symbol computation. These algorithms arise as essential components in several key cryptographic algorithms such as the RSA public key algorithm and
|
|
various Sieve based factoring algorithms.
|
|
|
|
\section{Greatest Common Divisor}
|
|
The greatest common divisor of two integers $a$ and $b$, often denoted as $(a, b)$ is the largest integer $k$ that is a proper divisor of
|
|
both $a$ and $b$. That is, $k$ is the largest integer such that $0 \equiv a \mbox{ (mod }k\mbox{)}$ and $0 \equiv b \mbox{ (mod }k\mbox{)}$ occur
|
|
simultaneously.
|
|
|
|
The most common approach (cite) is to reduce one input modulo another. That is if $a$ and $b$ are divisible by some integer $k$ and if $qa + r = b$ then
|
|
$r$ is also divisible by $k$. The reduction pattern follows $\left < a , b \right > \rightarrow \left < b, a \mbox{ mod } b \right >$.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Greatest Common Divisor (I)}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two positive integers $a$ and $b$ greater than zero. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The greatest common divisor $(a, b)$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. While ($b > 0$) do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $r \leftarrow a \mbox{ (mod }b\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 $a \leftarrow b$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.3 $b \leftarrow r$ \\
|
|
2. Return($a$). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Greatest Common Divisor (I)}
|
|
\label{fig:gcd1}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
This algorithm will quickly converge on the greatest common divisor since the residue $r$ tends diminish rapidly. However, divisions are
|
|
relatively expensive operations to perform and should ideally be avoided. There is another approach based on a similar relationship of
|
|
greatest common divisors. The faster approach is based on the observation that if $k$ divides both $a$ and $b$ it will also divide $a - b$.
|
|
In particular, we would like $a - b$ to decrease in magnitude which implies that $b \ge a$.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Greatest Common Divisor (II)}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two positive integers $a$ and $b$ greater than zero. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The greatest common divisor $(a, b)$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. While ($b > 0$) do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 Swap $a$ and $b$ such that $a$ is the smallest of the two. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 $b \leftarrow b - a$ \\
|
|
2. Return($a$). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Greatest Common Divisor (II)}
|
|
\label{fig:gcd2}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Proof} \textit{Algorithm~\ref{fig:gcd2} will return the greatest common divisor of $a$ and $b$.}
|
|
The algorithm in figure~\ref{fig:gcd2} will eventually terminate since $b \ge a$ the subtraction in step 1.2 will be a value less than $b$. In other
|
|
words in every iteration that tuple $\left < a, b \right >$ decrease in magnitude until eventually $a = b$. Since both $a$ and $b$ are always
|
|
divisible by the greatest common divisor (\textit{until the last iteration}) and in the last iteration of the algorithm $b = 0$, therefore, in the
|
|
second to last iteration of the algorithm $b = a$ and clearly $(a, a) = a$ which concludes the proof. \textbf{QED}.
|
|
|
|
As a matter of practicality algorithm \ref{fig:gcd1} decreases far too slowly to be useful. Specially if $b$ is much larger than $a$ such that
|
|
$b - a$ is still very much larger than $a$. A simple addition to the algorithm is to divide $b - a$ by a power of some integer $p$ which does
|
|
not divide the greatest common divisor but will divide $b - a$. In this case ${b - a} \over p$ is also an integer and still divisible by
|
|
the greatest common divisor.
|
|
|
|
However, instead of factoring $b - a$ to find a suitable value of $p$ the powers of $p$ can be removed from $a$ and $b$ that are in common first.
|
|
Then inside the loop whenever $b - a$ is divisible by some power of $p$ it can be safely removed.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{Greatest Common Divisor (III)}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. Two positive integers $a$ and $b$ greater than zero. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The greatest common divisor $(a, b)$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $k \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
2. While $a$ and $b$ are both divisible by $p$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $a \leftarrow \lfloor a / p \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 $b \leftarrow \lfloor b / p \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.3 $k \leftarrow k + 1$ \\
|
|
3. While $a$ is divisible by $p$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $a \leftarrow \lfloor a / p \rfloor$ \\
|
|
4. While $b$ is divisible by $p$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $b \leftarrow \lfloor b / p \rfloor$ \\
|
|
5. While ($b > 0$) do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 Swap $a$ and $b$ such that $a$ is the smallest of the two. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $b \leftarrow b - a$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.3 While $b$ is divisible by $p$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}5.3.1 $b \leftarrow \lfloor b / p \rfloor$ \\
|
|
6. Return($a \cdot p^k$). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm Greatest Common Divisor (III)}
|
|
\label{fig:gcd3}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
|
|
This algorithm is based on the first except it removes powers of $p$ first and inside the main loop to ensure the tuple $\left < a, b \right >$
|
|
decreases more rapidly. The first loop on step two removes powers of $p$ that are in common. A count, $k$, is kept which will present a common
|
|
divisor of $p^k$. After step two the remaining common divisor of $a$ and $b$ cannot be divisible by $p$. This means that $p$ can be safely
|
|
divided out of the difference $b - a$ so long as the division leaves no remainder.
|
|
|
|
In particular the value of $p$ should be chosen such that the division on step 5.3.1 occur often. It also helps that division by $p$ be easy
|
|
to compute. The ideal choice of $p$ is two since division by two amounts to a right logical shift. Another important observation is that by
|
|
step five both $a$ and $b$ are odd. Therefore, the diffrence $b - a$ must be even which means that each iteration removes one bit from the
|
|
largest of the pair.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Complete Greatest Common Divisor}
|
|
The algorithms presented so far cannot handle inputs which are zero or negative. The following algorithm can handle all input cases properly
|
|
and will produce the greatest common divisor.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_gcd}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The greatest common divisor $c = (a, b)$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $a = 0$ and $b \ne 0$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $c \leftarrow b$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
2. If $a \ne 0$ and $b = 0$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $c \leftarrow a$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
3. If $a = b = 0$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $c \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.2 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
4. $u \leftarrow \vert a \vert, v \leftarrow \vert b \vert$ \\
|
|
5. $k \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
6. While $u.used > 0$ and $v.used > 0$ and $u_0 \equiv v_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $k \leftarrow k + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 $u \leftarrow \lfloor u / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 $v \leftarrow \lfloor v / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
7. While $u.used > 0$ and $u_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $u \leftarrow \lfloor u / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
8. While $v.used > 0$ and $v_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $v \leftarrow \lfloor v / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
9. While $v.used > 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 If $\vert u \vert > \vert v \vert$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}9.1.1 Swap $u$ and $v$. \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.2 $v \leftarrow \vert v \vert - \vert u \vert$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.3 While $v.used > 0$ and $v_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}9.3.1 $v \leftarrow \lfloor v / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
10. $c \leftarrow u \cdot 2^k$ \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_gcd}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_gcd.}
|
|
This algorithm will produce the greatest common divisor of two mp\_ints $a$ and $b$. The algorithm was originally based on Algorithm B of
|
|
Knuth \cite[pp. 338]{TAOCPV2} but has been modified to be simpler to explain. In theory it achieves the same asymptotic working time as
|
|
Algorithm B and in practice this appears to be true.
|
|
|
|
The first three steps handle the cases where either one of or both inputs are zero. If either input is zero the greatest common divisor is the
|
|
largest input or zero if they are both zero. If the inputs are not trivial than $u$ and $v$ are assigned the absolute values of
|
|
$a$ and $b$ respectively and the algorithm will proceed to reduce the pair.
|
|
|
|
Step six will divide out any common factors of two and keep track of the count in the variable $k$. After this step two is no longer a
|
|
factor of the remaining greatest common divisor between $u$ and $v$ and can be safely evenly divided out of either whenever they are even. Step
|
|
seven and eight ensure that the $u$ and $v$ respectively have no more factors of two. At most only one of the while loops will iterate since
|
|
they cannot both be even.
|
|
|
|
By step nine both of $u$ and $v$ are odd which is required for the inner logic. First the pair are swapped such that $v$ is equal to
|
|
or greater than $u$. This ensures that the subtraction on step 9.2 will always produce a positive and even result. Step 9.3 removes any
|
|
factors of two from the difference $u$ to ensure that in the next iteration of the loop both are once again odd.
|
|
|
|
After $v = 0$ occurs the variable $u$ has the greatest common divisor of the pair $\left < u, v \right >$ just after step six. The result
|
|
must be adjusted by multiplying by the common factors of two ($2^k$) removed earlier.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_gcd.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* Greatest Common Divisor using the binary method */
|
|
018 int mp_gcd (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 mp_int u, v;
|
|
021 int k, u_lsb, v_lsb, res;
|
|
022
|
|
023 /* either zero than gcd is the largest */
|
|
024 if (mp_iszero (a) == 1 && mp_iszero (b) == 0) \{
|
|
025 return mp_abs (b, c);
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027 if (mp_iszero (a) == 0 && mp_iszero (b) == 1) \{
|
|
028 return mp_abs (a, c);
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* optimized. At this point if a == 0 then
|
|
032 * b must equal zero too
|
|
033 */
|
|
034 if (mp_iszero (a) == 1) \{
|
|
035 mp_zero(c);
|
|
036 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
037 \}
|
|
038
|
|
039 /* get copies of a and b we can modify */
|
|
040 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&u, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
041 return res;
|
|
042 \}
|
|
043
|
|
044 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&v, b)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
045 goto LBL_U;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 /* must be positive for the remainder of the algorithm */
|
|
049 u.sign = v.sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
050
|
|
051 /* B1. Find the common power of two for u and v */
|
|
052 u_lsb = mp_cnt_lsb(&u);
|
|
053 v_lsb = mp_cnt_lsb(&v);
|
|
054 k = MIN(u_lsb, v_lsb);
|
|
055
|
|
056 if (k > 0) \{
|
|
057 /* divide the power of two out */
|
|
058 if ((res = mp_div_2d(&u, k, &u, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
059 goto LBL_V;
|
|
060 \}
|
|
061
|
|
062 if ((res = mp_div_2d(&v, k, &v, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
063 goto LBL_V;
|
|
064 \}
|
|
065 \}
|
|
066
|
|
067 /* divide any remaining factors of two out */
|
|
068 if (u_lsb != k) \{
|
|
069 if ((res = mp_div_2d(&u, u_lsb - k, &u, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
070 goto LBL_V;
|
|
071 \}
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073
|
|
074 if (v_lsb != k) \{
|
|
075 if ((res = mp_div_2d(&v, v_lsb - k, &v, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
076 goto LBL_V;
|
|
077 \}
|
|
078 \}
|
|
079
|
|
080 while (mp_iszero(&v) == 0) \{
|
|
081 /* make sure v is the largest */
|
|
082 if (mp_cmp_mag(&u, &v) == MP_GT) \{
|
|
083 /* swap u and v to make sure v is >= u */
|
|
084 mp_exch(&u, &v);
|
|
085 \}
|
|
086
|
|
087 /* subtract smallest from largest */
|
|
088 if ((res = s_mp_sub(&v, &u, &v)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
089 goto LBL_V;
|
|
090 \}
|
|
091
|
|
092 /* Divide out all factors of two */
|
|
093 if ((res = mp_div_2d(&v, mp_cnt_lsb(&v), &v, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
094 goto LBL_V;
|
|
095 \}
|
|
096 \}
|
|
097
|
|
098 /* multiply by 2**k which we divided out at the beginning */
|
|
099 if ((res = mp_mul_2d (&u, k, c)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
100 goto LBL_V;
|
|
101 \}
|
|
102 c->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
103 res = MP_OKAY;
|
|
104 LBL_V:mp_clear (&u);
|
|
105 LBL_U:mp_clear (&v);
|
|
106 return res;
|
|
107 \}
|
|
108 #endif
|
|
109
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
This function makes use of the macros mp\_iszero and mp\_iseven. The former evaluates to $1$ if the input mp\_int is equivalent to the
|
|
integer zero otherwise it evaluates to $0$. The latter evaluates to $1$ if the input mp\_int represents a non-zero even integer otherwise
|
|
it evaluates to $0$. Note that just because mp\_iseven may evaluate to $0$ does not mean the input is odd, it could also be zero. The three
|
|
trivial cases of inputs are handled on lines 24 through 37. After those lines the inputs are assumed to be non-zero.
|
|
|
|
Lines 34 and 40 make local copies $u$ and $v$ of the inputs $a$ and $b$ respectively. At this point the common factors of two
|
|
must be divided out of the two inputs. The while loop on line 80 iterates so long as both are even. The local integer $k$ is used to
|
|
keep track of how many factors of $2$ are pulled out of both values. It is assumed that the number of factors will not exceed the maximum
|
|
value of a C ``int'' data type\footnote{Strictly speaking no array in C may have more than entries than are accessible by an ``int'' so this is not
|
|
a limitation.}.
|
|
|
|
At this point there are no more common factors of two in the two values. The while loops on lines 80 and 80 remove any independent
|
|
factors of two such that both $u$ and $v$ are guaranteed to be an odd integer before hitting the main body of the algorithm. The while loop
|
|
on line 80 performs the reduction of the pair until $v$ is equal to zero. The unsigned comparison and subtraction algorithms are used in
|
|
place of the full signed routines since both values are guaranteed to be positive and the result of the subtraction is guaranteed to be non-negative.
|
|
|
|
\section{Least Common Multiple}
|
|
The least common multiple of a pair of integers is their product divided by their greatest common divisor. For two integers $a$ and $b$ the
|
|
least common multiple is normally denoted as $[ a, b ]$ and numerically equivalent to ${ab} \over {(a, b)}$. For example, if $a = 2 \cdot 2 \cdot 3 = 12$
|
|
and $b = 2 \cdot 3 \cdot 3 \cdot 7 = 126$ the least common multiple is ${126 \over {(12, 126)}} = {126 \over 6} = 21$.
|
|
|
|
The least common multiple arises often in coding theory as well as number theory. If two functions have periods of $a$ and $b$ respectively they will
|
|
collide, that is be in synchronous states, after only $[ a, b ]$ iterations. This is why, for example, random number generators based on
|
|
Linear Feedback Shift Registers (LFSR) tend to use registers with periods which are co-prime (\textit{e.g. the greatest common divisor is one.}).
|
|
Similarly in number theory if a composite $n$ has two prime factors $p$ and $q$ then maximal order of any unit of $\Z/n\Z$ will be $[ p - 1, q - 1] $.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_lcm}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and $b$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The least common multiple $c = [a, b]$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $c \leftarrow (a, b)$ \\
|
|
2. $t \leftarrow a \cdot b$ \\
|
|
3. $c \leftarrow \lfloor t / c \rfloor$ \\
|
|
4. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_lcm}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_lcm.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the least common multiple of two mp\_int inputs $a$ and $b$. It computes the least common multiple directly by
|
|
dividing the product of the two inputs by their greatest common divisor.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_lcm.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* computes least common multiple as |a*b|/(a, b) */
|
|
018 int mp_lcm (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 int res;
|
|
021 mp_int t1, t2;
|
|
022
|
|
023
|
|
024 if ((res = mp_init_multi (&t1, &t2, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
025 return res;
|
|
026 \}
|
|
027
|
|
028 /* t1 = get the GCD of the two inputs */
|
|
029 if ((res = mp_gcd (a, b, &t1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
030 goto LBL_T;
|
|
031 \}
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* divide the smallest by the GCD */
|
|
034 if (mp_cmp_mag(a, b) == MP_LT) \{
|
|
035 /* store quotient in t2 such that t2 * b is the LCM */
|
|
036 if ((res = mp_div(a, &t1, &t2, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
037 goto LBL_T;
|
|
038 \}
|
|
039 res = mp_mul(b, &t2, c);
|
|
040 \} else \{
|
|
041 /* store quotient in t2 such that t2 * a is the LCM */
|
|
042 if ((res = mp_div(b, &t1, &t2, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
043 goto LBL_T;
|
|
044 \}
|
|
045 res = mp_mul(a, &t2, c);
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 /* fix the sign to positive */
|
|
049 c->sign = MP_ZPOS;
|
|
050
|
|
051 LBL_T:
|
|
052 mp_clear_multi (&t1, &t2, NULL);
|
|
053 return res;
|
|
054 \}
|
|
055 #endif
|
|
056
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\section{Jacobi Symbol Computation}
|
|
To explain the Jacobi Symbol we shall first discuss the Legendre function\footnote{Arrg. What is the name of this?} off which the Jacobi symbol is
|
|
defined. The Legendre function computes whether or not an integer $a$ is a quadratic residue modulo an odd prime $p$. Numerically it is
|
|
equivalent to equation \ref{eqn:legendre}.
|
|
|
|
\textit{-- Tom, don't be an ass, cite your source here...!}
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
a^{(p-1)/2} \equiv \begin{array}{rl}
|
|
-1 & \mbox{if }a\mbox{ is a quadratic non-residue.} \\
|
|
0 & \mbox{if }a\mbox{ divides }p\mbox{.} \\
|
|
1 & \mbox{if }a\mbox{ is a quadratic residue}.
|
|
\end{array} \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}
|
|
\label{eqn:legendre}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
\textbf{Proof.} \textit{Equation \ref{eqn:legendre} correctly identifies the residue status of an integer $a$ modulo a prime $p$.}
|
|
An integer $a$ is a quadratic residue if the following equation has a solution.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
x^2 \equiv a \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}
|
|
\label{eqn:root}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Consider the following equation.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
0 \equiv x^{p-1} - 1 \equiv \left \lbrace \left (x^2 \right )^{(p-1)/2} - a^{(p-1)/2} \right \rbrace + \left ( a^{(p-1)/2} - 1 \right ) \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}
|
|
\label{eqn:rooti}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Whether equation \ref{eqn:root} has a solution or not equation \ref{eqn:rooti} is always true. If $a^{(p-1)/2} - 1 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$
|
|
then the quantity in the braces must be zero. By reduction,
|
|
|
|
\begin{eqnarray}
|
|
\left (x^2 \right )^{(p-1)/2} - a^{(p-1)/2} \equiv 0 \nonumber \\
|
|
\left (x^2 \right )^{(p-1)/2} \equiv a^{(p-1)/2} \nonumber \\
|
|
x^2 \equiv a \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}
|
|
\end{eqnarray}
|
|
|
|
As a result there must be a solution to the quadratic equation and in turn $a$ must be a quadratic residue. If $a$ does not divide $p$ and $a$
|
|
is not a quadratic residue then the only other value $a^{(p-1)/2}$ may be congruent to is $-1$ since
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
0 \equiv a^{p - 1} - 1 \equiv (a^{(p-1)/2} + 1)(a^{(p-1)/2} - 1) \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
One of the terms on the right hand side must be zero. \textbf{QED}
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Jacobi Symbol}
|
|
The Jacobi symbol is a generalization of the Legendre function for any odd non prime moduli $p$ greater than 2. If $p = \prod_{i=0}^n p_i$ then
|
|
the Jacobi symbol $\left ( { a \over p } \right )$ is equal to the following equation.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
\left ( { a \over p } \right ) = \left ( { a \over p_0} \right ) \left ( { a \over p_1} \right ) \ldots \left ( { a \over p_n} \right )
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
By inspection if $p$ is prime the Jacobi symbol is equivalent to the Legendre function. The following facts\footnote{See HAC \cite[pp. 72-74]{HAC} for
|
|
further details.} will be used to derive an efficient Jacobi symbol algorithm. Where $p$ is an odd integer greater than two and $a, b \in \Z$ the
|
|
following are true.
|
|
|
|
\begin{enumerate}
|
|
\item $\left ( { a \over p} \right )$ equals $-1$, $0$ or $1$.
|
|
\item $\left ( { ab \over p} \right ) = \left ( { a \over p} \right )\left ( { b \over p} \right )$.
|
|
\item If $a \equiv b$ then $\left ( { a \over p} \right ) = \left ( { b \over p} \right )$.
|
|
\item $\left ( { 2 \over p} \right )$ equals $1$ if $p \equiv 1$ or $7 \mbox{ (mod }8\mbox{)}$. Otherwise, it equals $-1$.
|
|
\item $\left ( { a \over p} \right ) \equiv \left ( { p \over a} \right ) \cdot (-1)^{(p-1)(a-1)/4}$. More specifically
|
|
$\left ( { a \over p} \right ) = \left ( { p \over a} \right )$ if $p \equiv a \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }4\mbox{)}$.
|
|
\end{enumerate}
|
|
|
|
Using these facts if $a = 2^k \cdot a'$ then
|
|
|
|
\begin{eqnarray}
|
|
\left ( { a \over p } \right ) = \left ( {{2^k} \over p } \right ) \left ( {a' \over p} \right ) \nonumber \\
|
|
= \left ( {2 \over p } \right )^k \left ( {a' \over p} \right )
|
|
\label{eqn:jacobi}
|
|
\end{eqnarray}
|
|
|
|
By fact five,
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
\left ( { a \over p } \right ) = \left ( { p \over a } \right ) \cdot (-1)^{(p-1)(a-1)/4}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Subsequently by fact three since $p \equiv (p \mbox{ mod }a) \mbox{ (mod }a\mbox{)}$ then
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
\left ( { a \over p } \right ) = \left ( { {p \mbox{ mod } a} \over a } \right ) \cdot (-1)^{(p-1)(a-1)/4}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
By putting both observations into equation \ref{eqn:jacobi} the following simplified equation is formed.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
\left ( { a \over p } \right ) = \left ( {2 \over p } \right )^k \left ( {{p\mbox{ mod }a'} \over a'} \right ) \cdot (-1)^{(p-1)(a'-1)/4}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
The value of $\left ( {{p \mbox{ mod }a'} \over a'} \right )$ can be found by using the same equation recursively. The value of
|
|
$\left ( {2 \over p } \right )^k$ equals $1$ if $k$ is even otherwise it equals $\left ( {2 \over p } \right )$. Using this approach the
|
|
factors of $p$ do not have to be known. Furthermore, if $(a, p) = 1$ then the algorithm will terminate when the recursion requests the
|
|
Jacobi symbol computation of $\left ( {1 \over a'} \right )$ which is simply $1$.
|
|
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_jacobi}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and $p$, $a \ge 0$, $p \ge 3$, $p \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The Jacobi symbol $c = \left ( {a \over p } \right )$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $a = 0$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $c \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
2. If $a = 1$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $c \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.2 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
3. $a' \leftarrow a$ \\
|
|
4. $k \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
5. While $a'.used > 0$ and $a'_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.1 $k \leftarrow k + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}5.2 $a' \leftarrow \lfloor a' / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
6. If $k \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $s \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
7. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $r \leftarrow p_0 \mbox{ (mod }8\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.2 If $r = 1$ or $r = 7$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.2.1 $s \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.3 else \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.3.1 $s \leftarrow -1$ \\
|
|
8. If $p_0 \equiv a'_0 \equiv 3 \mbox{ (mod }4\mbox{)}$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $s \leftarrow -s$ \\
|
|
9. If $a' \ne 1$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 $p' \leftarrow p \mbox{ (mod }a'\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.2 $s \leftarrow s \cdot \mbox{mp\_jacobi}(p', a')$ \\
|
|
10. $c \leftarrow s$ \\
|
|
11. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_jacobi}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_jacobi.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the Jacobi symbol for an arbitrary positive integer $a$ with respect to an odd integer $p$ greater than three. The algorithm
|
|
is based on algorithm 2.149 of HAC \cite[pp. 73]{HAC}.
|
|
|
|
Step numbers one and two handle the trivial cases of $a = 0$ and $a = 1$ respectively. Step five determines the number of two factors in the
|
|
input $a$. If $k$ is even than the term $\left ( { 2 \over p } \right )^k$ must always evaluate to one. If $k$ is odd than the term evaluates to one
|
|
if $p_0$ is congruent to one or seven modulo eight, otherwise it evaluates to $-1$. After the the $\left ( { 2 \over p } \right )^k$ term is handled
|
|
the $(-1)^{(p-1)(a'-1)/4}$ is computed and multiplied against the current product $s$. The latter term evaluates to one if both $p$ and $a'$
|
|
are congruent to one modulo four, otherwise it evaluates to negative one.
|
|
|
|
By step nine if $a'$ does not equal one a recursion is required. Step 9.1 computes $p' \equiv p \mbox{ (mod }a'\mbox{)}$ and will recurse to compute
|
|
$\left ( {p' \over a'} \right )$ which is multiplied against the current Jacobi product.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_jacobi.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* computes the jacobi c = (a | n) (or Legendre if n is prime)
|
|
018 * HAC pp. 73 Algorithm 2.149
|
|
019 */
|
|
020 int mp_jacobi (mp_int * a, mp_int * p, int *c)
|
|
021 \{
|
|
022 mp_int a1, p1;
|
|
023 int k, s, r, res;
|
|
024 mp_digit residue;
|
|
025
|
|
026 /* if p <= 0 return MP_VAL */
|
|
027 if (mp_cmp_d(p, 0) != MP_GT) \{
|
|
028 return MP_VAL;
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030
|
|
031 /* step 1. if a == 0, return 0 */
|
|
032 if (mp_iszero (a) == 1) \{
|
|
033 *c = 0;
|
|
034 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* step 2. if a == 1, return 1 */
|
|
038 if (mp_cmp_d (a, 1) == MP_EQ) \{
|
|
039 *c = 1;
|
|
040 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* default */
|
|
044 s = 0;
|
|
045
|
|
046 /* step 3. write a = a1 * 2**k */
|
|
047 if ((res = mp_init_copy (&a1, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
048 return res;
|
|
049 \}
|
|
050
|
|
051 if ((res = mp_init (&p1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
052 goto LBL_A1;
|
|
053 \}
|
|
054
|
|
055 /* divide out larger power of two */
|
|
056 k = mp_cnt_lsb(&a1);
|
|
057 if ((res = mp_div_2d(&a1, k, &a1, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
058 goto LBL_P1;
|
|
059 \}
|
|
060
|
|
061 /* step 4. if e is even set s=1 */
|
|
062 if ((k & 1) == 0) \{
|
|
063 s = 1;
|
|
064 \} else \{
|
|
065 /* else set s=1 if p = 1/7 (mod 8) or s=-1 if p = 3/5 (mod 8) */
|
|
066 residue = p->dp[0] & 7;
|
|
067
|
|
068 if (residue == 1 || residue == 7) \{
|
|
069 s = 1;
|
|
070 \} else if (residue == 3 || residue == 5) \{
|
|
071 s = -1;
|
|
072 \}
|
|
073 \}
|
|
074
|
|
075 /* step 5. if p == 3 (mod 4) *and* a1 == 3 (mod 4) then s = -s */
|
|
076 if ( ((p->dp[0] & 3) == 3) && ((a1.dp[0] & 3) == 3)) \{
|
|
077 s = -s;
|
|
078 \}
|
|
079
|
|
080 /* if a1 == 1 we're done */
|
|
081 if (mp_cmp_d (&a1, 1) == MP_EQ) \{
|
|
082 *c = s;
|
|
083 \} else \{
|
|
084 /* n1 = n mod a1 */
|
|
085 if ((res = mp_mod (p, &a1, &p1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
086 goto LBL_P1;
|
|
087 \}
|
|
088 if ((res = mp_jacobi (&p1, &a1, &r)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
089 goto LBL_P1;
|
|
090 \}
|
|
091 *c = s * r;
|
|
092 \}
|
|
093
|
|
094 /* done */
|
|
095 res = MP_OKAY;
|
|
096 LBL_P1:mp_clear (&p1);
|
|
097 LBL_A1:mp_clear (&a1);
|
|
098 return res;
|
|
099 \}
|
|
100 #endif
|
|
101
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
As a matter of practicality the variable $a'$ as per the pseudo-code is reprensented by the variable $a1$ since the $'$ symbol is not valid for a C
|
|
variable name character.
|
|
|
|
The two simple cases of $a = 0$ and $a = 1$ are handled at the very beginning to simplify the algorithm. If the input is non-trivial the algorithm
|
|
has to proceed compute the Jacobi. The variable $s$ is used to hold the current Jacobi product. Note that $s$ is merely a C ``int'' data type since
|
|
the values it may obtain are merely $-1$, $0$ and $1$.
|
|
|
|
After a local copy of $a$ is made all of the factors of two are divided out and the total stored in $k$. Technically only the least significant
|
|
bit of $k$ is required, however, it makes the algorithm simpler to follow to perform an addition. In practice an exclusive-or and addition have the same
|
|
processor requirements and neither is faster than the other.
|
|
|
|
Line 61 through 70 determines the value of $\left ( { 2 \over p } \right )^k$. If the least significant bit of $k$ is zero than
|
|
$k$ is even and the value is one. Otherwise, the value of $s$ depends on which residue class $p$ belongs to modulo eight. The value of
|
|
$(-1)^{(p-1)(a'-1)/4}$ is compute and multiplied against $s$ on lines 75 through 73.
|
|
|
|
Finally, if $a1$ does not equal one the algorithm must recurse and compute $\left ( {p' \over a'} \right )$.
|
|
|
|
\textit{-- Comment about default $s$ and such...}
|
|
|
|
\section{Modular Inverse}
|
|
\label{sec:modinv}
|
|
The modular inverse of a number actually refers to the modular multiplicative inverse. Essentially for any integer $a$ such that $(a, p) = 1$ there
|
|
exist another integer $b$ such that $ab \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$. The integer $b$ is called the multiplicative inverse of $a$ which is
|
|
denoted as $b = a^{-1}$. Technically speaking modular inversion is a well defined operation for any finite ring or field not just for rings and
|
|
fields of integers. However, the former will be the matter of discussion.
|
|
|
|
The simplest approach is to compute the algebraic inverse of the input. That is to compute $b \equiv a^{\Phi(p) - 1}$. If $\Phi(p)$ is the
|
|
order of the multiplicative subgroup modulo $p$ then $b$ must be the multiplicative inverse of $a$. The proof of which is trivial.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
ab \equiv a \left (a^{\Phi(p) - 1} \right ) \equiv a^{\Phi(p)} \equiv a^0 \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
However, as simple as this approach may be it has two serious flaws. It requires that the value of $\Phi(p)$ be known which if $p$ is composite
|
|
requires all of the prime factors. This approach also is very slow as the size of $p$ grows.
|
|
|
|
A simpler approach is based on the observation that solving for the multiplicative inverse is equivalent to solving the linear
|
|
Diophantine\footnote{See LeVeque \cite[pp. 40-43]{LeVeque} for more information.} equation.
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
ab + pq = 1
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
Where $a$, $b$, $p$ and $q$ are all integers. If such a pair of integers $ \left < b, q \right >$ exist than $b$ is the multiplicative inverse of
|
|
$a$ modulo $p$. The extended Euclidean algorithm (Knuth \cite[pp. 342]{TAOCPV2}) can be used to solve such equations provided $(a, p) = 1$.
|
|
However, instead of using that algorithm directly a variant known as the binary Extended Euclidean algorithm will be used in its place. The
|
|
binary approach is very similar to the binary greatest common divisor algorithm except it will produce a full solution to the Diophantine
|
|
equation.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{General Case}
|
|
\newpage\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_invmod}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and $b$, $(a, b) = 1$, $p \ge 2$, $0 < a < p$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. The modular inverse $c \equiv a^{-1} \mbox{ (mod }b\mbox{)}$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. If $b \le 0$ then return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
2. If $b_0 \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ then use algorithm fast\_mp\_invmod. \\
|
|
3. $x \leftarrow \vert a \vert, y \leftarrow b$ \\
|
|
4. If $x_0 \equiv y_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ then return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
5. $B \leftarrow 0, C \leftarrow 0, A \leftarrow 1, D \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
6. While $u.used > 0$ and $u_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $u \leftarrow \lfloor u / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 If ($A.used > 0$ and $A_0 \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$) or ($B.used > 0$ and $B_0 \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$) then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.2.1 $A \leftarrow A + y$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.2.2 $B \leftarrow B - x$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 $A \leftarrow \lfloor A / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.4 $B \leftarrow \lfloor B / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
7. While $v.used > 0$ and $v_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.1 $v \leftarrow \lfloor v / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.2 If ($C.used > 0$ and $C_0 \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$) or ($D.used > 0$ and $D_0 \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$) then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.2.1 $C \leftarrow C + y$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}7.2.2 $D \leftarrow D - x$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.3 $C \leftarrow \lfloor C / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}7.4 $D \leftarrow \lfloor D / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
8. If $u \ge v$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.1 $u \leftarrow u - v$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.2 $A \leftarrow A - C$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}8.3 $B \leftarrow B - D$ \\
|
|
9. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.1 $v \leftarrow v - u$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.2 $C \leftarrow C - A$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}9.3 $D \leftarrow D - B$ \\
|
|
10. If $u \ne 0$ goto step 6. \\
|
|
11. If $v \ne 1$ return(\textit{MP\_VAL}). \\
|
|
12. While $C \le 0$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}12.1 $C \leftarrow C + b$ \\
|
|
13. While $C \ge b$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}13.1 $C \leftarrow C - b$ \\
|
|
14. $c \leftarrow C$ \\
|
|
15. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_invmod.}
|
|
This algorithm computes the modular multiplicative inverse of an integer $a$ modulo an integer $b$. This algorithm is a variation of the
|
|
extended binary Euclidean algorithm from HAC \cite[pp. 608]{HAC}. It has been modified to only compute the modular inverse and not a complete
|
|
Diophantine solution.
|
|
|
|
If $b \le 0$ than the modulus is invalid and MP\_VAL is returned. Similarly if both $a$ and $b$ are even then there cannot be a multiplicative
|
|
inverse for $a$ and the error is reported.
|
|
|
|
The astute reader will observe that steps seven through nine are very similar to the binary greatest common divisor algorithm mp\_gcd. In this case
|
|
the other variables to the Diophantine equation are solved. The algorithm terminates when $u = 0$ in which case the solution is
|
|
|
|
\begin{equation}
|
|
Ca + Db = v
|
|
\end{equation}
|
|
|
|
If $v$, the greatest common divisor of $a$ and $b$ is not equal to one then the algorithm will report an error as no inverse exists. Otherwise, $C$
|
|
is the modular inverse of $a$. The actual value of $C$ is congruent to, but not necessarily equal to, the ideal modular inverse which should lie
|
|
within $1 \le a^{-1} < b$. Step numbers twelve and thirteen adjust the inverse until it is in range. If the original input $a$ is within $0 < a < p$
|
|
then only a couple of additions or subtractions will be required to adjust the inverse.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_invmod.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* hac 14.61, pp608 */
|
|
018 int mp_invmod (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, mp_int * c)
|
|
019 \{
|
|
020 /* b cannot be negative */
|
|
021 if (b->sign == MP_NEG || mp_iszero(b) == 1) \{
|
|
022 return MP_VAL;
|
|
023 \}
|
|
024
|
|
025 #ifdef BN_FAST_MP_INVMOD_C
|
|
026 /* if the modulus is odd we can use a faster routine instead */
|
|
027 if (mp_isodd (b) == 1) \{
|
|
028 return fast_mp_invmod (a, b, c);
|
|
029 \}
|
|
030 #endif
|
|
031
|
|
032 #ifdef BN_MP_INVMOD_SLOW_C
|
|
033 return mp_invmod_slow(a, b, c);
|
|
034 #endif
|
|
035
|
|
036 return MP_VAL;
|
|
037 \}
|
|
038 #endif
|
|
039
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\subsubsection{Odd Moduli}
|
|
|
|
When the modulus $b$ is odd the variables $A$ and $C$ are fixed and are not required to compute the inverse. In particular by attempting to solve
|
|
the Diophantine $Cb + Da = 1$ only $B$ and $D$ are required to find the inverse of $a$.
|
|
|
|
The algorithm fast\_mp\_invmod is a direct adaptation of algorithm mp\_invmod with all all steps involving either $A$ or $C$ removed. This
|
|
optimization will halve the time required to compute the modular inverse.
|
|
|
|
\section{Primality Tests}
|
|
|
|
A non-zero integer $a$ is said to be prime if it is not divisible by any other integer excluding one and itself. For example, $a = 7$ is prime
|
|
since the integers $2 \ldots 6$ do not evenly divide $a$. By contrast, $a = 6$ is not prime since $a = 6 = 2 \cdot 3$.
|
|
|
|
Prime numbers arise in cryptography considerably as they allow finite fields to be formed. The ability to determine whether an integer is prime or
|
|
not quickly has been a viable subject in cryptography and number theory for considerable time. The algorithms that will be presented are all
|
|
probablistic algorithms in that when they report an integer is composite it must be composite. However, when the algorithms report an integer is
|
|
prime the algorithm may be incorrect.
|
|
|
|
As will be discussed it is possible to limit the probability of error so well that for practical purposes the probablity of error might as
|
|
well be zero. For the purposes of these discussions let $n$ represent the candidate integer of which the primality is in question.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{Trial Division}
|
|
|
|
Trial division means to attempt to evenly divide a candidate integer by small prime integers. If the candidate can be evenly divided it obviously
|
|
cannot be prime. By dividing by all primes $1 < p \le \sqrt{n}$ this test can actually prove whether an integer is prime. However, such a test
|
|
would require a prohibitive amount of time as $n$ grows.
|
|
|
|
Instead of dividing by every prime, a smaller, more mangeable set of primes may be used instead. By performing trial division with only a subset
|
|
of the primes less than $\sqrt{n} + 1$ the algorithm cannot prove if a candidate is prime. However, often it can prove a candidate is not prime.
|
|
|
|
The benefit of this test is that trial division by small values is fairly efficient. Specially compared to the other algorithms that will be
|
|
discussed shortly. The probability that this approach correctly identifies a composite candidate when tested with all primes upto $q$ is given by
|
|
$1 - {1.12 \over ln(q)}$. The graph (\ref{pic:primality}, will be added later) demonstrates the probability of success for the range
|
|
$3 \le q \le 100$.
|
|
|
|
At approximately $q = 30$ the gain of performing further tests diminishes fairly quickly. At $q = 90$ further testing is generally not going to
|
|
be of any practical use. In the case of LibTomMath the default limit $q = 256$ was chosen since it is not too high and will eliminate
|
|
approximately $80\%$ of all candidate integers. The constant \textbf{PRIME\_SIZE} is equal to the number of primes in the test base. The
|
|
array \_\_prime\_tab is an array of the first \textbf{PRIME\_SIZE} prime numbers.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_prime\_is\_divisible}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = 1$ if $n$ is divisible by a small prime, otherwise $c = 0$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. for $ix$ from $0$ to $PRIME\_SIZE$ do \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.1 $d \leftarrow n \mbox{ (mod }\_\_prime\_tab_{ix}\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}1.2 If $d = 0$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}1.2.1 $c \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}1.2.2 Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
2. $c \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
3. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_prime\_is\_divisible}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_prime\_is\_divisible.}
|
|
This algorithm attempts to determine if a candidate integer $n$ is composite by performing trial divisions.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_prime\_is\_divisible.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* determines if an integers is divisible by one
|
|
018 * of the first PRIME_SIZE primes or not
|
|
019 *
|
|
020 * sets result to 0 if not, 1 if yes
|
|
021 */
|
|
022 int mp_prime_is_divisible (mp_int * a, int *result)
|
|
023 \{
|
|
024 int err, ix;
|
|
025 mp_digit res;
|
|
026
|
|
027 /* default to not */
|
|
028 *result = MP_NO;
|
|
029
|
|
030 for (ix = 0; ix < PRIME_SIZE; ix++) \{
|
|
031 /* what is a mod LBL_prime_tab[ix] */
|
|
032 if ((err = mp_mod_d (a, ltm_prime_tab[ix], &res)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
033 return err;
|
|
034 \}
|
|
035
|
|
036 /* is the residue zero? */
|
|
037 if (res == 0) \{
|
|
038 *result = MP_YES;
|
|
039 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
040 \}
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042
|
|
043 return MP_OKAY;
|
|
044 \}
|
|
045 #endif
|
|
046
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
The algorithm defaults to a return of $0$ in case an error occurs. The values in the prime table are all specified to be in the range of a
|
|
mp\_digit. The table \_\_prime\_tab is defined in the following file.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_prime\_tab.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016 const mp_digit ltm_prime_tab[] = \{
|
|
017 0x0002, 0x0003, 0x0005, 0x0007, 0x000B, 0x000D, 0x0011, 0x0013,
|
|
018 0x0017, 0x001D, 0x001F, 0x0025, 0x0029, 0x002B, 0x002F, 0x0035,
|
|
019 0x003B, 0x003D, 0x0043, 0x0047, 0x0049, 0x004F, 0x0053, 0x0059,
|
|
020 0x0061, 0x0065, 0x0067, 0x006B, 0x006D, 0x0071, 0x007F,
|
|
021 #ifndef MP_8BIT
|
|
022 0x0083,
|
|
023 0x0089, 0x008B, 0x0095, 0x0097, 0x009D, 0x00A3, 0x00A7, 0x00AD,
|
|
024 0x00B3, 0x00B5, 0x00BF, 0x00C1, 0x00C5, 0x00C7, 0x00D3, 0x00DF,
|
|
025 0x00E3, 0x00E5, 0x00E9, 0x00EF, 0x00F1, 0x00FB, 0x0101, 0x0107,
|
|
026 0x010D, 0x010F, 0x0115, 0x0119, 0x011B, 0x0125, 0x0133, 0x0137,
|
|
027
|
|
028 0x0139, 0x013D, 0x014B, 0x0151, 0x015B, 0x015D, 0x0161, 0x0167,
|
|
029 0x016F, 0x0175, 0x017B, 0x017F, 0x0185, 0x018D, 0x0191, 0x0199,
|
|
030 0x01A3, 0x01A5, 0x01AF, 0x01B1, 0x01B7, 0x01BB, 0x01C1, 0x01C9,
|
|
031 0x01CD, 0x01CF, 0x01D3, 0x01DF, 0x01E7, 0x01EB, 0x01F3, 0x01F7,
|
|
032 0x01FD, 0x0209, 0x020B, 0x021D, 0x0223, 0x022D, 0x0233, 0x0239,
|
|
033 0x023B, 0x0241, 0x024B, 0x0251, 0x0257, 0x0259, 0x025F, 0x0265,
|
|
034 0x0269, 0x026B, 0x0277, 0x0281, 0x0283, 0x0287, 0x028D, 0x0293,
|
|
035 0x0295, 0x02A1, 0x02A5, 0x02AB, 0x02B3, 0x02BD, 0x02C5, 0x02CF,
|
|
036
|
|
037 0x02D7, 0x02DD, 0x02E3, 0x02E7, 0x02EF, 0x02F5, 0x02F9, 0x0301,
|
|
038 0x0305, 0x0313, 0x031D, 0x0329, 0x032B, 0x0335, 0x0337, 0x033B,
|
|
039 0x033D, 0x0347, 0x0355, 0x0359, 0x035B, 0x035F, 0x036D, 0x0371,
|
|
040 0x0373, 0x0377, 0x038B, 0x038F, 0x0397, 0x03A1, 0x03A9, 0x03AD,
|
|
041 0x03B3, 0x03B9, 0x03C7, 0x03CB, 0x03D1, 0x03D7, 0x03DF, 0x03E5,
|
|
042 0x03F1, 0x03F5, 0x03FB, 0x03FD, 0x0407, 0x0409, 0x040F, 0x0419,
|
|
043 0x041B, 0x0425, 0x0427, 0x042D, 0x043F, 0x0443, 0x0445, 0x0449,
|
|
044 0x044F, 0x0455, 0x045D, 0x0463, 0x0469, 0x047F, 0x0481, 0x048B,
|
|
045
|
|
046 0x0493, 0x049D, 0x04A3, 0x04A9, 0x04B1, 0x04BD, 0x04C1, 0x04C7,
|
|
047 0x04CD, 0x04CF, 0x04D5, 0x04E1, 0x04EB, 0x04FD, 0x04FF, 0x0503,
|
|
048 0x0509, 0x050B, 0x0511, 0x0515, 0x0517, 0x051B, 0x0527, 0x0529,
|
|
049 0x052F, 0x0551, 0x0557, 0x055D, 0x0565, 0x0577, 0x0581, 0x058F,
|
|
050 0x0593, 0x0595, 0x0599, 0x059F, 0x05A7, 0x05AB, 0x05AD, 0x05B3,
|
|
051 0x05BF, 0x05C9, 0x05CB, 0x05CF, 0x05D1, 0x05D5, 0x05DB, 0x05E7,
|
|
052 0x05F3, 0x05FB, 0x0607, 0x060D, 0x0611, 0x0617, 0x061F, 0x0623,
|
|
053 0x062B, 0x062F, 0x063D, 0x0641, 0x0647, 0x0649, 0x064D, 0x0653
|
|
054 #endif
|
|
055 \};
|
|
056 #endif
|
|
057
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
Note that there are two possible tables. When an mp\_digit is 7-bits long only the primes upto $127$ may be included, otherwise the primes
|
|
upto $1619$ are used. Note that the value of \textbf{PRIME\_SIZE} is a constant dependent on the size of a mp\_digit.
|
|
|
|
\subsection{The Fermat Test}
|
|
The Fermat test is probably one the oldest tests to have a non-trivial probability of success. It is based on the fact that if $n$ is in
|
|
fact prime then $a^{n} \equiv a \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$ for all $0 < a < n$. The reason being that if $n$ is prime than the order of
|
|
the multiplicative sub group is $n - 1$. Any base $a$ must have an order which divides $n - 1$ and as such $a^n$ is equivalent to
|
|
$a^1 = a$.
|
|
|
|
If $n$ is composite then any given base $a$ does not have to have a period which divides $n - 1$. In which case
|
|
it is possible that $a^n \nequiv a \mbox{ (mod }n\mbox{)}$. However, this test is not absolute as it is possible that the order
|
|
of a base will divide $n - 1$ which would then be reported as prime. Such a base yields what is known as a Fermat pseudo-prime. Several
|
|
integers known as Carmichael numbers will be a pseudo-prime to all valid bases. Fortunately such numbers are extremely rare as $n$ grows
|
|
in size.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_prime\_fermat}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and $b$, $a \ge 2$, $0 < b < a$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = 1$ if $b^a \equiv b \mbox{ (mod }a\mbox{)}$, otherwise $c = 0$. \\
|
|
\hline \\
|
|
1. $t \leftarrow b^a \mbox{ (mod }a\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
2. If $t = b$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}2.1 $c = 1$ \\
|
|
3. else \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}3.1 $c = 0$ \\
|
|
4. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_prime\_fermat}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_prime\_fermat.}
|
|
This algorithm determines whether an mp\_int $a$ is a Fermat prime to the base $b$ or not. It uses a single modular exponentiation to
|
|
determine the result.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_prime\_fermat.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* performs one Fermat test.
|
|
018 *
|
|
019 * If "a" were prime then b**a == b (mod a) since the order of
|
|
020 * the multiplicative sub-group would be phi(a) = a-1. That means
|
|
021 * it would be the same as b**(a mod (a-1)) == b**1 == b (mod a).
|
|
022 *
|
|
023 * Sets result to 1 if the congruence holds, or zero otherwise.
|
|
024 */
|
|
025 int mp_prime_fermat (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, int *result)
|
|
026 \{
|
|
027 mp_int t;
|
|
028 int err;
|
|
029
|
|
030 /* default to composite */
|
|
031 *result = MP_NO;
|
|
032
|
|
033 /* ensure b > 1 */
|
|
034 if (mp_cmp_d(b, 1) != MP_GT) \{
|
|
035 return MP_VAL;
|
|
036 \}
|
|
037
|
|
038 /* init t */
|
|
039 if ((err = mp_init (&t)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
040 return err;
|
|
041 \}
|
|
042
|
|
043 /* compute t = b**a mod a */
|
|
044 if ((err = mp_exptmod (b, a, a, &t)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
045 goto LBL_T;
|
|
046 \}
|
|
047
|
|
048 /* is it equal to b? */
|
|
049 if (mp_cmp (&t, b) == MP_EQ) \{
|
|
050 *result = MP_YES;
|
|
051 \}
|
|
052
|
|
053 err = MP_OKAY;
|
|
054 LBL_T:mp_clear (&t);
|
|
055 return err;
|
|
056 \}
|
|
057 #endif
|
|
058
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
\subsection{The Miller-Rabin Test}
|
|
The Miller-Rabin (citation) test is another primality test which has tighter error bounds than the Fermat test specifically with sequentially chosen
|
|
candidate integers. The algorithm is based on the observation that if $n - 1 = 2^kr$ and if $b^r \nequiv \pm 1$ then after upto $k - 1$ squarings the
|
|
value must be equal to $-1$. The squarings are stopped as soon as $-1$ is observed. If the value of $1$ is observed first it means that
|
|
some value not congruent to $\pm 1$ when squared equals one which cannot occur if $n$ is prime.
|
|
|
|
\begin{figure}[!here]
|
|
\begin{small}
|
|
\begin{center}
|
|
\begin{tabular}{l}
|
|
\hline Algorithm \textbf{mp\_prime\_miller\_rabin}. \\
|
|
\textbf{Input}. mp\_int $a$ and $b$, $a \ge 2$, $0 < b < a$. \\
|
|
\textbf{Output}. $c = 1$ if $a$ is a Miller-Rabin prime to the base $a$, otherwise $c = 0$. \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
1. $a' \leftarrow a - 1$ \\
|
|
2. $r \leftarrow n1$ \\
|
|
3. $c \leftarrow 0, s \leftarrow 0$ \\
|
|
4. While $r.used > 0$ and $r_0 \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }2\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.1 $s \leftarrow s + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}4.2 $r \leftarrow \lfloor r / 2 \rfloor$ \\
|
|
5. $y \leftarrow b^r \mbox{ (mod }a\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
6. If $y \nequiv \pm 1$ then \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.1 $j \leftarrow 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.2 While $j \le (s - 1)$ and $y \nequiv a'$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.2.1 $y \leftarrow y^2 \mbox{ (mod }a\mbox{)}$ \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.2.2 If $y = 1$ then goto step 8. \\
|
|
\hspace{6mm}6.2.3 $j \leftarrow j + 1$ \\
|
|
\hspace{3mm}6.3 If $y \nequiv a'$ goto step 8. \\
|
|
7. $c \leftarrow 1$\\
|
|
8. Return(\textit{MP\_OKAY}). \\
|
|
\hline
|
|
\end{tabular}
|
|
\end{center}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
\caption{Algorithm mp\_prime\_miller\_rabin}
|
|
\end{figure}
|
|
\textbf{Algorithm mp\_prime\_miller\_rabin.}
|
|
This algorithm performs one trial round of the Miller-Rabin algorithm to the base $b$. It will set $c = 1$ if the algorithm cannot determine
|
|
if $b$ is composite or $c = 0$ if $b$ is provably composite. The values of $s$ and $r$ are computed such that $a' = a - 1 = 2^sr$.
|
|
|
|
If the value $y \equiv b^r$ is congruent to $\pm 1$ then the algorithm cannot prove if $a$ is composite or not. Otherwise, the algorithm will
|
|
square $y$ upto $s - 1$ times stopping only when $y \equiv -1$. If $y^2 \equiv 1$ and $y \nequiv \pm 1$ then the algorithm can report that $a$
|
|
is provably composite. If the algorithm performs $s - 1$ squarings and $y \nequiv -1$ then $a$ is provably composite. If $a$ is not provably
|
|
composite then it is \textit{probably} prime.
|
|
|
|
\vspace{+3mm}\begin{small}
|
|
\hspace{-5.1mm}{\bf File}: bn\_mp\_prime\_miller\_rabin.c
|
|
\vspace{-3mm}
|
|
\begin{alltt}
|
|
016
|
|
017 /* Miller-Rabin test of "a" to the base of "b" as described in
|
|
018 * HAC pp. 139 Algorithm 4.24
|
|
019 *
|
|
020 * Sets result to 0 if definitely composite or 1 if probably prime.
|
|
021 * Randomly the chance of error is no more than 1/4 and often
|
|
022 * very much lower.
|
|
023 */
|
|
024 int mp_prime_miller_rabin (mp_int * a, mp_int * b, int *result)
|
|
025 \{
|
|
026 mp_int n1, y, r;
|
|
027 int s, j, err;
|
|
028
|
|
029 /* default */
|
|
030 *result = MP_NO;
|
|
031
|
|
032 /* ensure b > 1 */
|
|
033 if (mp_cmp_d(b, 1) != MP_GT) \{
|
|
034 return MP_VAL;
|
|
035 \}
|
|
036
|
|
037 /* get n1 = a - 1 */
|
|
038 if ((err = mp_init_copy (&n1, a)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
039 return err;
|
|
040 \}
|
|
041 if ((err = mp_sub_d (&n1, 1, &n1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
042 goto LBL_N1;
|
|
043 \}
|
|
044
|
|
045 /* set 2**s * r = n1 */
|
|
046 if ((err = mp_init_copy (&r, &n1)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
047 goto LBL_N1;
|
|
048 \}
|
|
049
|
|
050 /* count the number of least significant bits
|
|
051 * which are zero
|
|
052 */
|
|
053 s = mp_cnt_lsb(&r);
|
|
054
|
|
055 /* now divide n - 1 by 2**s */
|
|
056 if ((err = mp_div_2d (&r, s, &r, NULL)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
057 goto LBL_R;
|
|
058 \}
|
|
059
|
|
060 /* compute y = b**r mod a */
|
|
061 if ((err = mp_init (&y)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
062 goto LBL_R;
|
|
063 \}
|
|
064 if ((err = mp_exptmod (b, &r, a, &y)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
065 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
066 \}
|
|
067
|
|
068 /* if y != 1 and y != n1 do */
|
|
069 if (mp_cmp_d (&y, 1) != MP_EQ && mp_cmp (&y, &n1) != MP_EQ) \{
|
|
070 j = 1;
|
|
071 /* while j <= s-1 and y != n1 */
|
|
072 while ((j <= (s - 1)) && mp_cmp (&y, &n1) != MP_EQ) \{
|
|
073 if ((err = mp_sqrmod (&y, a, &y)) != MP_OKAY) \{
|
|
074 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
075 \}
|
|
076
|
|
077 /* if y == 1 then composite */
|
|
078 if (mp_cmp_d (&y, 1) == MP_EQ) \{
|
|
079 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
080 \}
|
|
081
|
|
082 ++j;
|
|
083 \}
|
|
084
|
|
085 /* if y != n1 then composite */
|
|
086 if (mp_cmp (&y, &n1) != MP_EQ) \{
|
|
087 goto LBL_Y;
|
|
088 \}
|
|
089 \}
|
|
090
|
|
091 /* probably prime now */
|
|
092 *result = MP_YES;
|
|
093 LBL_Y:mp_clear (&y);
|
|
094 LBL_R:mp_clear (&r);
|
|
095 LBL_N1:mp_clear (&n1);
|
|
096 return err;
|
|
097 \}
|
|
098 #endif
|
|
099
|
|
\end{alltt}
|
|
\end{small}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
\backmatter
|
|
\appendix
|
|
\begin{thebibliography}{ABCDEF}
|
|
\bibitem[1]{TAOCPV2}
|
|
Donald Knuth, \textit{The Art of Computer Programming}, Third Edition, Volume Two, Seminumerical Algorithms, Addison-Wesley, 1998
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[2]{HAC}
|
|
A. Menezes, P. van Oorschot, S. Vanstone, \textit{Handbook of Applied Cryptography}, CRC Press, 1996
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[3]{ROSE}
|
|
Michael Rosing, \textit{Implementing Elliptic Curve Cryptography}, Manning Publications, 1999
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[4]{COMBA}
|
|
Paul G. Comba, \textit{Exponentiation Cryptosystems on the IBM PC}. IBM Systems Journal 29(4): 526-538 (1990)
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[5]{KARA}
|
|
A. Karatsuba, Doklay Akad. Nauk SSSR 145 (1962), pp.293-294
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[6]{KARAP}
|
|
Andre Weimerskirch and Christof Paar, \textit{Generalizations of the Karatsuba Algorithm for Polynomial Multiplication}, Submitted to Design, Codes and Cryptography, March 2002
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[7]{BARRETT}
|
|
Paul Barrett, \textit{Implementing the Rivest Shamir and Adleman Public Key Encryption Algorithm on a Standard Digital Signal Processor}, Advances in Cryptology, Crypto '86, Springer-Verlag.
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[8]{MONT}
|
|
P.L.Montgomery. \textit{Modular multiplication without trial division}. Mathematics of Computation, 44(170):519-521, April 1985.
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[9]{DRMET}
|
|
Chae Hoon Lim and Pil Joong Lee, \textit{Generating Efficient Primes for Discrete Log Cryptosystems}, POSTECH Information Research Laboratories
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[10]{MMB}
|
|
J. Daemen and R. Govaerts and J. Vandewalle, \textit{Block ciphers based on Modular Arithmetic}, State and {P}rogress in the {R}esearch of {C}ryptography, 1993, pp. 80-89
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[11]{RSAREF}
|
|
R.L. Rivest, A. Shamir, L. Adleman, \textit{A Method for Obtaining Digital Signatures and Public-Key Cryptosystems}
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[12]{DHREF}
|
|
Whitfield Diffie, Martin E. Hellman, \textit{New Directions in Cryptography}, IEEE Transactions on Information Theory, 1976
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[13]{IEEE}
|
|
IEEE Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic (ANSI/IEEE Std 754-1985)
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[14]{GMP}
|
|
GNU Multiple Precision (GMP), \url{http://www.swox.com/gmp/}
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[15]{MPI}
|
|
Multiple Precision Integer Library (MPI), Michael Fromberger, \url{http://thayer.dartmouth.edu/~sting/mpi/}
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[16]{OPENSSL}
|
|
OpenSSL Cryptographic Toolkit, \url{http://openssl.org}
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[17]{LIP}
|
|
Large Integer Package, \url{http://home.hetnet.nl/~ecstr/LIP.zip}
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[18]{ISOC}
|
|
JTC1/SC22/WG14, ISO/IEC 9899:1999, ``A draft rationale for the C99 standard.''
|
|
|
|
\bibitem[19]{JAVA}
|
|
The Sun Java Website, \url{http://java.sun.com/}
|
|
|
|
\end{thebibliography}
|
|
|
|
\input{tommath.ind}
|
|
|
|
\end{document}
|